AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV7 3 1-Usr

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
V7.3.1
User Guide
Version Number: V7.3.1
March 2011
Copyright (c) 2000-2011 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator, the aspen leaf
logo and Plantelligence and Enterprise Optimization are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology,
Inc., Burlington, MA.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech
proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of
AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of
the software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software
may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION,
ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Aspen Technology, Inc.

200 Wheeler Road
Burlington, MA 01803-5501
USA
Phone: 781 221-6400
Toll Free: 888-996-7100
URL: http://www.aspentech.com
Contents
1 Introduction .......................................................................................................11
Main Features ................................................................................................ 11
Links to Process Simulator Software Programs ......................................... 11
Mapping of Simulator Models to Process Equipment Types......................... 11
Sizing of Equipment.............................................................................. 12
Capital Investment and Schedules: Engineer-Procure-Construct................. 12
Development of Operating Costs ............................................................ 12
Investment Analysis and Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Link to Your
Spreadsheets....................................................................................... 12
Alternative Capacities and Locations ....................................................... 12
Detailed, Interactive Process Economics.................................................. 13
Links to Project Evaluation Programs ...................................................... 13
Understanding Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Project Workflow .................... 13
The Guide ..................................................................................................... 14
Organization ........................................................................................ 14
Related Documentation ................................................................................... 15
Installation Notes ................................................................................. 15
Known Issues and Workarounds............................................................. 16
New Features in Aspen Economic Evaluation V7.3 .................................... 16
Icarus Reference .................................................................................. 16
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings ..................................................... 16
Technical Support .......................................................................................... 16
Online Technical Support Center ............................................................ 16
2 Getting Started...................................................................................................17
Starting Aspen Process Economic Analyzer ........................................................ 17
Starting a Project Scenario .............................................................................. 18
Creating a New Project Scenario ............................................................ 18
Importing an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 Project Scenario .... 22
Opening an Existing Project Scenario ................................................................ 24
Working with Templates.................................................................................. 26
Adding a Template. .............................................................................. 26
Creating a Project by Importing a Template............................................. 27
Understanding the Icarus Interface .................................................................. 27
Project Explorer ................................................................................... 28
Main Window ....................................................................................... 29
List View ............................................................................................. 32
Palette ................................................................................................ 34
Customizing the Icarus Interface............................................................ 38
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer's Toolbar............................................. 40
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Menu Bar ............................................ 42
Working with Project Scenarios ........................................................................ 46
Saving Project Scenarios ....................................................................... 46
1 Introduction 3
Deleting Project Scenarios ..................................................................... 47
Salvaging Project Scenarios................................................................... 48
Unlocking Project Scenarios................................................................... 49
Copying Project Directories.................................................................... 50
Preferences ................................................................................................... 51
General............................................................................................... 52
Forms ................................................................................................. 53
Backup/Recovery ................................................................................. 53
Process ............................................................................................... 54
Locations ............................................................................................ 55
Logging............................................................................................... 58
3 Defining the Project Basis ..................................................................................59

Project Properties........................................................................................... 60
General Project Data ...................................................................................... 61
Importing old Standard basis files .................................................................... 62
Basis for Capital Costs .................................................................................... 62
Input Units of Measure Customization ..................................................... 63
Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization .................................... 65
General Specs...................................................................................... 66
Construction Workforce......................................................................... 74
Indexing ............................................................................................. 78
Process Design............................................................................................... 81
Simulator Type and Simulator File Name ................................................. 81
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs.............................................. 81
Project Component Map Specifications .................................................... 84
Default Simulator Mapping Specs ........................................................... 86
Design Criteria..................................................................................... 90
Utility Specifications ........................................................................... 102
Investment Analysis ..................................................................................... 105
Investment Parameters....................................................................... 105
Operating Unit Costs........................................................................... 110
Raw Material Specifications ................................................................. 112
Product Specifications ......................................................................... 115
Developing Streams ..................................................................................... 118
Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream ............................................... 119
Mixture Specs Dialog Box .................................................................... 122
Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting Costs in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer ........................................................................................... 123
Stream Connectivity ........................................................................... 124
Creating A New Stream....................................................................... 125
Deleting a Stream .............................................................................. 128
Specification Libraries ................................................................................... 129
Customizing Specification Libraries ....................................................... 130
Selecting to Use a Different Specification File......................................... 133
Changing File Directory Location .......................................................... 134
4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data .............................................................135

Overview..................................................................................................... 135
Preparing Simulation Reports......................................................................... 135
AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Simulator link .................. 136
ChemCAD Report Generation ............................................................... 137
1 Introduction 4
HYSIM Report Generation.................................................................... 138
HYSYS Report Generation.................................................................... 140
SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report Generation ............................... 142
Loading Simulation Data ............................................................................... 144
Viewing Data Derived from Simulator ................................................... 146
Working with Block Flow Diagrams ................................................................. 147
Displaying the Block Flow Diagram ....................................................... 147
The Drag & Find Feature ..................................................................... 148
Accessing Commands in the Block Flow Diagram.................................... 149
Zooming ........................................................................................... 150
BlockFlow Diagram View Menu ............................................................. 151
Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components.................................... 152
Component Status.............................................................................. 160
Deleting Mappings.............................................................................. 160
Tower Configurations .................................................................................... 161
Sizing Selection ........................................................................................... 172
Project Sizing Selection................................................................................. 172
Specifying Additional Components .................................................................. 174
Working with Process Flow Diagrams .............................................................. 174
Editing the Layout .............................................................................. 175
Process Flow Diagram View Menu ......................................................... 175
Setting Grid Properties........................................................................ 178
Editing Connectivity............................................................................ 178
Adding a Stream ................................................................................ 180
Drawing a Disconnected Stream........................................................... 182
Working with Streams......................................................................... 183
5 Defining Project Components ...........................................................................185

Adding an Area ............................................................................................ 186
Adding a Project Component.......................................................................... 186
Method 1: Dragging a Component from the Palette ................................ 187
Method 2: Using the Pop-Up Menu ....................................................... 188
Entering Component Specifications................................................................. 190
Defining Installation Bulks ............................................................................. 192
Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments .............................................................. 193
Mat’l/Man-hours Additions ................................................................... 195
Pipe – General Specs .......................................................................... 195
Pipe – Item Details ............................................................................. 195
Duct ................................................................................................. 197
Civil.................................................................................................. 198
Steel ................................................................................................ 198
Instrumentation ................................................................................. 198
Electrical ........................................................................................... 201
Insulation.......................................................................................... 201
Paint................................................................................................. 202
Defining Area Specifications........................................................................... 202
Importing Areas and Components .................................................................. 203
Importing an Entire Scenario ......................................................................... 204
Copying Components .................................................................................... 205
Cut and Paste .................................................................................... 205
Drag and Drop ................................................................................... 205
Modifying Components.................................................................................. 206
1 Introduction 5
Copying Areas ............................................................................................. 206
Deleting Components.................................................................................... 206
Re-numbering Components ................................................................. 207
Deleting Areas ............................................................................................. 207
Re-Numbering Areas .......................................................................... 208
Using the Custom Model Tool......................................................................... 208
Creating a Template ........................................................................... 212
Running the Custom Model Tool at Project-Level for Batch Update............ 213
6 Sizing Project Components...............................................................................215

Overview..................................................................................................... 215
Sizing for Project Components Mapped from Simulator Items .................. 215
Interactive Sizing Expert ..................................................................... 216
Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped from Simulator Items ............ 217
Resizing Project Components ............................................................... 217
Creating Streams to Connect to Equipment Items ............................................ 218
Using the Interactive Sizing Form................................................................... 221
Utility Resources ................................................................................ 224
Global Sizing Selection.................................................................................. 228
Sizing Areas ................................................................................................ 230
Sizing Requirements, Calculations, and Defaults .............................................. 232
Air Coolers ........................................................................................ 232
Agitated Tanks................................................................................... 234
Compressors ..................................................................................... 235
Crushers ........................................................................................... 236
Crystallizers....................................................................................... 237
Dryers .............................................................................................. 237
Dust Collectors .................................................................................. 238
Filters ............................................................................................... 239
Heat Exchangers ................................................................................ 239
Pumps .............................................................................................. 242
Screens ............................................................................................ 244
Towers.............................................................................................. 245
Vessels ............................................................................................. 257
7 Piping and Instrumentation Models .................................................................265

Interconnecting Volumetric P&ID Lines............................................................ 265
Open an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project ....................................... 265
Run Interconnect Piping Lines .............................................................. 265
Connecting Piping Lines ...................................................................... 267
Disconnecting Piping Lines................................................................... 268
Renaming a Line Tag .......................................................................... 268
Saving All Connections and (optionally) Updating the Project ................... 269
Getting the Connected Line List Report ................................................. 269
Mapping Streams to Piping Lines .................................................................... 271
Mapping Streams to Piping Lines .......................................................... 272
Un-mapping Streams to Piping Lines .................................................... 273
Using the Auto-Map Option.................................................................. 274
8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries ................................................................277

Equipment Model Library (EML)...................................................................... 277
1 Introduction 6
Unit Cost Library (UCL) ................................................................................. 277
Developing and Using an Equipment Model Library (EML) .................................. 278
Creating an EML................................................................................. 278
Adding an Item to an EML ................................................................... 279
Adding an EML Item to a Project Scenario ............................................. 281
Developing and Using a Unit Cost Library (UCL) ............................................... 285
Creating a Unit Cost Library................................................................. 285
Adding an Item to a UCL ..................................................................... 286
Adding a UCL Item to a Project ............................................................ 288
Creating an Assembly of UCL Items ...................................................... 290
Working with Cost Libraries ........................................................................... 294
Copying a Library Item ....................................................................... 294
Deleting a Library Item ....................................................................... 294
Escalating Library Costs ...................................................................... 294
Importing a Cost Library ..................................................................... 295
Duplicating a Cost Library ................................................................... 296
Deleting a Cost Library ....................................................................... 297
9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location..............................................................299

Changing Plant Capacity................................................................................ 299
Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM) ................................................................... 301
How ASM Works................................................................................. 301
Scale-Up Rule Set .............................................................................. 301
Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis ...................................................... 303
Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) ................................................................. 303
Relocation Terminology ....................................................................... 303
Workflow........................................................................................... 304
Relocating the Project ......................................................................... 307
ARM Knowledge Base.......................................................................... 308
10 Analyzer Utility Modules.................................................................................317

Introduction ................................................................................................ 317
Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design and Scope Generators for Utility
Systems............................................................................................ 317
AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design Module ....... 318
AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility Selection, Sizing, and Design
Module.............................................................................................. 318
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water (AUM_Water) ............................... 319
Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Cooling Water ................... 319
1. Overview ...................................................................................... 320
2. Working with the Cooling Water Model ............................................. 322
3. Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets ............................ 328
4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model ......................................... 336
Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Users:......................................... 346
AUM_Air...................................................................................................... 347
Utility Design and Scope Generator for Instrument and Plant Air .............. 347
Overview..................................................................................................... 347
Project areas and their project components ........................................... 347
Benefits: ........................................................................................... 348
How AUM_Air Works ........................................................................... 348
General AUM_Air Workflow ............................................................................ 348
Using AUM_Air ............................................................................................. 349
1 Introduction 7
Accessing AUM_Air ............................................................................. 349
The Initial Design ............................................................................... 351
Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data ................................................. 352
Guide for the Air Utility Model (AUM) .............................................................. 355
SPECS Organization Chart ................................................................... 356
About this SPECS Book ....................................................................... 356
About an Air Plant Unit........................................................................ 357
About Distribution Piping for an APU ..................................................... 358
Schematic ......................................................................................... 359
Configuration of Air Utility Project Components ................................................ 359
Project Components ........................................................................... 360
An “Air Plant Unit” - APU ..................................................................... 360
Schematic of an Air Plant Unit.............................................................. 361
General Layout .................................................................................. 362
Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas .............................................. 362
Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-by, Start-up ........................... 363
Design Considerations .................................................................................. 363
Units of Measure ................................................................................ 363
Air Utility Area ................................................................................... 364
Air Utility Project Components ............................................................. 364
Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate ................................... 364
Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate............................................ 365
Compressor Model Selection Method..................................................... 365
Interactive Specs ......................................................................................... 369
User Preferences ................................................................................ 369
Equipment Redundancy....................................................................... 370
Equipment Configurations ................................................................... 370
Basis for Design: Preferences - 1......................................................... 371
Configuration Layout Method and Distribution ........................................ 373
Example layout – group of areas served by APU “A” ............................... 374
Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs............................................ 374
Sample Layouts: One APU .................................................................. 375
Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs ........................................................... 375
Design Methods ........................................................................................... 375
Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping................................................... 375
Sample AUM_Air Worksheets ......................................................................... 377
List of AUM_Air Worksheets ................................................................. 377
Welcome Worksheet ........................................................................... 378
Control Center Worksheet ................................................................... 378
Guide Worksheet................................................................................ 379
Status Worksheet............................................................................... 384
Preferences Worksheet ....................................................................... 386
Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant Air to Areas Not Requiring
Instrument Air ................................................................................... 388
Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas to an APU.............................. 388
Report – Equipment Component Stats .................................................. 389
Report – Pipe Stats............................................................................. 391
11 Evaluating the Project ....................................................................................393

Running a Project Evaluation ......................................................................... 393
Reviewing and Revising Process Economics in the Analyzer Economics Module..... 395
Loading the Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) ...................................... 395
1 Introduction 8
Overview of Workbooks ...................................................................... 396
Revising Premises .............................................................................. 405
Saving AEM Workbook ........................................................................ 407
Discussion of Economic Premises ......................................................... 407
Reviewing Results in Aspen Icarus Reporter..................................................... 413
Accessing Aspen Reporter ................................................................... 413
Which Report Mode? ........................................................................... 416
Standard Reports ............................................................................... 417
List of Standard Reports...................................................................... 421
HTML Reports .................................................................................... 424
Management Reports .......................................................................... 426
Excel Reports..................................................................................... 429
Data Trending.................................................................................... 433
Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter............................................ 437
Creating a User Database.................................................................... 438
Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor .................................................................. 439
Accessing Icarus Editor ....................................................................... 439
Printing a Single Section ..................................................................... 440
Icarus Editor Toolbar .......................................................................... 440
Report Sections.................................................................................. 441
Reviewing Investment Analysis ...................................................................... 448
Viewing Investment Analysis ............................................................... 448
Equipment Summary .......................................................................... 449
Project Summary ............................................................................... 450
Cashflow ........................................................................................... 457
Executive Summary............................................................................ 462
Using the Reporting Assistant .............................................................. 464
Steps to customize the Run Summary worksheet: .................................. 467
Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>Template worksheet: ..... 468
Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>User defined functions: .. 468
Item Evaluation ........................................................................................... 470
Appendix A: Equipment and Slots of those Equipment Affected by Mapping .......473
Index ..................................................................................................................507
1 Introduction 9
1 Introduction
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, formerly known as Icarus Process

Evaluator (IPE), is designed to automate the preparation of detailed designs,
estimates, investment analysis and schedules from minimum scope definition,
whether from process simulation results or sized equipment lists. It lets you
evaluate the financial viability of process design concepts in minutes, so that
you can get early, detailed answers to the important questions of "How
much?", "How long?" and, most importantly, "Why?".
Main Features
Links to Process Simulator Software
Programs
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, formerly known as Aspen Icarus Process
Evaluator, uses expert system links to effect the automatic transfer of your
process simulator output results. Links are available to process simulator
programs from AspenTech, Chemstations, Hyprotech, SimSci and others.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer can link to virtually any commercial and
proprietary process simulator program.
Mapping of Simulator Models to Process

Equipment Types
Mapping relates each process simulator model to one or more of Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer’s list of several hundred types of process
equipment. A simulator heat exchanger model might be mapped to a fin-tube
type; a distillation model might be mapped into several items, such as trayed
tower, kettle-type reboiler, overhead condenser, and horizontal drum. Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer’s expert equipment selection makes the mapping
easy, allowing you to map one item at a time or all at once.
1 Introduction 11
Sizing of Equipment
Size of equipment is a prerequisite to costing and the results of size
calculations performed during process simulation are loaded automatically by
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. With Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,
you can revise sizes, enter your values for unsized equipment or develop
sizes using Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s built-in expert sizing
programs.
Capital Investment and Schedules:

Engineer-Procure-Construct
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer checks and prepares all of the necessary
specifications for detailed design, estimation, scheduling, and economic data.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer contains built-in, up-to-date knowledge
bases of:
Design, cost and scheduling data, methods and models.
Engineering, procurement and construction methods and procedures.
Critical path programming for development of design, procure and construct
schedules.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer comes with time-proven, field-tested,
industry-standard design and cost modeling and scheduling methods used by
project evaluators for projects worldwide. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s
detailed results are not based on factors. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s
estimates and schedules are consistent, being derived from your project
scope definition.
Development of Operating Costs

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer develops operating costs in tune to your
process design. You can override Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s values
and with each revision, you can see the impact of your choice on investment
analysis measures of profitability.
Investment Analysis and Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer’s Link to Your
Spreadsheets
In addition to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s basic measures such as
return on investment, payout time and discounted cash flow rate of return,
your spreadsheet programs can be linked to Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer’s investment analysis data.
Alternative Capacities and Locations

Analyzer allows you to evaluate alternate plant capacities and locations. You
can make a percentage adjustment to the capacity, and Analyzer will
1 Introduction 12
automatically re-size all project components and stream flows. You can
change the plant location (choosing from twenty-two different countries), and
Analyzer’s plant relocation technology will automatically revise the design and
cost basis parameters, including parity exchange rate, workforce rates,
productivities, and construction practices.
Detailed, Interactive Process Economics

Analyzer’s detailed economics module lets you perform interactive economic
scenarios. It develops key economic measures, including payout time, interest
rate of return, net present value, and income and expenses on changing any
economic premise. It performs economic analyses over the time line of a
project, from the strategic planning phase through engineering, procurement
and construction of the process facility, into start-up and throughout the
production life of the process facility. You can study the impact of cyclic
changes in market conditions and identify economic threats and opportunities
upon changing costs of feedstocks, products and/or utilities for each period in
the life of a project.
Links to Project Evaluation Programs

After your evaluation and selection of the best design, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer can prepare a project specs file in SPECS format. Then,
project evaluators using these systems can easily develop detailed funding or
bidding estimates and schedules.
Understanding Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer’s Project
Workflow
Before using Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, it may be helpful to review
the recommended project workflow.
1 Introduction 13
Notes:
 This workflow is recommended if you are bringing process simulator data
into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. However, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer lets you perform the same evaluation on a process comprised of
areas and components that you add in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,
rather than mapped from simulator models.
 During the project workflow, you can go back to previous steps to refine
the project.
The Guide
Organization
This guide contains the following:
1 Introduction 14
Chapter 1  Introduction  an overview of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
and the user's guide, as well as a list of related documentation and
information on technical support.
Chapter 2  Getting Started  instructions on how to start Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer, open a project, enter project specifications, and work with
the Icarus Interface.
Chapter 3  Defining the Project Basis  instructions on defining
specifications: units of measure, standard basis, component map, design
criteria, investment analysis, raw material, product, operating unit costs, and
utility.
Chapter 4  Loading and Mapping Simulation Data  instructions on
preparing different kinds of simulator reports for use in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer, loading simulator data, mapping simulator models to
Icarus project components, adding additional components to simulator
models, and viewing and defining simulator models in Block Flow Diagram
(BFD) and Process Flow Diagram (PFD) view.
Chapter 5  Defining Project Components  instructions on defining project
components, which are the pieces of the process plant that, when linked
together, complete a process.
Chapter 6  Sizing Project Components  instructions on sizing project
components.
Chapter 7 – Piping and Instrumentation Models – instructions on connection
pipelines between components and creating piping line list reports for
connected lines.
Chapter 8 – Developing and Using Cost Libraries  instructions on developing
cost libraries and adding library items as project components.
Chapter 9 – Changing Plant Capacity and Location  instructions on
modifying plant capacity and locations, as well as details on the parameters
affected by these modifications.
Chapter 10 - Analyzer Utility Modules – instructions on using Analyzer Utility
Modules for cooling water and air.
Chapter 11 - Evaluating the Project  instructions on running a project and
item evaluations and reviewing capital costs, operating costs, and investment
analysis reports.
Related Documentation
In addition to this document, a number of other documents are provided to
help users learn and use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. The
documentation set consists of the following:
Installation Notes
Aspen Economic Evaluation and Exchanger Design and Rating V7.3
Installation Guide
1 Introduction 15
Known Issues and Workarounds
Aspen Economic Evaluation V7.3 Release Notes
New Features in Aspen Economic

Evaluation V7.3
Aspen Economic Evaluation V7.3 Release Notes
Icarus Reference
Aspen Icarus Reference Guide, for Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings

IcarusPIDV7.3_Ref.PDF, for Icarus Piping and Instrumentation Drawings
Technical Support
Online Technical Support Center
AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenance
agreement can register to access the Online Technical Support Center at:
http://support.aspentech.com
HTU UTH
You use the Online Technical Support Center to:

 Access current product documentation.
 Search for technical tips, solutions, and frequently asked questions
(FAQs).
 Search for and download application examples.
 Search for and download service packs and product updates.
 Submit and track technical issues.
 Search for and review known limitations.
 Send suggestions.
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support
e-Bulletins. These e-Bulletins proactively alert you to important technical
support information such as:
 Technical advisories
 Product updates
 Service Pack announcements
 Product release announcements
1 Introduction 16
2 Getting Started
Starting Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer
After completing the installation, you can start Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer.
To start Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:

1 Click the Windows Start button, point to Programs, and then point to
AspenTech.
2 On the AspenTech menu, point to Economic Evaluation 7.3; then point
to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer starts. The Main window, empty because
no project is open, appears on the left. The Palette appears in the upper-right
and the Properties window appears in the lower-right.
2 Getting Started 17
You can change the position of these windows, as explained later in
Customizing the Icarus Interface (page 38).
X X
Starting a Project Scenario

Note: Viewing the sample project scenario provided with Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer before creating a new one will allow you to familiarize
yourself with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer without having to fill out
specifications. To open the sample project, follow the instructions under
Opening an Existing Project Scenario on page 24.X X
Creating a New Project Scenario

To create a new project scenario:
1 Do one of the following:
 On the File menu, click New.
-or-
 Click on the toolbar.

The Create New Project dialog box appears.
Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other than the default
one provided by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. See Preferences –
Locations on page 55 for instructions on adding project directories.
X X
2 Either click an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter a

new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.
However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation
points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.
3 Enter the Scenario Name.
This is the name of the scenario within the project. As with the Project Name,
long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation marks, such
as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are
not allowed.
If you do not enter a Scenario Name, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses
BaseCase as the default.
4 Click OK.
The Project Properties dialog box appears.
5 Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500 characters in
length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. . The
description can be edited later by accessing Project Properties from the
Project Basis view (see page 60).
X X
6 In the Units of Measure section, you can keep the default basis of
Inch-Pound (IP) or select Metric. The Units of Measure selection cannot be
changed after creating the project scenario.
7 If desired, enter more details about the project scenario in the Remarks
field. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters in length and can be
comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation. Remarks can be edited
later by accessing Project Properties from the Project Basis view (see
page 60).
X X
8 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Input Units of Measure
Specifications dialog box, which allows you to customize the units of
measure that appear on specification forms.
For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of M/H
(meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis project,
do the following:
9 Select Velocity and Flow Rate; then click Modify.
10 On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter CM/H as the new unit
name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units in
the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between the
two units is 100 because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
11 Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous dialog box.
When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the General Project Data form,
where you can select a country base and currency.
The default country base is US and the default currency is Dollars (USD).
Changing the country base automatically changes the currency to that of the
country base. You can, however, enter a currency different than that of the
country base. Just be sure to also enter a currency conversion rate (the
number of currency units per one country base currency unit).
Country base affects various system default values. Chapter 36 of Icarus
Reference provides a table listing the default values used for each country
base.
This is the only time you can enter country base and currency. Other
specifications on this form can be entered later by selecting General Project
Data in the Project Basis view (see page 61).
X X
12 Click OK when finished entering General Project Data.

The Main Window now displays Project Explorer and the List view. See
“Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page 27 for instructions on working
X X
with these and other features now available on the interface.
Importing an Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer 5.0/5.1 Project Scenario
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides an Import feature so that you can
import your Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0 or 5.1 project scenarios
into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V7.3. You can also select an Analyzer
2.0B project scenario to import.
The Import feature allows you to use Additional Project Component files in
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V7.3. In order to do so, you must first
import the Additional Project Component file into an Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer 5.0/5.1 project scenario and then import the Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 project scenario into Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer V7.3.
To import an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 or Analyzer
2.0B project scenario:
 On the File menu, click New.
-or-

The Create New Project dialog box appears.
Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other than the default
one provided by Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator. See Preferences – Locations
on page 55 for instructions.
X X
2 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter

a new Project Name. Long filenames are accepted, including spaces.
However, punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation
points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*), are not allowed.
3 Type the Scenario Name.
This is the name of the scenario within the project. The selected Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer 5.0 or Analyzer 2.0B project file’s project and
component specifications will be imported into this scenario.
Again, long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while punctuation
marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and
asterisks (*) are not allowed.
After making an entry in the Scenario Name field, the Import button
becomes active.
4 Click Import.
The Select Import Type dialog box appears.
5 Select either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0 and 5.1 or Analyzer
2.0B and click OK.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
6 Click the project scenario folder; then click OK.

The project scenario’s settings will be imported into the new project scenario.
Opening an Existing Project

Scenario
To open an existing project scenario:
 On the File menu, click Open.
-or-
The Open Existing Project dialog box appears.
Note: In the pictured dialog box, the project named Expansion has been
expanded on the tree structure to show the scenario named BaseCase.
The tree structure on the left side of the dialog box displays the projects in
the default project folder:
...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.3\Data\Archives_Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer
Clicking “+” next to a project expands the view to display the scenarios under
that project. Selecting a scenario displays the following scenario information
in the pane on the right:
o Version of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in which the
scenario was created
o Name of the user who created the scenario
o Name of the computer on which the scenario was created
o Units of measure used in the scenario
2 Click a scenario; then click OK.
The project scenario opens. The Main Window now displays Project Explorer
and the List view. See “Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page 27 for
X X
instructions on working with these and other features now available on the
interface.
Palette Shortcut
You can also open a project from the Palette, which appears to the right of
the Main Window in the default interface arrangement (it can also be floated
in the Main Window or dragged onto the Main Window and re-sized, as shown
below).
To open a project from the Palette :
 In the Projects view tab, right-click a scenario; then, on the menu that
appears, click Open.
This opens the selected scenario.
Working with Templates

Adding a Template.
To add a new template:
1 Click File | New Template.
The Create New Template dialog box appears.
2 On the Create New Template dialog box type the Scenario name.
3 Click OK.
4 On the Project Properties dialog box, enter:
o the project description
o the units of measure (IP or Metric)
o any (optional) remarks
5 Click OK.
The project is created. Note that the Title Bar indicates Templates (name
you entered for the scenario).
Creating a Project by Importing a Template
You can create a new project based on an existing template.
To do this:
1 Launch the Aspen Economic Evaluation application.
2 Click File | New.
3 On the Create New Project dialog box that appears, specify the project
and scenario name.
4 Click the Template button on the right of the dialog box.
The Import Template dialog box appears showing h all available templates.
5 Click the template you want to import; then click OK.
The Project Properties dialog box appears, on which you can continue to
enter information for the new project.
Note: When opening a project from a template, or opening a template itself,

not all of the buttons on the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Toolbar are
available.
Understanding the Icarus

Interface
The Icarus interface lets you see multiple windows and documents. You can
customize the interface arrangement.
The following is the default interface arrangement, with a specifications form
open in the Main Window.
The Icarus interface includes the following features:
Title Bar - Displays the project file name and current Main Window view.
Menu Bar - Displays menu options.
Toolbar - Allows access to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer functions. See
page 40.X X
Main Window - Provides workspace for all Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
documents, List view, specification forms, and other views. See page 29.X X
Project Explorer - Organizes project items in tree format. See page 28. X X
Palette - Allows access to libraries, projects, and components. See page 34. X X
Status Bar - Displays Aspen Process Economic Analyzer system status.

Properties Window – Describes the field selected on specifications form.
See page 34. X X
Project Explorer
Project Explorer is a graphical representation of the project. It has three
views:
 Project Basis view
 Process view
 Project view
Each view organizes items in a tree format.
To switch views:
 Click the appropriate tab at the bottom of Project Explorer. (Stretching the
width of the Project Explorer will display the full names on the tabs.)
The different views are described on page 28. X X
To expand a tree level:

 Click the PLUS SIGN next to the condensed level.
To condense a tree level:
 Click the MINUS SIGN next to the expanded level.
Project Explorer Views

Project Basis View displays project basis specifications. Double-click on a
specification to view and/or modify it. A red arrow on an icon in this view
indicates that you can right-click on the icon for options.
Level Icon Description
2 Specifications folder
3 Specification
Process View displays simulator data information. In this view, simulator

items can be mapped to Icarus project components. Mapped items can then
be sized, modified, and/or deleted.
2 Main Project, containing a group of simulator areas
3 Process simulator area
4 Unmapped simulator block (yellow)
Mapped simulator block (green)
As in a process simulator, like AspenPlus or HYSYS, blocks represent different

operations within the process. A block is sometimes referred to as a unit
operation.
Project View displays project data information. In this view, mapped items
can be sized, modified, and/or deleted. In addition, new areas and Icarus
project components can be defined.
1 Main Project, containing the default Main Area and any

user-added areas
2 Area
3 Project component
Main Window
The Main Window is located to the right of Project Explorer by default. The
Main Window is a workspace for all Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
documents, the List view, and other views. The relative size of each window
can be adjusted by clicking on the division bar and dragging it to the desired
location.
Here, the Main Window in Workbook Mode displays several tabs because a
component specifications form and a project specifications form have been
opened.
Workbook Mode
By default, the Main Window is in Workbook Mode. In this mode, tabs are
placed at the bottom of the window. These tabs represent all windows open in
the Main Window. Clicking on a tab brings the associated window to the
foreground.
Clicking Tile or Cascade on the Window menu displays all windows open in
the Main Window. Regardless of the window arrangement, the tabs are still
at the bottom of the Main Window when in Workbook Mode. Clicking the
maximize button ( ) on a window returns all windows to full tab view.
Clicking the condense button ( ) on the menu bar displays all windows open
in the Main Window as they were when last condensed.
This is how the Main Window appears when in Workbook Mode with
Cascade selected as the condensed window arrangement.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets float Project Explorer, the Palette, and
the Properties Window in the Main window. When in this state, these windows
behave identically to other windows that are part of the Main Window. See
“Customizing the Icarus Interface” on page 38 for details.
X X
You can turn off Workbook Mode by unmarking Workbook Mode on the
View menu.
When Workbook Mode is off, no tabs are displayed. In this Mode, to bring a
window to the front, you must click on the desired window or select the
desired window from the Window menu.
List View
The List view in the Main Window displays details on items selected in
Project Explorer. For example, when you click on an area in Project Explorer’s
Project view, the List view displays a list of all components in the area. This
is referred to as the “area-level” list (shown below), in which the components
are displayed in rows with component details in columns. When you click on a
component in Project Explorer’s Project view, the List provides information
only on the selected component, with component details listed in rows. This is
referred to as the “component-level”.
Note: In the interface arrangement pictured here, the Palette and the
Properties Window have been hidden to make room for the Main Window.
to press
hide or display the Palette ALT+1
hide or display the Properties Window ALT+2
hide or display Project Explorer ALT+0
Filtering Mechanism
You can limit area-level lists to a single category of component. To do so,
click the drop-down arrow on the toolbar and click on a category.
For example, if you click “? Incomplete Items,” the list will only include
components that still have specifications that need to be entered in order for
the component to be included in an evaluation.
Column Settings
You can select which columns appear on the area-level list and in which
order.
To change column settings on the area-level list:

1 Right-click any of the column headings.
A pop-up menu lists all of the columns. Columns currently displayed are
checked.
2 To simply hide/unhide a column, click it on the menu.

3 To change the order, click Settings on the menu.
The Settings dialog box appears.
 To move a column to the right on the List View, click Move Down.
 To move a column to the left, click Move Up.
 To return the columns to the default setting (shown above), click Reset.
4 Click OK to save the settings.
When you restart Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, all columns will be
displayed in the default order unless Save Window States is selected in
Preferences (by default, Save Window States is selected). See “Saving
Window States” on page 40 for more information.
X40
Palette
The Palette contains elements that you can apply to the project scenario. If
you think of Project Explorer as a picture of the project scenario, you might
think of the Palette’s contents as the pigments and dyes used to first sketch
out and then color in that picture.
For example, if you wish to import areas or components from another
scenario into your current scenario, you can double-click on the scenario in
the Palette to get a listing of its areas and components and then drag the
area/component to the Project Explorer’s Project View. (See “Importing Areas
and Components” on 202.)
Likewise, the Palette’s Libraries view contains libraries of Project Basis

specification files that, in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, you can select
to use. From the Palette, you can develop the libraries by creating new files,
modifying existing files, and importing files. (See “Specification Libraries” on
page 129.)
X X
Finally, when you add a component to the project scenario, you can choose
from the components listed in the Palette’s Components view. Then, after you
add the component, it appears in Project Explorer’s Project view. (See
“Adding a Project Component” on page 186).
X X
In the default interface arrangement, the Palette appears on the right side of
the screen. Like Project Explorer, it can be displayed in a variety of ways. See
“Customizing the Icarus Interface” (page 38) for display options. To
X X
hide/display the Palette, press ALT+1 or used the checked command on the
View menu.
As indicated previously, the Palette has four views: Projects, Libraries,
Components, and Templates. The Components view, shown below, has a
scrollable split window that displays details on equipment items. The division
bar can be adjusted to hide or expand the details section.
Note: The Palette pictured in this section has been dragged onto the Main
Window and re-sized.
In addition to allowing you to import the contents of other scenarios, the

Projects view provides options for opening scenarios, viewing scenario
properties, and deleting scenarios. Right-click on a project scenario to access
the pop-up menu of options. The Projects view displays all projects in the
default project folder and any other active project folders. (See “Preferences,”
particularly the “Locations” subsection on page 55, for instructions.)
X X
Properties Window
When you select a field on a specifications form, the Properties Window
provides a description of the field. The description often includes minimum,
maximum, and default values.
Here, the Properties Window (docked on the right side of the screen)
displays information on the Heat Transfer Area field, which is selected on the
specifications form.
Clicking on the Properties Window freezes and unfreezes the content. When
the content is frozen, you can move to another field while retaining the
description of the original field in the Properties Window.
Like the Palette and Project Explorer, the Properties Window can be displayed
in a variety of ways. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” on page 38 for
X X
display options.
To hide/display the Properties Window, press ALT+2 or use the checked

command on the View menu.
Templates Tab
Use the Templates tab to access templates. Shown below are the ten
templates included in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. If you had created
custom templates, they would appear on this list.
Customizing the Icarus Interface

In the default interface arrangement, Project Explorer docks to the left edge
and the Palette and the Properties Window share the right. When docked,
windows remain attached to an edge and all other windows are sized to fit in
the remaining space available.
Clicking on a border of any of these three windows accesses a pop-up menu
from which you can select Allow Docking. When Allow Docking is marked, the
window can be docked to any edge.
Note: When the Float In Main window is selected on the pop-up menu, the
Allow Docking option is inactive.
To dock to a different edge:

1 Click the border that contains the Close button ( ) and hold down the
mouse button. A bounding outline will appear as you drag the window.
2 Drag the outline to the desired edge and release the mouse button.
When multiple windows are docked to the same edge, you can use the
division bar to adjust the relative sizes. You can also use the Contract/Expand
( / ) buttons to either switch from one window to the other or split the
side.
Undocking by Dragging onto Main Window

One way to undock the window is by dragging it onto the Main Window. Its
size can then be adjusted.
Float In Main Window Option
You can at any time select Float In Main Window on the pop-up menu. In this
state, the window behaves like the List view or a specifications form, with a
tab at the bottom of the Main Window.
Saving Window States
If you are using the default Preferences, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
will save the interface arrangement. This way, when you open Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer the arrangement is the same as you left it.
You can also set the Preferences so that Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
opens displaying the default arrangement. See “Preferences,” particularly the
subsection on the General tab view (page 52), for more information.
X X
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer's Toolbar

By default, the toolbar is docked under the menu bar. However, you can float
the toolbar by clicking on a blank area of the toolbar and dragging it. You can
also dock the toolbar to the bottom of the screen or vertically to the edge of
the Project Explorer, Main Window, or the Palette. To do so, drag the toolbar
over any one of these areas until an outline of the toolbar appears. Release
the mouse button when the outline appears in the desired area.
The following toolbar buttons are available in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer:
Click to
this
Create a new project scenario. See “Creating a New Project Scenario” on

page 18. X X
Open an existing project scenario. See “Opening an Existing Project

Scenario” on page 24. X X
Save the current project. See “Saving a Project Scenario” on page 46. X X
Print.
Load simulator data. See “Loading Simulator Data” on page 144. X X
Map simulator items to corresponding Icarus project components and size

the component. See “Mapping Simulator Items” on page 152. X X
Run project evaluation. See page 393 for instructions.

X X
Load Capital Costs and other reports. See page 413 for instructions. X X
Load investment analysis results. See page 448 for instructions.

X X
Edit connectivity in Process Flow Diagram (PFD) view. See on “Editing

Connectivity” on page 178. X X
Add stream in PFD view. See “Adding a Stream” on page 180.

X X X X
Draw disconnected stream in PFD view. See “Drawing a Disconnected

X
Stream” on page 182.

X X X
Zoom in. Active in PFD and Block Flow Diagram (BFD) view.
Zoom out. Active in PFD and BFD view.
Hide/Display ports in PFD view.
Go back. Navigate back through previously viewed links.
Go forward. Navigate forward through previously viewed links.
Other buttons that appear on the toolbar are always inactive in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer. They are for use in other Icarus programs.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Menu Bar
File Menu
Click to
this
New Start a new project scenario. Details on page 18.

X X
New Start a new template.

Template
Open Open an existing project scenario. Details on page 24. X X
Open Open an existing template.

Template
Close Close the current project scenario.
Save Save the current project scenario. Details on page 46. X X
Save As Save the current project scenario as a different file. Details on page 46.
X X
Save As Save the current project scenario as a template.

Template
Print Print the form or report currently active in the Main Window.
Print Preview how form or report will appear printed.
Preview
Print View and modify printer name and properties, paper size and source, and
Setup orientation.
Page Define page specifications.
Setup
Exit Close Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
Run Menu
Click this to
Load Data Load simulator data. See page 144 for details.
X X
Map Items Map simulator items to Icarus project components and size
components. See page 152 for details.
X X
Evaluate Run a project evaluation. See page 393 for details. X X
Project
Develop This sub-menu contains commands for use in Aspen In-Plant Cost
Schedule Estimator only.
Scan for Scan for potential errors in the project evaluation.
Errors
Add Entry for Generate report based on template in Reporting Assistant. See
Reporting pages 464 through 464 for instructions.
X X X X
Assistant
Regenerate Regenerate the Block Flow Diagram. If you have indicated that some
Block of the simulator streams are utility streams, the placement of blocks
Diagram will reflect this.
Regenerate Regenerate the Process Flow Diagram. See “Working with Process
Process Flow Flow Diagrams,” page 174, for details.
X X
Diagram
Reroute All Reroute all streams on the Process Flow Diagram.
Streams
Re-number Re-number project components or project areas so that the
numbering contains no gaps. Details on page 207. X X
View Menu
Click this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page 40 for description of the toolbar.
X X
Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page 27 for description of the status
X X
bar.
Project View or hide Project Explorer. See page 28 forr description of Project
X X
Explorer Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See page 34 for description of the Palette.
X X
Properties View or hide the Properties Window. See page 34 for a description of X X
Window the Properties Window.

Workbook Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page 29 for an explanation of X X
Mode Workbook Mode.

Capital Costs Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for interactive reports (on-screen,
(on
View HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation reports (.ccp).
(. The
Project Evaluation need
needss to have already been run. See page 413 and X X
page 439 for details.

X X
Investment Display Investment Analysis spreadsheets. See “Reviewing

Analysis View Investment Analysis” on page 448 for details.
X X
Block Flow Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded simulator data. See
Diagram page 147 for details.
X X
Process Flow Display Process Flow Diagram. This command is not active until you
Diagram have mapped the simulator items. See page 174 for details. X X
Streams List Display a read

read-only list of all simulator-derived
derived stream properties in a
spreadsheet. You can customize some of the features of the
spreadsheet (which stream properties to display, whether to display
na
names
mes of the properties, and the display style of the property values)
by editing the stream list template file:
...
...\ Economic Evaluation V7.3\Data\ICS\strlist.fil
Error Display error messages found in the llast
ast Capital Costs evaluation.
Messages
Tools Menu
Click this to
Report Editor Launch Icarus Editor. See “Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor” on
page 439 for instructions.
X X
External Access the simulator link for importing simulation data. See page 140
X X
Simulation for instructions on using this tool with HYSYS.

Import Tool
Options Access Options sub-menu. See below.
Options Sub-Menu of Tools Menu
Click this to
Automatic Automatic Item Evaluation

Item
Evaluation
View Have the results normally reported in Icarus spreadsheets exported to
Spreadsheets Excel. The following Excel workbook, containing some Excel macros,
in Excel is provided as a sample:
...\ Economic Evaluation V7.3\Data\ICS\IpeWb.xls
A copy of this workbook also resides in each project directory. When
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer needs to report the results (that is,
when you click the Investment Analysis button), the results will be
exported to ASCII delimited files and loaded into IpeWb.xls. The
macro contained in the workbook will also be run.
Reporting Access the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box, where you can
Assistant create your own customized report spreadsheets, combining
information from all other Icarus generated spreadsheets. See
pages 464 through 464 for details.
X X X X
Custom Tasks This command is reserved for future releases.

Preferences Access Preferences. See page 52 for details.
X X
Window Menu
Click this to
Cascade View the Main Window contents in Cascade mode. See page 29. X X
Tile View the Main Window contents in Tile mode. See page 29.
X X
Arrange Icons Return all minimized windows to the bottom of the Main Window.
# XXX View opened window in the Main Window.
Help Menu
Click this to
Contents Access Aspen Icarus Online Help.

Documentation Display list of available documentation.
Training Display training information.
Product Display product support information.
Support on the
Web
About Display program information and copyright.
Working with Project Scenarios

This section explains how to save, delete, salvage, and unlock project
scenarios.
Saving Project Scenarios

To save a project scenario:
 Click on the toolbar or click Save on the File menu.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer saves any changes.
If you are using the default Preferences settings, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer will ask if you wish to save any changes when you close the project
scenario.
You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see page 52).X X
To save the scenario with a new name:

1 Click Save As on the File menu.
Save As is useful when studying alternatives.
Note: You can save scenarios to project directories other than the default
one provided by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. See “Preferences,”
particularly the “Locations” subsection on page 55, for instructions.
X X
2 Specify a Project Name and Scenario Name and click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer saves the scenario as specified.
Deleting Project Scenarios

Delete project scenarios when they are no longer needed. Deleting old
scenarios opens free disk space and makes working with scenarios easier.
To delete a project scenario:

1 In the project directory, right-click the scenario within and, on the menu
that appears, click Delete.
A dialog box asks you to confirm deletion.
Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see
page 52).
X X
2 Click Yes to delete the project scenario.

-or-
Click No to retain the project scenario.
Salvaging Project Scenarios

If you exit Aspen Process Economic Analyzer abnormally without being able to
save the current project scenario, you can salvage the project scenario from
cached project information.
To salvage a project scenario

1 Restart Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
A window appears asking if you wish to save the cached information found in
storage.
2 Click Yes.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Salvage Project As dialog
box.
3 Specify a project and scenario name.

You cannot overwrite the scenario being salvaged. Y you must specify a
project and scenario name different from that of the original scenario.
4 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates the new scenario. Except in name,
this project scenario is identical to the scenario that was open when Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer was abnormally exited. After creating the new
scenario, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer asks if you want to open it.
Unlocking Project Scenarios

If Aspen Process Economic Analyzer crashes while you have a project scenario
open, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer remembers that you have the project
scenario checked out. When you re-open Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,
you will have to unlock the project scenario before opening it.
Anyone trying to open a locked project is denied access and provided with a
message that states the time the project scenario was checked out, the user
name of the person who checked it out, and the computer on which it was
checked out.
A project can only be unlocked by the user who checked it out or by an
administrator.
To unlock a project scenario

 Right-click the project scenario in the Palette and click Unlock on the
pop-up menu.
You can now open the project scenario as you normally would.
Copying Project Directories

Within a project directory, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates an
independent folder for each project and also creates, within a project folder,
an independent folder for each project scenario. This makes it easy to move
project scenario files from one computer to another on the same network.
Simply copy and paste the folder in Windows Explorer.
You can also copy an entire project directory with multiple project and project
scenario folders. Doing so creates an identical set of folders and files in the
new location.
Note: You can copy project directories only in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer V7.3. To use an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer 5.0/5.1 project
scenario, you must import it first (see page 22 for instructions).
X X
See “Preferences,” particularly the “Locations” subsection on page 55, for

X X
information on adding project directories and setting a new default project

directory.
Preferences
The settings in Preferences allow you to specify how Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer will act each time it is used.
To access Preferences:
U
1 On the Tools menu, click Options.

2 On the menu that appears, click Preferences.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Preferences dialog box.
Click To do this
OK Save changes and close the Preferences.

Apply Save changes without closing Preferences.
Cancel Close Preferences without saving changes. (Clicking Apply and then
immediately clicking Cancel would have the same effect as clicking OK.)
General
In the General tab, you can select the following:
Prompts
Select which prompts appear.
Close Project – prompt to save any changes when closing project.
Overwrite Project – prompt to confirm overwriting project that has the same
name as the one being created.
Delete Project – prompt to confirm deletion of project.
Delete Area – prompt to confirm deletion of area.
Delete Component – prompt to confirm deletion of component.
Cancel Component Edit – prompt to save changes when you click Cancel after
editing a Component Specifications form.
Delete Library – prompt to confirm deletion of library.
Delete Report Group – prompt to confirm deletion of Report Group in Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator. Does not apply to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
Evaluation
Display results after evaluation - mark to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer open a detailed results report after you run an evaluation.
Scan for Errors before evaluation – mark to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer scan for errors before evaluation.
Item Report
Select which type of report you wish to display when generating an Item
Report.
HTML Item Report – mark to display the HTML Item Report, like the one
shown on page 470, in the Main Window
X X
Capital Cost Report – mark to display the Capital Cost Report in Icarus Editor.
Reporter Report – mark to display the Single Component Summary, exported
from Aspen Icarus Reporter, in the Main Window.
Display
Save Window States – mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer save
the position of Project Explorer, the Main Window, the Palette, and the
Properties Window, as well as selected columns on the List view. Unmark to
have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer open with the default interface
arrangement (shown on page 27). X X
Display Aspen Capital Cost Estimator & Analyzer Choice Dialog on Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer – mark to have Aspen Capital Cost Estimator ask
you at startup whether to use Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and/or
Analyzer in the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer environment. This option is
included here because Preference selections (except for file locations) made in
one product affects all other Aspen Icarus products in the AES suite.
Show Report Group in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator – mark to have Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator display Report Groups.
Forms
The Forms tab view provides options related to Component Specification and
Installation Bulk forms.
Display P&I Installation Bulks in Grid – mark to have Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer display all items on the Installation Bulk specification
forms for Pipe and Instrumentation. If you unmark the checkbox, Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer allows you to select, when opening the form, the
items to include.
Use OK Button in Installation Bulks Form to Go to Main Component
Form – mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer return you to the
main Component Specifications form when you click OK at an Installation
Bulks form. Otherwise, clicking OK simply closes the Component
specifications.
Save Component When Switching to Different Installation Bulk or
Main Component Form – mark to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
save the Component specifications when you switch to a different form on the
Component’s Options menu.
Backup/Recovery
The Backup/Recovery tab lets you select when backups are to be
performed. You can select both options.
Automatic Task Backup – select this check box to have Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer perform a backup before executing major tasks, such as a
project evaluation.
Timed Backup (Interval, in minutes) – select this check box to have
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer perform a backup at a specified interval.
Specify the interval in the box provided.
Timed Recovery (Interval, in minutes) - select this check box to have
Aspen Economic Evaluation write a recoverable file at the specified interval.
Specify the interval in the box provided. If an Economic Evaluation application
crashes, when you open the Aspen Economic Evaluation application that
crashed, you are be prompted to recover your file and save it with a new
name.
Note: After a project has crashed and been recovered (under the new name),
the original project that crashed should be deleted as it may no longer be in a
stable state.
After deleting the crashed project, you can rename the recovered project to
the previous name if you want.
You can also select to either have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer overwrite
the project backups or create unique backups.
Overwrite Project Backups – select this check box to have Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer overwrite the previous backup every time the program
performs a backup.
Unique Project Backups – select this check box to have Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer retain previous backups by creating a unique backup each
time. Depending on the frequency of backups (see task and timed backup
options above), selecting Unique Project Backups could result in large
amounts of disk space being consumed by backups.
Process
The Process tab view provides options for importing from an external
project.
Import Connected Streams – select this check box to include connected
streams when importing an external project.
Import Installation Bulks – select this check box to include installation
bulks when importing an external project.
The Process tab view also provides options for unsupported simulator models
and custom model tool activation.
Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item – select this check box to
have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer map, by default, unsupported
simulator models to quoted cost items.
“Unsupported Models” refer to models not listed in the Project Component
Map Specifications dialog box shown on page 84. Aspen Process Economic
X X
Analyzer does not recognize them and, therefore, cannot map them to Icarus
project components. If this option is left unselected, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer will not map unsupported models. As a result, a unit operation could
appear disconnected in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD).
Quoted cost items are not project components, but act as place markers to
ensure that unit operations remain connected in the PFD.
Note that marking this option will not affect the mapping of supported
simulator models. If a simulator model is listed in the Project Component Map
Specification dialog box, then the specified mapping will be used. Further, if a
simulator model is listed and has no default mapping (that is, Current Map
List section is blank), then it is assumed that the user does not want to map
such simulator models to any Icarus project components.
For example, if this option is marked, a USER unit operation in Aspen Plus can
be mapped to a quoted cost item if this option is marked. This ensures that
the unit operation remains connected in the PFD.
Activate Custom Model – select this check box to activate the Custom
Model tool explained on pages 208 through 214.
X X X X
Use Automatic Mapping Selection when Available (Beta feature) –

select this check box to use the Mapping Selection feature explained in the
section on 'Default and Simulator Data' Mapping.
HTU UTH
Locations
In the Locations tab view, you can select:
Project Directories
Add/remove alternate project directories and set the default project
directory. See “Adding Project Directories” on page 55 for instructions.
X X
Other Locations Specifications
To specify the location of various specification files and data:

1 Click an item in the list to display its description and location.
2 Click the Browse button to select a new location.
Note: In some cases the description warns against changing the location.
Note: Make sure to create the IP and MET subfolder structure when
changing the source locations for library files that are units dependent (for
example, Basis for Capital Cost, EML, UML, Custom Piping Specs, and so
on).
Adding Project Directories

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer comes set up with two project directories:
...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.3\data\My Econ_Process
Projects
...\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation
V7.3\data\Archives_Econ_Process
These directories, by default, are the sole choices of project directory when
opening or saving a new project, as well as the only directories displayed on
the Palette’s Projects view.
To add a project directory and set a new default

1 On the Locations tab view of the Preferences dialog, click Add.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
2 Select the folder you wish to add as an alternate directory and click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the directory to the Alternate
Project Directories list.
3 To set an alternate project directory as the default, select it and click Set
Default.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt asking you to confirm the
change.
4 Click Yes to set the new default.
If the old default location is not on the list of alternate project directories,
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays another prompt asking if you wish
to add it to the list.
5 Click Yes or No.
Note: Adding the old default directory to the alternate project directory list
lets you easily revert to it.
6 Click OK to save the changes to Preferences.
Before the added project directory appears on the Create New Project dialog
box and elsewhere, you will need to either restart Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer or else right-click on the current project in the Palette and click
refresh on the pop-up menu.
Logging
The Logging tab view is reserved for future releases, in which it will be used
to help clients with Technical Support issues. It is not currently activated.
3 Defining the Project Basis
The Project Basis defines specifications that pertain to the overall project
scenario. These specifications influence the design and cost estimate by
defining system defaults and environmental variables.
Project Basis Specifications are accessed from the Project Basis view in
Project Explorer.
A red arrow on an icon indicates that you can right-click on the item to access
a pop-up menu.
3 Defining the Project Basis 59

This chapter describes the different Project Basis specifications, as well as
how to customize specification libraries.
Project Properties
Project Properties are initially specified when creating a new project.
To access Project Properties:

 Right-click on Project Properties in the main Project Basis folder, and
then click Edit.
You cannot edit:

 Project Name
 Scenario Name
 Units of Measure
You can specify these only when creating a new project.
You can edit the following:
 Project Description: The description entered here appears as the Project
Description on the Project Summary spreadsheet and as the Brief
Description on the Executive Summary spreadsheet. The project
description is shared by all scenarios that are under the project. The
description can be up to 500 characters in length and can be comprised of
letters, numbers, and punctuation.
 Remarks: Any remarks entered will appear immediately after the Title
Page of evaluation reports in Icarus Editor. Remarks can be up to 6,000
characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and

punctuation. Remarks might include, for example, the intended purpose of
the estimate, executive summary of results, or an explanation of
assumptions.
General Project Data

General Project Data is initially specified when creating a project.
To access General Project Data:

1 Right-click on General Project Data in the main Project Basis folder.
2 In the menu that appears, click Edit.
The Standard Basis Input File Specifications form appears.
You cannot edit:

 Country Base
 Currency Symbol
These can only be specified when creating a new project.
You can edit the following:

 Currency Conversion Rate: The number of currency units per one
country base currency unit. This is for when you are using a currency
other than that of the country base.
 Project Title: Appears as the project title on reports in Aspen Icarus
Reporter and Icarus Editor and appears as the Scenario Description on the
Project Summary spreadsheet.
 Estimate Class: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Intended to
indicate the purpose of specifications (for example, budget).
 Job Number: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
 Prepared By: Appears at the top of reports generated by Aspen Icarus
Reporter and on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
 Estimate Date: Appears immediately under the project title at the top of
the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Reports generated by Aspen Icarus
Reporter also include an Estimate Date; however, the Estimate Date
shown in Aspen Icarus Reporter is the date on which the project
evaluation was run.
Importing old Standard basis

files
1 Open your Aspen Icarus Project Evaluator Software.
2 Go to the Libraries tab.
3 Click Basis for Capital Costs.
4 Right-click either Inch-Pound or Metric.
5 Click IMPORT.
The dialog that appears defaults to looking for the .D01 files for your Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer project.
6 Browse to the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project you want to import.
7 Click the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project file to import.
Your Aspen Process Economic Analyzer template (standard basis file) is now
in the new Aspen Icarus Project Evaluator system.
Basis for Capital Costs

 The Basis for Capital Costs folder includes:
 Units of measure customization.
 General specs affecting capital and operating costs, including contingency
(based on specified process description, process complexity, and project
type) , process control, location, engineering start date, soil conditions,
vessel design code, and level of instrumentation.
 Workforce wage rates (for both the overall project and by craft),
productivities, and workweek definition.
 Indexing of material costs and man-hours by COA.

Input Units of Measure Customization
Input Units of Measure Customization allows you to customize the units of
measure that appear on specification forms.
Input Units of Measure Customization can only be accessed from outside of
the project in the Palette’s Libraries view. It does not appear in the Project
Explorer’s Project Basis view.
To customize input units of measure:

1 With no project open, expand the Basis for Capital Costs folder in the
Palette’s Libraries view. Expand the appropriate units of measure basis
folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. Right-click on one of the specification files
and click Modify.
Note: If you are modifying a file you will need to later select the file in the
project. To do so, right-click Basis for Capital Costs in the Project Explorer’s
Project Basis view, click Select, and select the file.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Basis for Capital Costs
library in Project Explorer.
2 In the Units of Measure Customization folder, right-click on Input and click

Edit on the pop-up menu.
The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.

3 If, for example, you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of
M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis
project, click Velocity and Flow Rate and then click Modify.
4 On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter “CM/H” as the new unit
name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor between the two units in
the Conversion field. In this example, the conversion factor between the
two units is 100 because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
6 When finished modifying input units of measure, click Close.

Output (Reports) Units of Measure
Customization
Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization allows you to customize the
units of measure that appear on Capital Costs and other reports.
To customize output units of measure

1 Right-click on Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization in the
Basis for Capital Costs folder in Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, and
then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
The Output Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.
You can change the basis for all output units of measure by selecting a
different basis in the Unit of Measure Basis section; however, note that this
voids all previous customizations.
2 To customize only individual units, such as velocity and flow rate units,
select the unit type and click Modify. Then, for each unit you wish to
change, enter the new unit name and the conversion factor (between the
old and new units).

In this example, centimeters per hour (CM/H) replaces meters per hour
(M/H). A conversion factor of 100 has been entered because 100 CM/H = 1
M/H.
3 For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour) instead of
M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt speed in your metric-basis
project, enter “CM/H” as the new unit name for M/H. Then, enter the
conversion factor between the two units in the Conversion field. In this
example, the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because 100
CM/H = 1 M/H.
5 When finished modifying output units of measure, click Close.
General Specs
General Specs greatly affect the total capital and operating cost of the
project.
To access General Specs:

1 Right-click General Specs in the Project Basis view’s Basis for Capital
Costs folder.
2 On the menu that appears, click Edit. menu.
The section of the Standard Basis file containing General Specs appears in a
specification form.

Process Description, Process Complexity and Project Type combine to
generate contingency (as a percent of total project cost). They are
interdependent, and the final value is a nonlinear combination of the
individual contribution. As an example of the various rule-based deductions
used, consider the selections made in the Standard Basis file pictured above:
 Process Description: New and unproven process
 Process Complexity: Highly complex
 Project Type: Grass roots/Clear field
Since the process is new and unproven, contingency value is made “high”
compared to the base condition. Also, since the process complexity is high,
the contingency is “raised” again. The Grass roots/Clear field project type
“lowers” the contingency because of reduced site constraints.
Note: You must clear the Contingency Percent field for the system to
calculate the contingency based on your changes.
Field Description
Process Also drives the design allowances for all
Description equipment whose material cost is system-
generated. User-entered costs are not
affected. A new and unproven process has
a higher design allowance compared with a
proven process. This is applied against all
non-quoted equipment
Process Used to adjust contingency. Highly
Complexity complex implies high
temperature/pressure and more

Field Description
instrumentation and controllers (for
example, batch), whereas simplicity
implies offsites.
Process Control You can provide either digital, analog or
distributed control system for the project
and the process control strategy is fixed
with this choice.
Project Information
Project Location Adjusts the various location dependent
cost fields based on the actual
geographical location of the project site.
The system calculates values such as
freight (domestic and ocean), taxes/duties,
wage rates and workforce productivities.
Project Type Used to determine the configuration of the
project’s electrical power distribution and
process control systems.
Contingency This field will have the value of the
Percent contingency percentage calculated by the
standard basis expert based on user
specification of project information. This
allows you to modify the value estimated
by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. This
value represents:
Construction Contingency
Material Contingency
Engineering Contingency
Estimated Start These three fields show the year, month,

Year/Month/Day and day that the basic engineering will
of Basic begin. Refer to Icarus Reference, Chapter
Engineering 31: Engineering, for a definition of
engineering functions.
Soil Conditions Specifies the nature of the soil most
Around Site prevalent around the construction site.
This impacts the development of all
foundations, the amount of pilings
developed, any excavation and trenching
work items, and construction rental
requirements. Icarus Reference, Chapter
19: Civil, provides soil type definitions.

Field Description
Equipment Specification
Pressure Vessel Specifies the design code used for pressure
Design Code vessels design. The following design codes
can be chosen:
ASME = ASME code, Section VIII, Div 1
BS5500 = British code, BS5500
JIS = Japanese code, B8243
DIN = German Code, AD Merkblatt
Vessel Diameter Specifies the vessel dimension in the

Specification component specification form as inside
diameter (ID) or outside diameter (OD).
P and I Design Specifies the level of instrumentation
Level provided for the equipment. The P and I
may be standard instrumentation (STD) or
highly instrumented (FULL). Refer to the
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings for
instrumentation on specific equipment.
Data Affected by General Specs

The following is a detailed description of the data affected by the General
Specs and the magnitude of their effect depending on the different selections.
 Domestic Freight (% of material)
Specifies cost of domestic freight as a percentage of material costs. The value
for this field depends on the project location selected in the standard basis.
Domestic freight percentages for the different locations are:
o North America = 4
o South America = 5
o Central America = 5
o Europe = 1
o Asia = 1
o Africa = 4
o Australia =
 Ocean Freight (% of material)
Specifies cost of ocean freight as a percentage of material costs. The value for
this field depends on the project location selected in the standard basis.
Ocean freight for the different locations is adjusted based on the percentage
of plant material that can be purchased locally. The percent adjustments for
the different locations are:
o North America = 0
o South America = 8
o Europe = 0

o Asia = 0
o Africa = 8
o Australia = 12
The final value of the field is calculated by the following formula:
O.F (%) = % Adjust * (100 - % material locally purchased) / 100
 Taxes/Duty (% of material)
Specifies taxes as a percentage of total material costs. The value used in the
capital cost evaluation depends on the project location chosen in the file. They
are:
o North America = 6.25
o South America = 4.00
o Central America = 4.00
o Europe = 0.00
o Asia = 6.00
o Africa = 4.00
o Australia = 7.00
 Contingency (%)
Specifies allowance for contingencies as a percentage of the bare plant cost.
This field depends on the selection made for the following fields in the
standard basis file:
o Process Description
o Process Complexity
o Project Type
You must clear the Contingency Percent field for the system to calculate the
contingency based on your changes.
The following data defines the general design conditions to be applied to the
entire project being estimated; this information is used to reflect the desired
project design methodology.
 Equipment Design Allowance (%)
Specifies percent allowance for design changes for system developed
equipment costs. The value depends on the selection made in the Process
Description field. The following values are selected for the different project
conditions:
o New and unproven process = 15
o New process = 10
o Redesigned process = 7
o Licensed process = 5
o Proven process = 3
 Equipment Rotating Spares (%)
Specifies a percentage of the purchase cost of all rotating equipment in the
estimate to allow for spare rotors, seals and parts. The allowance for spares is
developed based upon-0 purchased equipment cost values for pumps,
compressors, drivers and generators. The following value is chosen for the
above field based on the project location:

o North America = 7
o South America = 10
o Europe = 7
o Asia = 10
o Africa = 15
o Australia = 7
 Soil Condition at Site
Specifies the soil type used to develop data for civil work throughout the
project. Based on the soil type chosen, soil loading and soil density are
selected. Icarus Reference, Chapter 19, provides a complete definition for all
the soil types. Once the soil type is selected, the system automatically selects
the type of piles used in the project. The following pile types will be selected:
Soil Type Pile Type
Soft clay Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons
Firm clay Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons
Wet sand Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons
Sand+clay Precast concrete - 24-50 tons
Dry sand Precast concrete - 24-50 tons
Sand Precast concrete - 24-50 tons
Gravel Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Soft rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Hardpan Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Med-rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Hard rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Pile foundations are designated according to the country base default

capacities and spacing. Pile foundations are provided for equipment and
structures whose weight (including concrete) exceeds one-half the pile
compression capacity.
 Power Distribution
The type of project is used to configure the electrical power distribution
system inside Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. The power distribution
specification generated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides the
means of designating MAIN and UNIT substations and the cabling between
them
Note that no transmission LINE is provided for any of the different choices of
“Project Type.”
Components Included
Project Type MAIN Substation UNIT

Grass roots/Clear Transformers, MCC, SW
field Switchgears Transformer
Plant addition - Switchgear MCC
adjacent to existing

plant
Plant addition - Switchgear MCC
inside existing
plant
Plant addition - None Added None Added
suppressed
infrastructure
Plant Modifications Switchgear MCC
/ Revamps
In addition, for plant modifications/revamps, the capital cost excludes cable
costs related to connecting the main substation with the unit; in contrast, for
the remaining project types, a default distance of 1,000 FEET [300 M]
(excluding hook-up allowance) is used to cost the power distribution
components.
 Process Control
Specifies the desired type of control scheme: Analog, DDCTL (Distributed
Digital), or PLC (Programmable Logic Controllers)
Components Included
• Project
Project Type Operator Center Control Center
Schedule
Grass roots/Clear field YES YES
The system
develops a Plant addition - NO NO
suppressed
project schedule
infrastructure
based upon the
All others NO YES
estimate scope
of work including dates and durations for design engineering, procurement,
delivery of materials and equipment, site development and construction. The
construction schedule is integrated with the cost estimate to provide the basis
for estimation of schedule-dependent costs such as equipment rental
requirements, field supervision and construction management.
The schedule commences at the start of basic engineering, as indicated by
the date for basic engineering in the standard basis file.
In addition, the General Specs provide defaults for various general design
conditions that control project design methodology. This in turn affects costs
for equipment, material and manpower, and the overall project schedules.
These defaults are not editable in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. The
following defaults (based on their major categories) are used by Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer to convey specifications for the project design
data:

Item Defaults
Equipment Remote shop fabrication maximum
dimensions:
Maximum diameter: 14.5 FEET [4.5 M]
Maximum length: 100 FEET [30 M]
Maximum weight: 250 TONS [225 TON]
Piping Pipe Fabrication: Remote shop fabricated

piping
Specifies the general method of pipe

fabrication for the project.
Civil Concrete Mix type: READY - Ready mix
(purchased)
Steel Steel finish type: PT – painted steel
Project Schedule Start engineering phase: BASIC – Basic

engineering phase
Delivery Schedule Adjust (%): 100
Specifies an adjustment, as a
percentage, to the schedule durations
developed by the system for delivery of
equipment items, bulk materials, control
system. This adjustment applies to
receipt of vendor data and fabricate/ship
lead times.
Construction Schedule Adjust (%):100
Specifies an adjustment, as a
percentage, to the schedule durations
developed by the system for all
construction manpower.
Bar Symbol: *
Specifies the symbol to be used to print

summary activity bars.
Gap Symbol: -
Specifies the symbol to print the gaps

within activity bars.
Critical path symbol: c
Specifies the symbol to be used to print

the critical path.
User bar symbol: x
Symbol for printing user-defined bars on

bar charts.

Engineering % man-hour: 100
Adjustment for Adjustment of the duration of the basic
Basic Engineering engineering phase. A value less than
Phase 100% will shorten the duration. A value
greater than 100% will increase the
duration.
Engineering % man-hour: 100
Adjustment for Adjustment of the duration of detail
Detailed engineering. A value less than 100% will
engineering Phase shorten the duration. A value greater
than 100% will increase the duration.
Contracts Contract number: 1

(scope/definition) Specifies the number used to reference
this contract, its description, scope of
effort and profile of indirects,
overheads, fee, contingency, etc.
Company title: PRIME CONTRACTOR
Specifies the description of the contract.

This description is used as the title in
appropriate reports.
Construction Workforce
Construction Workforce specifications are divided into General Rates and Craft
Rates.
General Rates
The General Wage Rates information globally sets wage rates and
productivities for all crafts.
To access:
1 Right-click on General Wage Rates in the Project Basis view’s Basis for
Construction Workforce folder.
2 On the menu that appears, click Edit.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Wage General Info

specifications form in the Main Window.

Descriptions of the General Wage Rate specifications follow.
Field Description
Number of Number of shifts used during construction. If
shifts any premium pay is involved with second
and third shift work (beyond overtime pay),
such premium should be indicated by a
properly averaged craft rate per shift.
Productivity Specifies whether to use multi-shift
adjustment /workweek adjustments or not.
Indirects If wage rates are to be treated as
all-inclusive, the indirects may be deleted for
this workforce by specifying “-”. Selecting an
all-in rate suppresses all construction
indirects: fringes, burdens, small tools,
construction rental equipment, etc.
All Crafts Percent of Base

Workforce Enter B for system base. (Reference to a
reference previously defined workforce number applies
base to Icarus 2000 only.)
Wage Rate Wage rates for all crafts as a percentage of
percent of reference base wage rates.
base

Field Description
Productivity Productivities for all crafts as a percentage of
percent of reference base wage rates.
base
All Crafts Fixed Rates

This input may be used to globally set the wage rates and
productivities of all crafts in this workforce to fixed values.
Wage rate all Specifies the fixed wage rate (in the project
crafts currency) for all crafts in the workforce. See
discussion in Icarus Reference.
Productivity all Specifies the fixed productivity value for all
crafts crafts in this workforce. See discussion in
Icarus Reference. If no value is specified,
the system defaults to 100%.
Work week per Refer to the description of workforces in
shift Icarus Reference for the effect of changing
the work week and number of shifts upon
productivity and job duration. The standard
workweek plus overtime must not exceed 84
hours per week per shift.
Standard work Specifies number of standard hours per
week week per man per shift.
Overtime Specifies number of overtime hours per
week per man per shift.
Overtime rate Specifies overtime pay expressed as a
percent percentage of standard pay (for example,
standard time and one half = 150%).
General Craft Wages

The general craft wages are for crafts that could appear in
most crews and whose productivities and/or wage rates are
dependent on the type of crew.
Helper wage UK Base only. Specifies wage rate for craft
rate help as a fixed rate to be used in all crews.
Helper wage UK Base only. Specifies the wage rate for

percent craft craft help as a percent of the principal craft
rate in the crew. This value must be less than
100%.
Foreman wage Specifies the wage rate for foremen as a
rate fixed rate to be used in all crews. Default:
110% of rate of highest paid craft in crew.

Field Description
Foreman wage Specifies the wage rate for foreman as a
percent craft percent of the highest paid craft in crew.
rate This value must be greater than or equal to
100%. Default: 110% of rate of highest
paid craft in crew.
Craft Rates
Craft Rates set the wage rate and productivity individually for each craft.
To access:
1 Right-click on Craft Rates in the Project Basis view’s Basis for Capital
Costs\Construction Workforce folder.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Wage Rate Info specifications
form in the Main Window.
3 To add multiple definitions to Craft Wage Rates, click the Add button on
the button bar:
4 Use these fields to set the wage rate and productivity individually for each
craft.
Field Description
Craft Wage rates and productivities may be
wages/prod. assigned to individual crafts. Those
crafts not referenced are assigned wage
rates and productivities specified in
General Wage Rate or the system
default values.

Field Description
Craft code Identifies the craft to which the
following wage rate and productivity
apply.
The craft code must be an existing
system craft code.
Wage rate/mh Specifies the wage rate (in the project
currency) for this craft for standard
hours.
Productivity Specifies the productivity of this craft

as a percentage of the system’s base.
(See discussion in Icarus Reference.)
Indexing
The Material and Man-hour specification forms in the Indexing folder allow
you to manipulate the material and/or man-hour costs for process equipment
and installation bulks. You can also adjust these indexes by location by using
the Location specification form.
For example, you could specify to increase the material costs associated with
a type of process equipment.
Indexing is used to tailor Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to mimic your
work methods and costs. If your equipment costs for a category are
consistently offset from Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s values, use
Indexing to correct that.
To adjust the Material or Man-hour index

1 Right-click on Material or Man-hour and click Edit.

2 To adjust the index for all equipment or for all of one of the installation
bulks, enter the index value in the box provided. For example, entering
“200” in the Equipment box will double the material costs for all items
under the equipment account group.
To adjust the index for a sub-category, click the arrow-button in the box. This
accesses a similar form listing sub-categories corresponding to the Code of
Accounts (see Icarus Reference, Chapter 34, for a complete list). Adjustments
to a sub-category override adjustments to the account-group.
3 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.
To adjust by location
1 Right-click on Location and click Edit.
2 Type the location description.

3 Type the Code of Account (COA) to indicate the start of the COA range, or
click the red arrow and then click Select by the subcategory on the COA
Subcategory Selection window.

The Equipment COA Selection window appears.
4 Click Select again by the COA.

The COA is entered on the form.
5 Do the same to indicate the end of the COA range.
6 Enter the amount to escalate material costs and/or the amount to escalate
man-hour costs.

7 To escalate another range, click Add.
8 Click OK to close the form and apply changes.
Process Design
The Process Design specifications are used in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer projects that contain a simulator input. These specs allow Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer to map simulator models into Icarus project
components. For example, a distillation column model in a simulator may be
mapped to a combination of equipment such as a double diameter tower, an
air-cooler (for a condenser), a horizontal tank (for a reflux drum), a general
service pump (for a reflux pump) and a thermosiphon reboiler.
The Process Design Specifications indicate the default settings that the
system uses for mapping all models of the same class. These specs can be
customized in files and used in many projects.
Simulator Type and Simulator File Name

Simulator Type and Simulator File Name are described under Loading
Simulator Data on page 144.
X X
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs

The Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs are used in mapping simulator
units to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer units, serving as the
cross-reference.
To access:
1 Right-click on Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs in the Project
Basis view’s Process Design folder.

The Units of Measure Specification dialog box appears.
Note: Each simulator cross-reference UOM file contains a basis (which may
be METRIC or I-P). The basis indicates the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
base units set to which simulator units will be converted.
The left side of the screen displays the simulation output units. The right side
of the screen displays the corresponding Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
units. The conversion factors between the two units are entered in the lower-
center section of the screen.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides a set of common simulator units
and their conversions to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer units. You can
modify and/or add units to these files.
Specifying the Mapping for a Simulator Unit
To specify the mapping for a simulator unit:

1 Select the simulation unit from the Units Used list in the Simulation
Output section. In the example below, the simulation unit is CM/HR
(Centimeters/Hour).
2 Select the appropriate units category from Units Category list in the Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer section. In the example below, the units
category is Velocity.
3 Select the appropriate Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit from Units
list in the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer section. In the example
below, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit is M/H (Meters/Hour).

Note: If an equivalent Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit is not found,
select Miscellaneous as the Units Category and map the simulator unit to
Other in the Units window.
4 Enter the conversion factor between the two units (the simulation unit and
the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer unit) in the Conversion Factor box.
In the example below, the conversion factor between 100 CM/HR = 1 M/H
5 Click Save to save the mapping.

When a unit has been mapped and saved, a green box appears next to the
simulation unit. A yellow box indicates the unit is not mapped.
Deleting a Mapping
To delete a mapping
 Select the simulator unit; then click Delete.
Removing a Unit
To remove a particular unit from the simulation units list

 Select the unit; then click Remove.

Adding a Unit
To add a new unit to the list, enter the new unit symbol in the New Units to
Add box in the Simulation Output section and click Add. Changes will not
affect existing project components.
Changing Existing Components
To change existing components:

1 Unsize the item or unmap the items and then re-map and re-size.
2 Once all of the units have been specified, click OK to store and save the
specifications.
It is critical that all simulator units of measure be mapped into Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer units. When the simulator output is loaded, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer identifies all units of measure in the file. Any units not
mapped in the project’s current simulator cross-reference UOM specification
are automatically added to the list and you are alerted to the need to define
the mapping and re-load the file.
You must correct this in order to continue without problems. Complete the
steps above to specify the mapping for a simulator unit. Scroll through the
Units Used list for any yellow-tagged units. Map all these, save the file, and
re-load the simulator data.
Project Component Map Specifications

The Project Component Map Specifications dialog box contains a list of models
for the selected simulator and a list of the corresponding Icarus project
components to which the simulator models will map.
To access:
1 Right-click Project Component Map Specifications in the Project Basis
view’s Process Design folder.

Models that are mapped in the current file are marked with an asterisk (*). If
no asterisk is present, then that model will not generate any project
components when loaded, mapped, and sized.
3 Exclude simulator models from the mapping process by selecting the
simulator item and then clicking Delete All Mappings.
You can select a simulator item and review the mapping(s) for that item.
To change one of the mappings:

1 Click an item in the Current Map List.
2 Click Delete One Mapping
3 Create a new mapping.
To create a new mapping:

 Click New Mapping; then select an appropriate Icarus project
component.
For simulator column models, an additional specification can be made. Since a
column may be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer requires an identification for each of these mappings.
Refer to Mapping Simulator Models in Chapter 4 for tower/column
configuration mapping identifications.
Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer map unsupported simulator models (i.e., models not included in the
list of simulator models on the Project Component Map Specifications dialog
box) to quoted cost items. See page 54 for instructions.
X X

Default Simulator Mapping Specs
The following tables list models that are mapped to Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer project components. Models that are not supported can be mapped
to a quoted item if you mark “Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item”
in Preferences, Process tab (see page 54). X X
AspenTech’s Aspen Plus Map Specs
Model Model Description Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Default

Name
CCD Countercurrent Rotary drum filter

decanter
CFUGE Centrifuge filter Centrifuge SOLID-BOWL
COMPR Compressor/turbine Centrifugal gas compressor / Gas turbine with
combustion chamber
CRUSHER Solids crusher Jaw crusher
CYCLONE Solid-gas cyclone Cyclone Dust collector
DECANTER Liquid-liquid decanter Vertical vessel – process
DISTL Shortcut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower
rating
DSTWU Shortcut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower
design
ESP Electrostatic Low voltage electrical precipitator
precipitator
FABFL Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse
FILTER Continuous rotary Rotary drum filter
vacuum
FLASH2 Two-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process
FLASH3 Three-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process
FSPLIT Stream splitter
HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger
HEATX Two-stream heat Floating head heat exchanger
exchanger
HYCYC Solid-liquid Water only cyclones - mineral
hydrocyclone
PUMP Pump/hydraulic Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
turbine
RADFRAC Rigorous  Single-diameter trayed tower (column)
fractionation  Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)
 U-tube reboiler (reboiler)
 Horizontal drum (accumulator)
 Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (reflux
pump)
PETROFAC Consists of 42  Single-diameter trayed tower (column)
configurations. It has  Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)
been confirmed that
the following can be
mapped to Aspen  Horizontal drum (accumulator)
Process Economic  Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (reflux
Analyzer:

PREFLIF- preflash pump)
block with furnace,  Furnace block
zero pumparounds
and zero
sidestrippers.
CDUIOF – crude
block with furnace,
three pumparounds
and three
sidestrippers.
CDU 3 – vacuum
block with two
pumparounds and
two sidestrippers.
RBATCH Batch reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RCSTR Continuous stirred Agitated Tank – enclosed, reactor jacketed
tank
REQUIL Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Equilibrium reactor- Agitated Tank – enclosed, energy jacketed
gibbs minimization
RPLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
RSTOIC Stoichiometer reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RYIELD Yield reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
SCFRAC Short-cut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower
SCREEN Wet or dry screen Vibrating system
separator
SWASH Single-stage solids Rotary drum filter
washer
VSCRUB Venturi scrubber Washer dust collector
ChemCAD V Map Specs
Model Model Description Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Default
BAGH Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse dust collector

COMP Adiabatic (isentropic) or polytopic Centrifugal Axial Gas Compressor
Compression
CFUG Basket centrifugal filter Atmospheric suspended basket
centrifuge
CRYS Crystallizer or melting by Batch vacuum crystallizer
cooling/heating
CSED Solid-wall basket centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge
separating solids from liq slurry
CYCL Gas-solid cyclone separator Cyclone dust collector
DRYE Dryer Direct rotary dryer
EREA Equilibrium reactor Agitated tank reactor
ESPT Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator
FIRE Fired heater Floating head heat exchanger
FLAS Multipurpose flash Vertical cylindrical vessel

FLTR Vacuum or constant-pressure filter Rotary disk filter
GIBS Gibbs reactor Agitated tank reactor
HCYC Hydrocyclone Water cyclone (separation
equipment)
HTXR Heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
KREA Kinetic reactor (plug flow or Agitated tank reactor
continuous stirred tank reactors)
LLVF Vapor/liquid/liquid flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
MIXE Stream mixer (flash calculation at Vertical cylindrical vessel
output pressure)
PUMP Liquid pump (to increase pressure of Centrifugal pump
liquid stream)
REAC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated tank reactor
SCDS Simultaneous correction rigorous  Single diameter trayed tower
fractionation (single column)  Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
 Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump (reflux pump)
SCRE Screen Single deck rectangular vibrating
screen
TOWR Inside/out rigorous fractionation  Single diameter trayed tower
(single column)  Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
pump (reflux pump)
WASH Washer Washer dust collector
Hysim Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Default
BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay

COLUMN Distillation column  Single-diameter trayed tower
 Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
 Centrifugal single or multi-
stage pump (reflux pump)
COMPRESSOR Compressor Centrifugal gas compressor
CSTR Continuous stirred-tank Agitated Tank - enclosed,
jacketed
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine

FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger
HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones - mineral
separation
PIPING Pipeline
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower
and others
PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage
pump
RATEHEATEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed,
jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed,
jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed,
jacketed
SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector
HYSYS Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Default
AIR COOLER Air cooler Free standing or rack mounted air

cooler
BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay
COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
CSTR Continuous stirred- Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
tank
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
EXPANDER Expander Turbo expander
FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER Heater/Cooler Floating head heat exchanger
HEATX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid Water only cyclones – mineral
hydrocyclone separation
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and
others
pump
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
SEP Separator HT Drum – horizontal drum
TANK Tank VT Storage – flat-bottom storage
tank, optional roof

SimSci's Pro/II with PROVISION SimSci’s Pro/II Map Specs
Model Name Model Description Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer Default
CENTRIFUGE Centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge

COLUMN UNITS Distillation column  Single-diameter trayed tower
 Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
pump (reflux pump)
CRYSTAL Crystalizer Oslo growth type crystalizer
CSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
DECANTER Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter
DEPRESSURE Non-steady-state depressure Vertical vessel - process
DRYER Solids dryer Atmospheric tray dryer
EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine
FLASH FLASH Vertical vessel - process
HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
pump
REACTOR Reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RIGHTEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
ROTDRUM Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
SHORTCUT Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
Design Criteria
After the simulator model is loaded into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer,
mapping and sizing of the items can be performed. If an item is already sized
inside the simulator, the sizing parameters are automatically brought into
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and used.
Items not sized by the simulator can be sized following the instructions in
Chapter 6. In addition to process information obtained from the simulator,
certain design specifications may be required before sizing can be
accomplished.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Sizing Expert uses design values based on
the user-defined field values on specification forms in the Design Criteria
sub-folder. The values on these forms provide the basis for developing design
specifications from operating conditions for all equipment to be sized.

You can enter design conditions (design pressure and temperature) for all
equipment (using the Common form) and also enter design conditions for
types of equipment. (Conditions entered on the equipment type forms
override those on the Common form).
Common
Design pressure and temperature entered on the Common specifications form
applies to all equipment except equipment for which you have separately
specified these design conditions.
 Design Pressure
Click on the Design Pressure field to open the Design Pressure
Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for
calculating the design pressure based on the range in which the operating
pressure falls. The design pressure is calculated from the operating
pressure using the formula shown on the form. You can modify the
pressure limit (upper and lower limit) as well as parameters A and B.

Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the “Design
Pressure – Multiplier” field was used. This field has now been replaced by
the Design Pressure Specifications form. If projects created using these
earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A and B are
automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified. This
ensures that old projects can be carried over using the same design
criteria.
 Design Temperature
Click on the Design Temperature field to open the Design Temperature
Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify rules for
calculating the design temperature based on the range in which the
operating temperature falls. The design pressure is calculated from the
operating temperature using the formula shown on the form. You can
modify the temperature ranges (upper and lower limit) as well as
parameters A and B.
Note: In earlier versions of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the “Design

Temperature - Increase” field was used. This field has now been replaced
by the Design Temperature Specifications form. If projects created using
these earlier versions are opened, then the parameters A and B are
automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value specified.
Pumps
In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see instructions
under Common, page 91), you can enter the following design criteria for
X X
pumps:
 Pump Overdesign Factor
The pump overdesign factor is used by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
to increase the volumetric throughput of the pump and the power
requirement of the pump. The total volumetric flow rate calculated from
the simulator information is multiplied by the value provided in this field
to estimate the design flow rate for the equipment.
For example:
o Operation flow rate: 250 GPM
o Pump overdesign factor: 1.1

o Calculated design capacity: 250 X 1.1 = 275 GPM
Compressors
X X
compressors:
 Driver Type
Specifies the driver type used for compressors. The default value is
“None.” The selections are NONE, GAS ENGINE, MOTOR, TURBINE.
Heat Exchangers
under Common, page 91), you can enter the following design criteria for heat
X X
exchangers:
 Launch MUSE
MUSE™ performs detailed simulation of multi-stream plate-fin heat
exchangers made from brazed aluminum, stainless steel or titanium.
A valid MUSE version 3.3 license is required to use this feature.
Select “Yes” to launch MUSE during interactive sizing of plate fin heat
exchangers. Select “No” to run MUSE in the silent mode.
 Furnace Fractional Efficiency
The furnace duty obtained from the simulator is the absorbed duty. Total
fired duty is obtained by dividing the absorbed duty by fractional
efficiency. This value should be <1.0.
 Fuel Heating Value
The Lower Heating Value (LHV) used to estimate the fuel consumption by
fired furnaces.
 Air Cooler Inlet Temperature
This field represents the default value that shall be used as the inlet air
temperature in the case of Air Coolers.
 Air Cooler Exit Temperature
Air Cooler Exit Temperature is used when estimating the surface area of
air cooled heat exchangers. The value given in this field is used as the exit
temperature for the air cooler.
If the field is empty or has value of 0.0, then the Sizing Expert assigns the
exit air temperature value to be 10.0 DEG F greater than the inlet air
temperature.
For example, if the Air Cooler Inlet Temperature is 77.0 DEG F and you do
not enter the Air Cooler Exit Temperature, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer uses 87.0 DEG F as the default value.
 Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure
In the design of shell and tube heat exchangers, design engineers
sometimes apply the 2/3rd rule in calculating the design pressure. As per
P P

ASME heat exchanger code, if the design pressure of the lower-pressure
side (either tube or shell) is at least 2/3rd the design pressure on the
high-pressure side, then overpressure in the high-pressure side will not
result in rupture in the lower-pressure side (provided relief devices have
been properly sized).
When specified, the 2/3 rule will increase the design pressure of the low
pressure side to at least 67% of the design pressure of the high pressure
side, even when the operating pressure on the low pressure side could
result in a lower design pressure as per the Design Pressure field.
 Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor
The calculated heat transfer area is multiplied by the value given in the
field.
The mechanical design is performed for the final heat transfer area.
For example:
o Calculated surface area = 1000 SF
o Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor = 1.1
o Surface area used for mechanical design: 1000 X 1.1 = 1100
SF
Note: The final surface area in general is greater than the calculated
value because of mechanical considerations.
Towers
under Common, page 91), you can enter the following design criteria on the
X X
Towers form (applies to all towers):

 Bottom Sump Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that
required for separation is provided at the bottom for liquid level and
reboiler return.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.
 R/R-Minimum (For SHORTCUT model in Pro/II)
The SimSci simulator shortcut distillation model calculates the number of
theoretical stages required for different ratios of operating reflux ratio (R)
to minimum reflux ratio (R-Minimum).
The number of stages should be available in the simulator report for the
ratio chosen.
 Vapor Disengagement Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to that
required for separation is provided at the top for vapor disengagement
before passing to the condenser.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the tower.

Packed Towers
X X
packed towers:
 Packing Type
Two types of packings, random and structured, are used in packed towers.
The type of packing affects the flood point pressure drop estimation and
the packing efficiency (HETP) value.
The value in this field is used by the Sizing Expert in the calculation of the
tower diameter and height.
 Packing Factor for Packings
Packing factor is used in the Kister and Gill correlation to estimate
pressure drop at the flood point. Once the pressure drop is known, the
flood velocity is calculated using the latest versions of the generalized
pressure drop correlation (GPDC) charts for both the random and
structured packings.
 Packed Tower Derating Factor
With certain systems, traditional flooding equations consistently predict
higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such
discrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating
factor is multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid load
obtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or derated flood
load for the given system.
The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of
the system. The higher the foaming tendency, the lower the derating
factor.
If you do not enter a value, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses 1.0 as the
derating factor.
 Packed Tower Flooding Factor
Packed towers are usually designed for 70 to 80 percent of the flood point
velocity. This allows a sufficient margin for uncertainties associated with
the flood point concept and prediction and to keep the design point away
from the region at which efficiency rapidly diminishes (just below the flood
point).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided
value is not available.
 HETP
The concept of HETP (height equivalent of a theoretical plate) enables
comparison of efficiency between packed and plate columns. Because
there are only a few variables that significantly affect HETP and due to the
unreliability of even the best mass transfer models, rules of thumb for
HETP successfully compete with the mass transfer models.
For the packing types available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
(given in the Icarus Reference), Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
estimates the HETP value based on the packing shape, dimensions and
type of material. If a user-provided value is available, then the Sizing

Expert uses the value in the above field for calculating the height of the
packed tower.
 Packed Section Height
The value represents the height of each packed section and is used in the
design of packed towers to estimate the number of packed sections.
 Surface Area Per Unit Volume
Higher specific surface areas (surface area per unit volume) increases
vapor-liquid contact area and therefore, efficiency. For structured
packings, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer determines this value
empirically and uses it in estimating HETP if you have not already
specified an HETP value.
A default value of 75 SF/CF is used in the absence of a user-entered
value.
Trayed Towers
X X
trayed towers:
 Trayed Tower Flooding Factor
Flooding is the condition where pressure drop across a tray is sufficient to
cause the dynamic liquid head to be equivalent to the tray spacing plus
the weir height. At this point, the liquid backup in the downcomer is just
at the point of overflowing the weir on the plate above. When this
happens, the column fills with a foamy liquid and becomes inoperable.
The flood factor is the fractional velocity approach to flooding, i.e., (Actual
Vapor Velocity)/(Vapor velocity at the point of flooding).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-provided
value is not available.
 Foaming Tendency
Vapor disengagement is easy in non-foaming, low-pressure systems.
However, vapor disengagement from downcomer liquid in foaming
systems is difficult as the liquid hangs on to the entrained vapor.
Sufficient residence time must be provided in the downcomer to allow
adequate disengagement of vapor from the descending liquid. Industrial
practice has created a guideline for the mum downcomer velocity of clear
liquids based on their foaming tendency.
The following values for the downcomer liquid velocity are used based on
the choice for the above field.
Downcomer Liquid Velocity, (FPS)

Tray Spacing, INCHES
Foaming
18 24 30
Tendency
Low 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 – 0.6 0.6 – 0.7
Moderate 0.3 – 0.4 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 - 0.6
High 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 - 0.3

higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such
discrepancies, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating
The trayed derating factors are often related to the foaming tendency of
factor. If the user-specified value is not available, a derating factor is
selected based on the value of foaming tendency.
The default value for foaming tendency is Moderate.
 Trayed Tower Derating Factor
higher flood points than those actually experienced. To allow for such a
discrepancy, an empirical derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating
The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming tendency of
factor.
If the user-provided value is not available, or the value 0.0 is entered in
the field, then the derating factor is selected based on the foaming
tendency of the liquids in the column.
 Relative Volatility of Key Components
The number of theoretical stages for a trayed tower is obtained from the
simulator report. The actual number of trays is calculated by using the
tray efficiency value provided by the user in the design criteria file.
However, if the field is empty or has a 0.0 value, the tray efficiency for
the separation is estimated by using the correlation of relative volatility of
key components with tray efficiency. The O’Connell correlation is used to
estimate the overall tray efficiency.
 Tray Efficiency
Overall column efficiency is defined by:
E_oc = N_t/ N_a
where:
N_t = Number of theoretical stages required for the separation minus
the sum of theoretical stages provided by the reboiler, condenser, and
intermediate heat exchangers.
N_a = Number of actual trays in the column.
Several empirical correlations are available in the literature. Also, rigorous
theoretical predictions based on gas and liquid film resistances are
available to assist in predicting the tray efficiency.
If the user specification is not available for the field, then the value is
estimated using empirical correlations from the literature.

Configurations Towers
Use this form to specify design criteria for tower configurations.
Vessels
under Common, page 91), you can enter the following design criteria on the
X X
Vessels form (applies to all process vessels):

 Residence Time
The amount of liquid holdup in the vessel is estimated by the liquid
volumetric flow through a vessel in a specified amount of time. The vessel
volume divided by volumetric flow rate is defined as the residence time for
the vessel.
For example:
o Liquid flow through the vessel: 100 CFM
o Residence time: 5 MIN
o Calculated liquid volume in the vessel: 100 CFM X 5 = 500 CF.
 Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio (For Vertical and
Horizontal Vessel Design)
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer defaults for this field are used if the
field is empty or has the value of “0.0.” The Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer defaults depend on the operating conditions for the vessel. Based
on the operating pressure of the vessel obtained from the simulator
report, the following values are used:
Pressure (PSIA) Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
0 – 250 3
250 – 500 4
> 500 5
For example:
Vessel operation pressure: <250 PSIA
Diameter: 6 FEET
Calculated vessel height: 6 X 3 = 18 FEET
Residence time overrides Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio.
 Minimum Vessel Diameter
The Minimum Vessel Diameter field is used if the vessel diameter
calculated by the sizing routines is less than this value.
 Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method
When sizing vertical and horizontal vapor liquid separators, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer computes the maximum allowable vapor velocity using
the method selected in this field.
o Liquid Entrainment Method:
This is an empirical correlation developed by Watkins and is a
function of vapor and liquid densities, and the parameter Kv,

which itself is a polynomial function of vapor and liquid flows
and densities.
o Particle size separation method:
This method estimates the disengagement velocity of the liquid
droplet in the continuous vapor phase. The design velocity is
determined as a percentage of the disengagement velocity.
 Average Liquid Particle Diameter (For particle size separation
method)
This field specifies the default average liquid droplet diameter. This value
is used in the design of horizontal and vertical vessels by the particle size
separation method (which can be selected in the Vapor/Liquid
Separator Sizing Method field right above this field).
 Design Factor Multiplier for Disengagement Velocity (For particle
size separation method)
This field is used in the calculation of the maximum allowable design
velocity, which is a percentage of the disengagement velocity.
For example:
o Disengagement velocity : 10 FEET/SECOND
o Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity: 0.5
o Maximum allowable design velocity: 10 X 0.5 = 5
FEET/SECOND
 Separation Factor (For liquid entrainment method)
In the liquid entrainment method, the separation factor is used to
determine the maximum allowable vapor velocity. The separation factor is
either entered by the user in this field or computed by Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer using the relation described in the vessel sizing design
procedure.
Agitated Vessels
X X
agitated vessels:
 Agitator Type
The various types of agitators that can be chosen for design are described
in the Icarus Reference. The type of agitator selected determines the
default driver power and impeller speed. This is used to estimate the
agitation requirements in tanks.
Storage Vessels
X X
storage vessels:
 Number of Holding Days
Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid
required for a certain period of operation. Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer uses this field to determine the liquid volume stored in the
vessel.
For example:
o Inlet flow rate: 500 CF per day.
o Number of holding days: 30 (specified by user).
o Liquid volume inside the storage vessel: 500 X 30 = 1,500 CF.
 Holding Hours in a Day
Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume of liquid
required for a certain period of operation. Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer uses this field to determine the liquid volume required per day.
For example:
o Inlet flow rate: 500 CFH.
o Holding Hours in a Day: 24 (specified by user).
o Final volume per day : 500 X 24 = 12,000 CF/day.
 Storage Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
Once the volume of the storage vessel is determined based on the process
fluid flow rate and design conditions, the actual dimensions (height and
diameter) of the equipment must be estimated. You can specify the
dimensional requirements of the equipment using this field.
A default is used if the field is empty or has value 0.0. The default depends on
the operating conditions for the vessel.
 Vapor Free Space (% of Total Storage Vessel Volume)
A percent volume of the sized vessel in excess of the required liquid
volume.
Horizontal Vessels
X X
horizontal vessels:
 Vapor Area /Cross-Sectional Area
Once Aspen Process Economic Analyzer calculates the maximum vapor
velocity, the velocity and flow rate are used to determine the vapor space
required. The vapor space is then divided by the vapor area /cross-
sectional area to get the total required cross-sectional area.
The process vessel height to diameter ratio overrides this field.
 Separation Factor Multiplier
For horizontal vessels, the separation factor is normally higher under
similar operating conditions than for vertical vessels. Therefore, the
calculated separation factor is multiplied by the separation factor
multiplier.
 Minimum Boot Length

When horizontal vessels are used for three phase separations, the heavy
second liquid phase is removed in the drip leg situated at the bottom of
the vessel.
 Minimum Boot Diameter
This field represents diameter of the boot leg which is designed to remove
the heavy second liquid.
 Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
The bootleg cross-sectional area is estimated using the liquid velocity field
specified in this field and the process vessel height to diameter ratio.
Vertical Vessels
X X
vertical vessels:
 Minimum Disengagement Height
This is the height from the liquid level to the mist eliminator.
 Minimum Height Above the Mist Eliminator
Used in the calculation of the total vessel height.
 Height of Mist Eliminator
Height of mist eliminator section.
 Minimum Ht. Btw Low and High Liquid Level Taps
The liquid level based on residence time should meet this minimum
specification. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)
 Ht. Btw Inlet Nozzle and High Liquid Level Tap
Represents the height between the inlet nozzle (center line) and the high
liquid level tap. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels
section.)
 Ht. Btw Low Liquid Level Tap and Tangent Line
Represents the height between the low liquid level tap and the tangent
line. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels section.)
Miscellaneous
 Vibrating Screen Feed Material
This field specifies the solid material type used by solids handling
equipment. The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is
defined as the amount of solids (TPH) flowing through one square foot of
screen cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth
having 50% or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.
Based on the choice made for this field and the screen opening size, the
screen unit capacity is estimated.
The following choices are available for this field:
o Sand and Gravel
o Limestone/Crushed Stones

o Coal
o Cinders
o Coke
o Wood
 Cyclone Inlet Linear Velocity
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity
of 150 FPS. You can enter a different velocity here.
Configurations Flash
Use this form to specify design criteria for flash configurations.
Utility Specifications
Most chemical processes require heating or cooling process utility fluids to
operate. In many cases, the choice of which utilities are used plays an
important role in determining the total project cost by defining heat transfer
equipment sizing. In addition, utility costs form an important part of the
operating costs of the plant.
In the design of heat exchangers and reboilers, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer permits you to select appropriate process utility fluids for the
application. You can select utility fluids from the list already present in Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer or can create your own based on utility fluid
classes allowed by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. Once the utility
resource for the equipment is selected either by you or by the Sizing Expert,
then an actual utility process stream is created for the equipment. The utility
stream contains the amount of utility used by the equipment. During the
operating cost evaluation, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer processes all the
utility streams connected to the equipment to determine the utility cost for
every utility resource used in the project.
You can override these selections by a combination of disabling/enabling
appropriate utilities and re-mapping and re-sizing the equipment items.
Alternately, you can specify the desired utility in the interactive Sizing Expert.
This method is available even if the utility has been disabled.
To modify or create a utility stream:
1 Right-click on Utility Specifications in the Project Basis view’s Process
Design folder.

The Develop Utility Specifications dialog box appears.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides 11 default utility streams

resources:
Cooling Water
High Temp Heating Oil *
Low Temp Heating Oil **
Refrigerant – Ethane
Refrigerant - Ethylene
Refrigerant - Freon 12
Refrigerant - Propane
Refrigerant - Propylene
Steam @165 PSI
Steam @100 PSI
Steam @400 PSI
* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E.
To modify an existing utility stream:

 Highlight it on the Modify Existing Stream list and click Modify.
To create a new utility stream:

1 Click Create in the Option section.
2 In the Create New Utility Stream section, type the name and select one
of the following fluid classes:

High Temp Heating Oil *
Low Temp Heating Oil **
Refrigerant – Ethane
Refrigerant – Ethylene
Refrigerant – Freon 12
Refrigerant – Propane
Refrigerant – Propylene
Refrigerant 50 Utility
Steam
Water
* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E.
3 Click Create.
4 Enter or modify the specifications on the Utility Specifications form.
The form contains the following fields:

Description:
Describes the utility fluid resource in the sizing report generated by Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer. Also, the field value is used to represent the
utility fluid usage and its related cost on the Project Summary investment
analysis spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
Fluid:
Determines the type of utility fluid described by the current specification. The
fluid class is used to determine the heat transfer coefficient, fouling tendency
and related thermal and transport properties used by Sizing Expert.
Design Temperature
Specifies the temperature, which will be considered in the estimation of the
design temperature for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.
Design Pressure:

Specifies the pressure, which will be considered in the estimation of the
design pressure for the process equipment carrying the utility fluid.
Inlet temperature:
Provides the inlet temperature for the utility fluid.
Exit temperature:
Provides the exit temperature condition for the utility fluid.
Pressure:
Provides the operating pressure for the utility fluid.
Energy transfer per unit mass:
Specifies the amount of energy provided or removed by the utility fluid over
the specified temperature range. The value in this field is used to estimate
the amount of utility required for the given process conditions.
Unit Cost:
Provides the cost value used to estimate the utility cost for the project.
Unit Cost Units:
Provides the units for the value provided in the unit cost field.
When you specify a new utility fluid resource, all the information on the
specification form must be provided; otherwise, the Sizing Expert will not be
able to use the utility fluid resource properly.
Using the utility specification form, you can specify a maximum of 20 utility
fluids.
If different utility fluid resource was used by simulation, then it is added to
the utility resource in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
Utility type:
Describes the usage of the utility fluid. Select either Heat source or Heat sink.
Click OK when done entering the utility specifications.
Investment Analysis
Investment Parameters
To specify parameters required for investment analysis:
1 Right-click Investment Parameters in the Project Basis view’s
Investment Analysis folder.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Investment Parameters in the
Main Window.
A description of the parameters follows.
General Investment Parameters
Period Description
This field allows you to enter text indicating the name/description of a period.
The period is defined in “Number of Weeks per Period.” The period description
is used in the display of some of the results in the spreadsheets.
Number of Weeks per Period

The period used for investment analysis is defined in terms of number of
weeks.

Number of Periods for Analysis
The number of periods to include in the cashflow and other project totals and
calculations.
Tax Rate
The tax rate for investment analysis, in terms of percent per period, is used
to calculate the percentage of earnings before taxes that must be paid to the
government.
Desired Rate of Return

The desired rate of return, in percent per period, for the investment.
Economic Life of Project

This field indicates the length of time in terms of periods over which capital
costs will be depreciated.
Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)

This number indicates the approximate worth of capital costs at the end of
the Economic Life of Project. The number is expressed as a percent of initial
capital cost.
Depreciation Method
There are four depreciation methods allowed in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer. The description of each follows:
Straight Line — The straight line method is used most commonly. In this
method, the Salvage Value is subtracted from the Total Project Cost. This
result is then divided by the Economic Life of Project, so that the project is
depreciated evenly over its economic life.
Sum of the Digits — When this method is used, the Depreciation Expense
decreases during each period of the Economic Life of Project. Therefore, the
highest value for the depreciation occurs in the first period and decreases
every period thereafter. The sum of the digits multiplier is n/((N(N+1))/2),
where N is the Economic amount is the Total Project Cost less its Salvage
Value. For the duration of the project’s economic life, this factor is multiplied
by the depreciable amount.
Double Declining (Balance) — When this method is used, the project is
depreciated in geometric increments. The multiplier for the first period is 2/N,
where N is the Economic Life of Project. For the second period the
depreciation rate, D2, is (1-D1)D1 where D1 is 2/N. For the third period, the
depreciation rate, D3, is (1-D1)D2. For the fourth period, the depreciation
rate is (1-D1)D3. These factors are multiplied by the Total Project Cost. This
process (multiplying the factor by the capital cost) continues until the Straight
Line Method produces a higher value for the depreciation. When the Straight
Line Method produces a higher value, this higher value is used for the
remaining depreciation calculations.
Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS) — The ACRS approach assumes
that operations begin during the second half of the first period and stop

during the first half of the last period. Therefore, as a result of the two half-
periods (one at the beginning and one at the end of the operating cycle), it
takes 6 periods to depreciate a project which has an Economic Life of 5
periods. The ACRS adapts the Double Declining Balance Method to the half-
life system. The depreciation rate for the first period, D1, is 2/N, where N is
the Economic Life of Project. However, the half-life convention reduces this
factor to 1/N. For the second period the depreciation rate, D2, is D1(1-1/ N).
For the third period the depreciation rate, D3, is D1(1-1/N-D2). This process
(multiplying the factor by the Total Project Cost continues until the Straight
Line Method produces a higher value for the depreciation. When the Straight
Line Method produces a higher value, this higher value is used for the
remaining depreciation calculations.
Escalation Parameters
Project Capital Escalation

This number indicates the rate at which project capital expenses may increase
expressed in percent per period. If the addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct
(EPC) period and start-up period is greater than one whole period, Project
Capital Escalation is used to escalate the capital expenses for periods beyond
the first period.
Products Escalation
This is the rate at which the sales revenue from products of the facility is to
be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.
Raw Material Escalation

This is the rate at which the raw material costs of the facility are to be
escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.
Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation

This is the rate at which the operating and maintenance costs of the facility
are to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period. The operating
labor costs include operators per shift and supervisory costs.
Utilities Escalation
User-entered percentages reflecting the anticipated utility price increase each
period.
Project Capital Parameter
Working Capital Percentage

The working capital expressed as a percentage of total capital expense per
period indicates the amount required to operate the facility until the revenue
from product sales is sufficient to cover costs. It includes current assets such
as cash, accounts receivable and inventories. When the facility starts
producing revenue, this cost item can be covered by the product sales.

Operating Costs Parameters
Operating Supplies
This field indicates the cost of miscellaneous items that are required in order
to run the plant in terms of cost per period.
Laboratory Charges
This is a cost per period indicating the cost of having product analyzed each
period.
Operating Charges
This includes operating supplies and laboratory charges. It is specified as a
percentage of the operating labor costs. (If you specify a value for either
“Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory Charges”, the system will add the two
entered values and calculate the percentage of Operating Labor Costs. (This is
done for compatibility with earlier releases of the system.)
Plant Overhead
This field consists of charges during production for services, facilities, payroll
overhead, etc. This number is specified as a percent of operating labor and
maintenance costs. This number should not be used for the construction of
the facility, only for operation after start-up.
G and A Expenses
This represents general and administrative costs incurred during production
such as administrative salaries/expenses, R&D, product distribution and sales
costs. Specify this number as a percentage of subtotal operating costs.
Facility Operation Parameters
Facility Type
This field defines the facility type. The following types are currently available:
Chemical Processing Facility
Food Processing Facility
Oil Refining Facility
Petrochemical Processing Facility
Pharmaceutical Facility
Pulp and/or Paper Processing Facility
Specialty Chemical Processing Facility (A specialty chemical is defined as a
chemical which is produced in low quantity and has a usually high price per
unit.)
The type of facility affects the number of operators/shift and maintenance
costs of facility equipment.

Operating Mode
This refers to the operating mode of the facility. The available options are:
Continuous Processing - 24 Hours/Day
Continuous Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
Batch Processing - 24 Hours/Day
Batch Processing - 1 Batch per Shift
Batch Processing - More than 1 Batch per Shift
Intermittent Processing - 24 Hours/Day
Intermittent Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
The operating mode of the facility affects the number of operators/shift and
maintenance costs of facility equipment.
Length of Start-up Period

After the facility has been constructed (i.e., gone through engineering,
procurement and construction), the plant must go through the owner’s start-
up period until it starts producing the product to be sold. This period is
referred to as Length of Start-up Period in weeks and is added into the EPC
duration.
Operating Hours per Period

This field refers to the number of hours per period that the plant will be
operating.
Process Fluids
Process Fluids indicate the types of fluids involved in the process. The
selection affects operating and maintenance costs. The selections are:
Liquids
Liquids and Gases
Liquids and Solids
Liquids, Gases, and Solids
Gases
Gases and Solids
Solids
Operating Unit Costs

To specify operating unit costs:
1 Right-click on Operating Unit Costs in the Project Basis view’s

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Operating Unit Costs in the
Main Window.
The Operating Unit Cost form specifies Labor Unit Costs and non-heat transfer
Utility Unit Costs.
Labor Unit Costs are given for Operators and Supervisors. The total cost of
operating labor is calculated by:
Determining the total number of operators and supervisors necessary to run
the facility for a certain number of hours.
Adjusting that number for the number of hours the facility operates per
period.
Multiplying that number by the respective Labor Unit Costs and adding them
together.
Labor Unit Costs
Operator
The loaded wage rate paid for operating the facility in terms of the cost per
operator per hour. Operator labor includes labor that is associated with
operating the facility.
Supervisor
The loaded wage rate paid for supervision in terms of the cost per supervisor
per hour. Supervision includes all labor associated with overseeing personnel
who operate the facility.

Utility Unit Costs
The non-heat transfer utility unit costs are also specified in this file as “over
the fence” costs. Utilities used for process heating and cooling are given in
the Utility Specifications File.
Electricity
The unit cost per KWH of electricity used for the facility.
Potable Water
The potable water unit cost per MMGAL or MB used for the plant.
Fuel
The fuel unit cost per MMBTH or MEGAWH used for the plant.
Instrument Air
The instrument air unit cost per KCF or MB.
Raw Material Specifications

An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to provide an
accurate figure for total project expenditure. Since operating costs are usually
a large part of this cost, it is important to accurately account for all raw
materials consumed in the process.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lets you identify simulator streams as raw
materials for the process.
The raw material costs will be directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS
spreadsheet for use in cash flow analyses.
To develop raw material specifications:

1 Right-click Raw Material Specifications in the Project Basis view’s

The Develop Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.
3 In the Option section, click the Create option button.

4 In the Create New Stream section, type a name for the stream.
5 Select the Basis and the Phase for the stream.
6 Click Create.
The Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.
The following input information is required in order to estimate the raw

material costs during the evaluation of the operating costs for the project:
Process Stream (or “none” if user-defined); Rate (do not specify a rate if a
process stream is selected); and Cost Per Unit.
In addition to the above minimum information, you have to specify certain
field values for the raw material fluid program to estimate the raw material
rate necessary for the cost estimate.
If you specify “none” in the Process Stream field, then the value for the Rate
field must be specified in the appropriate units. If you specify a process
stream, then the program determines the raw material rate in the desired
Specification Basis and units.

You can specify a maximum of 150 raw material streams.
The Raw Material Specifications form contains the following fields:
Description
The value you provide in this field will be used to describe the raw material in
the Project Summary investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS)
Specification Basis
This field describes the raw material properties from the following list:
Mass, Gas
Mass, Liquid
Mass, Solid
Volume, Gas
Volume, Liquid
Volume, Solid
Energy
Process Stream
This field provides a list of fluid streams present in the current project. You
can select any stream to represent the raw material. Also, there is a provision
in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer for you to provide actual value for the
raw material rate if none of the process streams represent the raw materials
for the project. In this case, you must specify the field value as “none.”
Rate
This field gives the total rate of raw materials consumed for the process in the
desired rate units.
When a new raw material fluid is specified, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
checks whether enough information has been specified to estimate the raw
material cost.
Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current raw material. The
choices available for the field vary with the selection made for Specification
Basis and your choice of Base UOM:
Specification Basis I-P METRIC
Mass, Gas LB/H KG/H

KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Mass, Liquid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH

Mass, Solid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Volume, Gas GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Liquid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Solid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Energy BTU/H W
MMBTU/H KW
MEGAW
CAL/H
Unit Cost
This field provides the cost value per unit mass, volume or energy used to
estimate the raw material cost for the project.
7 When you are done entering raw material specifications, click OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop Raw
Materials Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150 raw
material streams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.
Product Specifications
An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to include an
accurate figure for the project’s total revenue. In order to do so, it is very
important to accurately account for all the products obtained from the
process.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to identify simulation streams as
product materials for the process. Once the simulation stream is defined,
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer determines the necessary amount of
product materials generated based on the information provided in the product
material specification file.
The product material costs are directly placed in the PROJSUM.ICS
spreadsheet, where they are used for further cashflow analyses.
To develop product specifications:

1 Right-click Product Specifications in the Project Basis view’s Investment
Analysis folder.

The Develop Product Specifications dialog box appears.
3 Select the Create check box in the Options section.

4 Enter a new stream name, select a basis and phase.
5 Click Create.
The Product Specifications form appears.
The following input information is needed for Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer to estimate the product material costs during the evaluation of the
operating costs for the project:
Description

The value specified in this field is used to describe the product material fluid
in the investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
Specification Basis
This field describes the product material properties from the following list:
Mass, Gas
Mass, Liquid
Mass, Solid
Volume, Gas
Volume, Liquid
Volume, Solid
Energy
Process Stream
This field provides a list of streams present in the current project. You can
select any of the streams to represent the product material. Also, there is a
provision in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer for providing an actual value
for the product material rate if none of the process streams represent the
product materials for the project. In this case, you must specify the field
value as “none.”
Rate
This field defines the total rate of product materials obtained for the process
in the desired rate units. Do not enter a value if you have specified a process
stream.
When a new product material is specified, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
checks whether the minimum information necessary to estimate the product
material cost has been specified.
The following minimum information must be present before Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer can proceed with the estimate.
Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current product material. The
choices available for the field vary with the selection made for Specification
Basis and your choice of Base UOM:
Mass, Gas LB/H KG/H

KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Mass, Liquid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH

Mass, Solid LB/H KG/H

KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Volume, Gas GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Liquid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Volume, Solid GPH M3/H
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
Energy BTU/H W
MMBTU/H KW
MEGAW
CAL/H
Unit Cost
The field provides the cost value used to estimate the product material cost
for the project.
6 When you are done entering product specifications, click OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the Develop Product
Specifications dialog box. You can enter a maximum of 150 product material
streams using this dialog box. When done, click Close.
Developing Streams
After opening a project, new streams can be developed. You have the option
to develop completely new streams or use an existing stream as a base.
When an existing stream is used as a base, the new stream can be either
copied from the existing stream (Absolute Basis mode) or copied from and
linked dynamically to the existing stream (Relative Basis mode).
To develop streams:
1 Right-click Streams in the Project Basis view’s main folder (at the
bottom).
2 On the menu that appears, click Edit..

The Develop Streams dialog box appears.
Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream

3 To view or modify an existing stream, select the stream on the Modify
tab view. You may need to use the scrollbar(s) to locate a stream if a
large number of streams exist in the project. With the desired stream
highlighted, click Modify to have the stream information displayed in a

The functions of the six buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form
are explained below:
Click To do this:
OK Perform a check on the information currently present in the Develop

Stream specifications form to ensure that all information needed to
specify the stream is completed. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
generates error messages indicating missing data.
Generate estimates for any specifications not entered.
Save the information in the Develop Stream specifications form. The
Develop Stream specifications form closes and the Develop Streams
dialog box re-appears.
Apply Same as clicking OK, but does not exit the Develop Stream specifications
form. This allows you to review the estimates and revise the data.
Update Same as clicking Apply, except that if the Primary Fluid Component, the
Temperature, and/or the Pressure were changed, then all the physical
properties of the stream will be estimated using these new values.
Cancel Exit the Develop Stream specifications form without making checks and
does not save or change any information in the database.
Reset Reset the information in the Develop Stream specifications form to the
values previously saved into the database. Any changes have been made
since opening the form will be lost.
Mixture Define a stream as a mixture. Opens the Mixture Information dialog box
discussed below.
Most Develop Stream specifications need no further explanation. Those that

do are described below.
Primary Fluid Component
One of the most important specifications in this form is Primary Fluid
Component, which is classifies the chemical components of a stream. The
fluid selected here is used as the basis for any properties that are unavailable

and need to be estimated to complete the specifications for the stream. The
available general fluid classifications are:
 Alcohol  Medium Hydrocarbon Liquid
 Aromatic Liquid  Miscellaneous Inorganic Liquid
 Halogenated Gas  Miscellaneous Organic Gas
 Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid  Organic Acid
 Hydrocarbon Gas  Very Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid
 Inorganic Gas  Solid
 Light Hydrocarbon Liquid
The following pure components are also available for selection as the Primary
Fluid Component of a stream:
 Acetic Acid  Glycerol  Phosphoric Acid
 Ammonia  Hydrogen  Propane
 Argon  Isopropyl Alcohol  Propanol
 Carbon Monoxide  Methane  Propylene
 Carbon Dioxide  Methanol  Steam
 Ethane  N-Butanol  Sulfuric Acid
 Ethanol  Nitric Acid  Toluene
 Ethyl Benzene  Nitrogen  Water
 Ethylene  Oxygen
If the Primary Fluid Component is specified, the other needed information will
be filled in with default values. This feature is only apparent when no
temperature or pressure is entered into the Develop Stream specifications
form and the Primary Fluid Component is changed. After changing the
Primary Fluid Component, either press Enter or click on another field and the
default values will be loaded. If either the pressure or temperature value is
changed from the default value, clicking OK, Apply, or Update will estimate
the properties at the new condition(s).
Base Stream
The Base Stream field contains the name of the stream on which the
displayed stream was based. This cannot be changed.
If the name begins with the character “$”, the stream was created using
Absolute Basis and the stream name following this character is that of the
parent stream. A stream created using Absolute Basis uses the data from the
parent stream; however, if the parent steam’s data changes afterward, the
Absolute Basis stream is not updated.
If the value begins with the character “@”, the stream was created using the
Relative Basis and the stream name following this character is that of the
parent stream. A stream created using Relative Basis is updated when its
parent stream’s data changes.

Description
Select information from the menu to describe the particular stream. For
example, you can indicate the source component of the stream (for example,
From Pump P-103) or tag it with one of the available utility stream names.
Mass Flow
The Mass Flow fields are used to determine the phase of the stream. For
instance, if the stream has only Liquid Mass Flow specified, the stream is
totally liquid; therefore, it will have no vapor properties estimated for it. The
reverse is true for a case with only a Vapor Mass Flow specified. For cases
with both types of flow, all properties will be estimated and the Primary Fluid
Component will belong to the phase of the largest mass flow.
Note: Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically calculates Total Mass

Flow from the individual mass flow values.
Density
The Density fields are required information. Thus, if a particular phase has a
mass flow rate specified, then the corresponding density must also be
specified. Clicking Update will estimate any required density fields based on
the flow rate, except in the case of Solid Mass Density. It is recommended
that you enter a Liquid Mass Density if one is available.
Mixture Specs Dialog Box

Clicking Mixture on the Develop Stream specifications form accesses the
Mixture Specs dialog box.
After you click Apply, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer normalizes the
Fraction values to total a sum of one.
The values shown above would change into the values shown on the next
page.
The mixture information specified in this dialog box is used to estimate
properties as a mixture of the specified composition. If no mixture information

is present, the stream is assumed to be pure Primary Fluid Component. The
fraction information can be entered on either a Mass or Mole Fraction Basis,
as specified in the Fraction Basis section.
The Cancel and Reset buttons behave in a similar manner as their respective
buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form.
The OK and Apply buttons also behave in a similar manner as their
respective buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form, except the
checking is different. Here, a check is made to ensure that the fractions have
a total sum of one. If not, the values are normalized to give a total sum of
one, as indicated below.
The check also combines duplicate entries into one entry by combining the
two fraction specifications.
After the check is done, the components are sorted in order of decreasing
fractional amount, as shown above. When you click OK, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer loads into the specifications form the name of the fluid
with the highest fraction and the properties of the mixture generated from the
contributions of the individual components.
Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting

Costs in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
Utility usage estimation is based on the stream information. All the streams
that are present in the project are taken into consideration for the estimation
of the utility usage for the project. This includes all utility streams, user-
defined streams, simulator streams, and pre-map Streams. The Description
field on the Develop Stream spreadsheet can be used to designate streams as
utilities. If the Description field for a stream exactly matches (exact text
characters and spaces) the Description field for any utility resource as given
on the Utility Specifications spreadsheet, then that stream is included in the
utility usage calculation. If you change the description field of any of the
simulator or pre-map streams, then the new description you provided is used
for this calculation.

Also, stream connectivity information is used to identify the nature of the
stream. If the stream is being generated then it is considered to be revenue
for the project, and if it is being consumed it is considered an expense. (Note:
Streams that are connected at both ends to process equipments are ignored
in estimating the utility usage costs. Also, utility streams that have a zero unit
cost do not show up in the final report.)
User-defined streams that are not connected to any equipment (do not show
up in the PFD) are considered as input streams, i.e., consumption.
System-generated utility streams are included in the utility usage calculation
as long as they are connected to equipment. A case where they would be
disconnected would be if you manually disconnect these streams or if the
equipment to which these streams are connected is deleted.
Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Users:
Cooling Water utility resources that need to be accounted in the Analyzer
Utility Model (AUM) should be named as either Cooling Water or Cooling
Water xx where xx can be two digits ranging from 01 to 99, for example,
Cooling Water 01.
User-created utility resources that do not adhere to this format (for example,
CW, Sea Water, Cooling Water o3) will not be identified as cooling water
streams and will be excluded from AUM's cooling water analysis.
Cooling water streams that are not associated with any equipment, will be
assigned to the Area with the maximum cooling water flow rate. For areas
assigned to two or more circuits, the collected unassigned cooling water flow
rate will be assigned to the first area in the circuit handling the largest circuit
flow rate.
Cooling water can either be bought or be made. If it is to be made, the dew
point of ambient air added to the lower model limit for the approach gradient
will determine the lowest possible deliverable temperature. To ensure that
your specified cooling water utility resource streams can be made, review the
limits for the two cooling water models (CTWCOOLING and
CTWPACKAGED).
Stream Connectivity
Process streams are “connected” to project components in a real way. You
can see this in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD) that you can display after
loading and mapping simulator blocks. Each stream has a Source end and a
Sink end. The Source end connects to an Outlet port on a component and the
Sink end to an Inlet as depicted below:

In the PFD view, when you Edit Connectivity (see page 178) for the Sink
X X
end of a stream and move the mouse over a component, only Inlet port(s)
turn green, thereby indicating their availability for making a connection to a
Sink end.
The same concept also carries into the Interactive Sizing form (see
page 221). Only streams whose Sink ends are not connected are listed in the
X X
pulldown for any Inlet. This explains why the Inlet and Outlet pulldowns will
include different streams.
Since the connectivity in the PFD and the Interactive Sizing form are two
ways of looking at the same information, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
tracks your changes and synchronizes them in both views. Thus, if you
change the connectivity in one view, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
automatically changes it in the other view.
When you first map and size components, the streams in the simulator will be
connected to the project components and the underlying process conditions of
those streams are available for further use. For example, you may create new
streams based on the properties of any stream, connected or not, then use
these new streams as Sources/Sinks for connecting new components (you
might do this to set up spares). You may also add a New Mapping to an item
already mapped and the newly mapped and sized item utilizes the underlying
stream properties.
Creating A New Stream

Streams can be created from scratch or by using a base stream.
To create a stream from scratch:

1 Go to the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box. Without
selecting a stream from the Base Streams list, click Create. (The Basis
selection will not matter.)
The Create Stream dialog box appears.

2 Enter a name for the new stream in the Create Stream dialog box. This
name must not be the same as any existing streams in the project.
3 Click OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears.
Note: See page 120 and 120 for descriptions of the buttons and fields on this
X X X X
form.
Enter values for the new stream. See page 120 for descriptions of the
X X
different fields.
4 When done, click OK.
To create a stream based on an existing stream:

1 On the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box, click the
stream to be used as the base.

Select the Basis mode. If the Basis mode is Relative, the data from the two
streams will be linked so that when the base stream is changed the new
stream will inherit these changes. If the Basis mode is Absolute, the data
from the base stream is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream
is created. Changes in a base stream will not affect a new stream created via
Absolute basis.
2 Click Create.
3 Enter a name for the new stream in the Create Stream window. This name
must not be the same as any existing streams in the project. Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the specifications form for the
newly created stream. The data is that of the Base Stream. Data appears
gray (dimmed) to indicate that it is relative to a referenced Base Stream.

Note: See pages 120 and 120 for descriptions of the buttons and fields on
X X X X
this form.
Even in a Relative Stream, you may override any value with a manual entry.
If you do so, the text turns black, indicating that that value is absolute and
therefore no longer references a Base Stream.
4 Make modifications to the data and click OK.
Deleting a Stream
Note: Only user-added streams and streams added by the Sizing Expert as
utilities can be deleted.
To delete a stream:
1 At the Delete tab view, select the stream to be deleted. You may need to
use the scrollbars to locate a stream if a large number of streams exist in
the currently opened project.

2 Click Delete.
A dialog box will appear asking for confirmation of the delete action.
3 Click OK to delete the stream.
– or –
Click Cancel to retain the stream.
Specification Libraries
The default specifications are derived from files that you can access, when
outside of a project, from the Palette’s Libraries view.

It includes specification files for the following:
 Basis for Capital Costs
 Cost Libraries (see Chapter 7, “Developing and Using Cost Libraries”)
 Design Criteria
 Investment Parameters
 Operating Unit Costs
 Product Specifications
 Project Component Map Specifications
 Raw Material Specifications
 Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs
 Utility Specifications
When you create a project scenario, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer selects
the specification file to use based upon the selected units of measure basis.
However, you can right-click on any of the above Project Basis specification
categories in Project Explorer, click Select on the pop-up menu, and select a
different file from which to derive the default specifications.
Customizing Specification Libraries

When no project is open, you can create your own specification files or edit
existing files. Then, when in a project, you can select your specification files.
For example, if you frequently created project scenarios that used the same
design basis, you could create a Basis for Capital Costs specification file with

those design basis specifications. Then you could just select this file, instead
of entering the specifications every time.
If, after making modifications to your libraries, you wish to revert to the
original libraries, you can copy or import the copy of the installed libraries
provided in the following folder:
…\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.3\Program\Sys\Libraries
Creating a File
To create a specification file:

1 With no project open, go to the Libraries tab view in the Palette and
expand the desired specification category.
2 Except for Investment Parameters and Project Component Map
Specifications, right-click on the units of measure basis folder –
Inch-Pound or Metric. For Investment Parameters, right-click on the
Investment Parameters folder. For Project Component Map Specifications,
right-click on the simulator type folder.
3 On the pop-up menu, click New.
The New [Specification Category] dialog box appears.
4 Enter a file name and, if desired, a file description.

5 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates the file and displays the
specifications in a separate window.
6 Edit the specifications just as in a project.
7 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file is
open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.
See page 133 for instructions on selecting the newly created specification file
X X
to use in a project.
Modifying a File
To modify an existing specification file:

1 Right-click it in the Palette (Libraries view).
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify.

Importing a File
You can import specification files from elsewhere on your computer or
network.
To import a file:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), expand the library to which you wish to
import a file.
2 Except for Investment Parameters and Project Component Map
Specifications, right-click on the units of measure basis folder –
Inch-Pound or Metric. For Investment Parameters, right-click on the
Investment Parameters folder. For Project Component Map Specifications,
right-click on the simulator type folder.
3 On the pop-up menu, click Import.
4 In the Select a File for Import dialog box, locate the file and then click
Open.
The file is copied to the appropriate sub-folder.
Duplicating a File
To duplicate a file:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file you wish to duplicate,
and then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu.
2 Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new file.

3 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer creates the file and displays the
specifications in a separate window.
4 Edit the specifications just as in a project.
5 When you are done, close the specifications window. If a library file is
open, you cannot access another library file or open a project.
Deleting a File
To delete a specification file:

 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file to be deleted, and
then click Delete on the pop-up menu.
Note: You cannot delete files named Default, only modify them.
Selecting to Use a Different Specification

File
After creating a new specification file, you still need to select it in Project
Explorer for Analyzer to use its specifications.
To select a specification file:

1 In Project Explorer (Project Basis view), right- on the specification
category for which you wish to select a new file. On the pop-up menu,
click Select.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a dialog box listing the files
available for the selected category.
2 Select a new file from which to derive default specifications and click OK.
Changing File Directory Location

If you decide to store specification library files in a directory other than the
default, move the default files to the new location and recreate the same sub-
folder arrangement. Otherwise, Icarus will generate an error when you point
to the new location.

4 Loading and Mapping
Simulation Data
Overview
If the process you wish to evaluate in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer is
based on a simulator file report from a process simulator software program,
the first step, after creating a project scenario and defining the Design Basis,
is to load and map simulation data.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer supports reports from the following
simulators:
 AspenTech’s AspenPlus Version V7.2 or higher
 Chemstations’ ChemCAD for Windows Version 5.3.2
 HYSIM Version STD/C.271
 HYSYS Version V7.2 or higher
 SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Version 5.61
 Pacific Simulation’s WINGEMS 2.0
 WinSim’s DESIGN II for Windows Version 8.17
Preparing Simulation Reports

For Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to load the simulation data, an
appropriate ASCII output report needs to be generated from the simulator.
Most simulators describe the various steps needed to generate ASCII reports.
This section provides additional procedures to generate reports in an
Analyzer-compatible format.
Aspen Plus Utilities

If a unit operation block has a utility specified, the utility resource
specifications and usage data will be transferred into Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer. After loading the simulator data, a preference screen will appear.
Specify any missing data for the Aspen Plus utilities in order for the Aspen
Plus utility to be properly handled. The Aspen Plus utilities will appear as new
4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data 135

utility resources. The appropriate project components will use the specified
utility resource, based on the Aspen Plus utility used in the simulation.
A message box will appear if utility resources are modified or deleted from the
Aspen Plus simulation prior to a reload of data into Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer. You can choose to delete the old imported Aspen Plus utility
resources in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, or just add/update existing
imported utilities in Aspen Plus.
AspenPlus – Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer Simulator link
A link from AspenPlus to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to load
changes into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer when simulation settings are
changed in AspenPlus.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer link into a new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
scenario:
1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus.
2 On the File menu, click Send To and click Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer.
When the prompt appears, the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
name will be designated to be the name of the simulation file from AspenPlus.
AspenPlus will designate the scenario name. If the scenario name is changed,
any future attempts to run the link for the same project will result in a new
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project being created. It is recommended
that the scenario name designated by AspenPlus be left as it is for maximum
usability.
3 Click OK.
4 Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of Measure.
5 Click OK.
The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.
6 Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications; then click OK.
The General Project Data dialog box appears.
7 Verify the General Project Data; then click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load the Simulator
Data.
8 Click OK.
If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a prompt will appear
to do so. Define all AspenPlus units with those available in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.

To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into an
existing project scenario:
1 Run the simulation in AspenPlus.
2 On the File menu, click Send To and click Aspen Icarus.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data.
3 Click OK.
Because all other project basis settings have been specified, mapping and
sizing can be performed at this time.
ChemCAD Report Generation

These instructions apply to both ChemCAD for Windows, Version 5.3.2, and
for previous versions of ChemCAD. The specifications are the same for all
versions.
1 On the main menu, on the Output menu, click Report.
Note: In ChemCAD for Windows, just click the Output menu from the menu
bar.
2 Specify the following for report options:
 Select Streams
 Print All Streams: Y
Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows

 Select Unit Operations
 Print All Unit Operations: Y
Note: Check box in ChemCAD for Windows.

 Stream Properties
3 Select or deselect the following stream properties as indicated below:
Property Select De-Select
OVERALL PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Temperature X
Pressure X
Mole Vap frac X
Enthalpy X
Molecular wt. X
Total act.dens X
VAPOR PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Vap. Act. Dens X
Vap. Viscosity X

Property Select De-Select
Vap. Cp X
Vap. Thrm. Cond X
Liq. Surf. Tens. X
LIQUID PROPERTIES
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Liq. act. Dens X
Liq. Viscosity X
Liq. Cp X
Liq. Thrm. Cond. X
SOLID PROPERTIES*
Mass flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Density X
PSD X
DISTILLATION OPTIONS
Tray profile X
Tray properties X
Tray sizing X
Packed column sizing X
TRAY COMPOSITIONS
Mass flow rate X
* Solid properties are located on Page 2 of Stream Properties in ChemCAD for

Windows.
The component mass flow rates for individual streams must be included in the
output report.
4 Navigate to the Stream Flowrate/Composition menu under the
Reports/Output menu.
5 Pick Mass Flowrate.
If you want Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to use tray sizing information
from the simulator, then you must include the appropriate sizing information.
6 To do this, go to Distillation Summaries under the Reports/Output
menu; then select the appropriate sizing section (packed or trayed).
7 After the completion of all these specifications, generate the output report
by selecting Calculate and Give Results. This should generate an output
report. You can rename it if you wish. This is the file to be used as input
for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
HYSIM Report Generation

1 Copy the following .spc files from the \Program\Load\Hysim directory
to your HYSIM working directory before generating output inside the
simulator.

 MIXER.SPC
 TEE.SPC
 HTXRATE.SPC
 BALANCE.SPC
 CALC.SPC
 MASSBAL.SPC
 MOLEBAL.SPC
For all other operations, use the default .spc files provided by Hyprotech.
2 For HYSIM version 386|C2.12 or earlier, copy the stream format file
STRSUM.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer/Docs directory of your HYSIM working directory. If you have
HYSIM version STD:C2.63 and above, copy the stream format file
STRSUM2.FMT located in the /Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer/Docs directory to your HYSIM working directory and rename it
STRSUM.FMT. You must either delete or rename the existing
STRSUM.FMT file to perform this.
The output report generated from HYSIM should contain operation output
(defined as spec_sheet in HYSIM) and the complete stream summary. Both
of these outputs must be saved under the same file name. The information is
appended to the file and does not get overwritten.
To generate the operation output and stream summary (Required):

1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
o operation output
o stream summary
2 On the main menu, click Print.
3 On the print option, click File; then press Enter.
4 Select the same file (file_name) as above; then press Enter.
5 Click the Print option; then press Enter.
6 Select the Stream option; then press Enter.
7 Inside the Stream option, select Summary; then press Enter.
8 The list of streams present in the current project is displayed. Click the <-
> option for all the streams to be written in file_name.
The procedure creates the required report (file_name), which can be loaded
into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and used for project evaluation.
If sizing operations are performed inside the simulator and you want the
information to be carried over to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the
following steps must be performed in addition to the above procedure:
1 Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
sizing summary
2 On the main menu, click Size.
3 Inside the size option, choose the unit operation desired; then press
Enter.
4 Select the particular equipment (for example, col-101) ; then press Enter.
5 Select auto_section or user_section; then press Enter.

6 After the sizing calculations are performed, select Print.
7 Select File; then press Enter.
8 Select the same file name (file_name) ; then press Enter.
9 Click Summary; then press Enter.
Important:
 The operation names and stream names can not contain the following
characters:
+, -, *, or spaces
 The ASCII report has to be created in the default units specified by HYSIM
for the ENGLISH and the SI modes of operation. You can run a simulation
in any simulator-provided units. However, prior to creating the report file,
you must convert the units to the default specifications provided by
HYSIM.
 During the sizing procedure for the column operation, if user_section is
chosen, care should be taken to check that the stage numbers are not
repeated in the different sections of the same column operation. The
following two examples demonstrate the correct and incorrect
specifications.
Correct Incorrect
user_section_1 : (start stage) 1 user_section_1 : (start stage) 1

(end stage) 10 (end stage) 10
user_section_2: (start stage) 11 user_section_2 : (start stage) 3
(end stage) 15 (end stage) 15
 The user_section name should not contain the following characters:

+, -, *
 The report format should be such that the width of the report should be
less than or equal to 4 streams wide. This can be accomplished from the
format option provided in HYSIM.
 Stream summary should follow the operation output in the report, that
is, the order should be maintained.
HYSYS Report Generation

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s External Simulation Import Tool imports
HYSYS simulator data into Icarus database files, which you can then load into
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
To import HYSYS simulation data for loading into Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer:
1 On the Tools menu, click External Simulation Import Tool.
The Simulator Link dialog box appears.

2 Click the Browse button for the Simulator File field.
3 Select the process simulator project you created; then click Open.
4 Click the Browse button for the Export File field. The Export File will
contain the exported simulation results data from the selected HYSYS
project. Do not include any file extensions for this file. The import tool will
automatically assign a d01 extension to this file.
5 Select the location and enter the file name you want to be used to contain
the exported data. You can also select an existing file.
6 Click Save.
7 On the Tools menu, click Connect. HYSYS will automatically start with
the selected project.
The following figure shows the file Cheplant.hsc in the HYSYS interface.

8 Click Export on the Simulator Link dialog box to start the process of
exporting the simulation data from the selected HYSYS project into the
Export File.
Once finished, you will see five files with the name you gave to the Export
File. These files contain the exported data.
Note: These files should always go together, in case you want to copy them
to another location.
D:\test\cheplantn.d01  Icarus database file
D:\test\cheplantn.d02
9 On the Simulator Link dialog box, click Disconnect. The tool will close
HYSYS. If you want to keep HYSYS running and make changes to your
simulation, you can use the Export Again button to export the data again
into the Export File.
10 Exit the import tool.
11 Start Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and create a new project.
12 Select Hyprotech’s HYSYS as the Simulator Type.
13 When selecting the simulator report file, select the Export File (the file
with the extension .d01) created using the import tool
14 To load, map, and size this project, continue as described in this guide.
SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report

Generation
Two methods can be used for generating reports from PRO/II with
PROVISION.
 You can change the input keyword file (*.inp) to include the required
print options using keywords for those using PRO/II directly
-or-

 You can change the print options from within the PROVISION user
interface.
For either method, the operation names and stream names should not contain
the following characters:
 +
 *
Note: When specifying sidestrippers, each sidestripper must be identified by

a unique four-character name. Currently, sidestrippers are not always
identified by their full user-given names in PRO/II with PROVISION report
files. Sometimes, they are identified by only the first four characters of the
user-given names. Therefore, to properly load sidestripper information into
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, sidestripper Unit identifiers (UID’s) must
be used, which are only four characters long.
To prepare the SimSci report in PROVISION:

1 On the Input menu, select Problem Description. Make sure that the
Problem Identifier field is not blank; something must be entered.
2 On the Output menu, select Report Format.
3 On the Report Format menu, select Miscellaneous Data.
4 Set the Report Width field to 80 Columns (the PROVISION default
value).
5 On the Report Format menu, select Stream Properties.
6 Select Molar Flowrate and Weight Fraction.
7 On the Report Format menu select Unit Operations.
8 For each column unit operation:
A On the Unit Operations list, select Column.
B Click the Print Options button while unit is highlighted.
C Select Molar Basis from the Column Summary list.
D From their respective column print options window, select:
o Molecular Weights
o Actual Densities
o Actual Volumetric Flowrates
o Transport Properties
o Flowing Enthalpies
o Standard Liquid Densities
E Click OK.
F Repeat for each remaining COLUMN unit operation in list.
Note: See the note in the KEYWORD section regarding COLUMN sidestripper’s
UID’s.
9 Click Close to finish.
10 Use the default options for remaining unit operations.

Using Keywords
For General Print Options, use the following keywords:
Print INPUT = ALL
STREAM = ALL
RATE = M
WIDTH= 80
For COLUMN operations, use the following keyword:
Print PROPTABLES = PART or ALL
Loading Simulation Data

The following loading procedure translates the specified process simulator
report file into Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
To load process simulator data:

1 In Project Explorer, Project Basis view, right-click Simulator Type in
the Process Design folder; then click Edit.
The Select Simulator Type dialog box appears.
2 Click one type from the list; then click OK.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a message saying what the new
simulator type is.

3 Click OK.
4 In the Process Design folder, right-click Simulator File Name; then
click Edit.
The Open dialog box appears, showing all simulator files in the Report
folder. You can browse other drives and folders as well.
5 Select a file; then click Open.
Note: The List view now displays the pathname of the selected simulator file
when you select Simulator File Name in Project Explorer.
 On the toolbar, click .

-or-
 On the Run menu, click Load Data.
A confirmation window appears.
7 Click Yes.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer loads the simulator data.
When the loading of the data is finished, the Process view of Project Explorer
is populated with simulator areas and simulator blocks.
Viewing Data Derived from Simulator

To access simulator-derived data (read-only):
1 Right-click a block, and on the menu that appears, click Modify.
2 Click Cancel to close.

Working with Block Flow
Diagrams
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically generates a Block Flow
Diagram (BFD) from a loaded simulator report. Providing a graphical
representation of the process, the BFD displays computational blocks and
their connections.
The blocks in the diagram correspond to tree items displayed in the Project
Explorer’s Process view. Color-coding of the blocks in both the Process view
and the BFD agree; mapped items are displayed green and unmapped items
are displayed yellow.
Displaying the Block Flow Diagram

To display the Block Flow Diagram:
 On the View menu, click Block Flow Diagram.

The BFD appears in the Main Window.
Note: You can move a block by clicking on the center of the block and
dragging it to the desired location. This will also move the streams connected
to the block. If the simulator data is reloaded, the block and stream locations
will be regenerated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
In addition to the blocks displayed in the Process view, the BFD displays
streams, direction of stream flows, inlets, and outlets.
The commands on the View menu change when the BFD is active.
The Drag & Find Feature

There is a quick and easy way to find a block on the BFD.
Drag the block from the Project Explorer’s Process view and drop it anywhere
in the BFD. The part of the BFD displayed changes so that the block you want
to find appears in the upper-left corner of the Main Window.

Drag a block from Project Explorer (Process view) to the BFD
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer finds the block on the diagram
Accessing Commands in the Block Flow

Diagram
Right-clicking on blocks in the BFD accesses the same commands available
when you right-click a block in Project Explorer’s Process view.
Block commands
Clicking View accesses simulator-derived data (read-only), as shown on

page 146.
X X
The Map command and Delete Mappings command are explained in the
next section, Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components, starting
on page 147. Alteration of mapping will alter the blocks' color based on its
status.

Stream commands
You can double-click a stream to access the Develop Stream specifications
form. This form is explained on page 120.
X X
Zooming
You can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to increase or decrease the
magnification by degrees:
You can also select an exact magnification by using the Zoom dialog box.
To use the Zoom dialog box:

1 On the View menu, click Zoom.
The Zoom dialog box appears.
2 Click the desired magnification, or click Custom and type a percentage

between 10 and 1,000.
3 Click OK to change magnification and close the dialog box.
-or-
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing magnification.
The Zoom dialog box also has two options that affect printing:
Fit into one page
Mark this box to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer re-size the BFD to fit
onto one page when printed. This automatically selects the next option,
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get, since the screen image will reflect the size
required to fit on one printed page.
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG)
When WYSIWYG is cleared, zooming in or out will only affect the
magnification factor on the screen, while the printer always prints at 100%.
However, if WYSIWYG is selected, the magnification factor on the printer will
be changed so that the printed image will have the same size as the image
appearing on the screen.

BlockFlow Diagram View Menu
The View menu contains some options that are only displayed when the Block Flow
Diagram is active
Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See page 40 forX X
descriptions of toolbar buttons.

Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See page 27 X X
for description of the status bar.

Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See
page 28 for description of Project
X X
Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See page 34 for
X X
description of the Palette

Properties Window View or hide the Properties Window. See
page 34 for a description of the Properties
X X
Window.
Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See
page 29 for an explanation of Workbook
X X
Mode.
Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for
interactive reports (on-screen, HTML, or
Excel) or Icarus Editor for evaluation

reports (.ccp). The Project Evaluation
needs to have already been run. See
page 413 and page 439 for details.
X X X X
Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis

spreadsheets. See Reviewing Investment
Analysis on page 448 for instructions.
X X
Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded

simulator data.
Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram. This
command is not active until you have
mapped the simulator items.
Streams List Display a read-only list of all simulator-
derived stream properties in a
spreadsheet. You can customize some of
the features of the spreadsheet (which
stream properties to display, whether to
display names of the properties, and the
display style of the property values) by
editing the stream list template file:
...\Economic Evaluation
V7.3\Data\ICS\strlist.fil
Grid Visible View or hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments corresponding
to the grid lines when dragging to new
location.
Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation lines. When
displayed, you can see where page breaks
will be when printing.
Ports Visible View or hide ports in the Process Flow
Diagram. Does not apply to Block Flow
Diagram.
Zoom Access Zoom dialog box. See page 150.
X X
Mapping Simulator Items to

Icarus Project Components
Mapping is the process of converting each simulator block (that is, model or
unit operation) into one or more Icarus project components.
To map simulator items:

1 If you want to map all items, access the Map dialog box by doing one of
the following:

-or-
 On the Run menu, click Map Items.
2 If you want to map a single block or all blocks in an area, do one of the
following:

 In Process view, right-click a block or area; then click Map on the
menu that appears.
-or-
 In the Block Flow Diagram, right-click a block then click Map on the
menu that appears.
Note: If an item is mapped, its icon is green. If an item is not mapped, its
icon is yellow.
The Map dialog box appears.
Note:
 If you clicked the Map button on the toolbar or clicked Map Items on
the Run menu, only the Map All Items check box is available in the
Source section.

 If you clicked Map on a pop-up menu, both Map Selected Item(s) –
the default choice – and Map All Items are available.
Select the desired mapping options.
Option Description
Source
Map Selected Item(s) Map the selected simulator block or the simulator blocks in
the selected simulator area. This option is available only if
you selected Map from a pop-up menu.
Map All Items Map all simulator items in the project.

Basis
Last Mapping Map a block according to the last time it was mapped. This
option retains only the type of Icarus project component(s)
to which the block was last mapped.
Default Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis. This
applies to every unit operation except for Compressors
defined in Aspen Plus and Aspen Hysys. The compressor
unit operation will be mapped to either the default
compressor mapping specified or a Turboexpander if the
unit op models an expander instead of a compressor. This
is the only unit operation that can potentially be changed
from the specification in the Component Map Specs file
when this option is selected during mapping.
Default and Simulator Use the Component Map Specs file for the basis, but
Data override the mapping using specific data in the simulator.
There are several examples where this applies:
1. If this option is selected and a reboiler type is
specified in the unit op, an equivalent reboiler type
will be used in the mapping.
2. If a compressor unit operation is used to model a
turboexpander in Aspen Plus or Aspen Hysys, the
turboexpander model will be selected during
mapping instead of a compressor.
3. Mapping of Aspen Plus or Aspen Hysys distillation
columns is based on the section definitions in the
unit op. Thus, if multiple sections are defined in
the unit op, an equivalent column type (e.g. double
or multi-diameter) will be used in the mapping. If
only a single section is defined, a single diameter
column will be used in the mapping.
Further, if the Preferences | Process | Use Automatic
Mapping Selection when Available was selected, then
additional engineering rules of thumb will be used for a
selected category of equipments (for example, pumps,
compressors, and heat exchangers) to come up the
mapping recommendations. (Note: Currently this mode is
active only when blocks are mapped one at a time.)
Users are encouraged to review these recommendations
and either accept them or select a different equipment type
based on their knowledge of their processes and practices.
Options

Option Description
Size Icarus Project Size the mapped Icarus project component(s).

Component(s) If you are mapping a single item to a single component
that can be sized using the interactive Sizing Expert, the
Interactive Sizing form will appear after mapping.
Otherwise, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses its
automatic sizing.
Although the Sizing Expert is unavailable when sizing
multiple components, you can still use it later (assuming
the component is one of those that can be sized
interactively). Just right-click on the mapped component
and click Re-Size on the pop-up menu.
Note: See Chapter 6 for instructions on using the

Sizing Expert.
Review Sizing If selected, the sizing selection preview appears after the
Selection mapping preview screen so you can edit how the project
components are sized.
Auto Map Streams to The mapped streams and lines will be displayed in the
Lines Mapping list.
3 Click OK.

The Project Component Map Preview dialog box appears.
Note: All simulator items are displayed because Map all Items was selected
at the previous dialog box. Those components being mapped have asterisks
next to them.
If you selected Map Selected Item(s) on the Map dialog box, the
Simulator Items list displays just the selected simulator block(s). If you
selected Map all Items, the Simulator Items list displays all simulator
blocks.
The Current Map List displays any components that are already mapped to
the simulator block highlighted on the Simulation List.
The Configuration option box is active only for blocks representing column
models. (In the sample project, Block B7 represents a column model.)
You must use the arrow scroll buttons to see all ten possible configurations.
Selecting a configuration type automatically fills in the Current Map List with
the components required for that configuration type. See Tower
Configurations for more information.
4 Click New Mapping to map a block highlighted on the Simulator Items
list to an Icarus project component.

If the simulator block represents a column model that does not yet have all
its required mappings, the Select a suffix dialog box appears, listing the
types of components (indicated by suffixes that appear at the end of Item
Descriptions on the List view) that still need to be mapped to the block.
Note: See Tower Configurations for more information.
Suffix To indicate
bottoms split bottoms splitter

bot exchanger bottoms exchanger
bottoms pump bottoms pump
cond condenser for the tower
cond acc condenser accumulator
ovhd exchanger Overhead exchanger
overhead split Overhead splitter
ovhd pump Overhead pump
precooler first heat exchanger in “split” configuration”
reb reboiler for the tower
reflux pump reflux pump
Tower main tower
Trim second heat exchanger in “split” configuration”
Other user selectable.
spray cond Spray condenser
spray cond exit pump Pump for recirculating the spray condenser exit
sc tot recycle splitter Splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration that generates
the total recycle stream
sc cooler Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that
cools the entire total recycle stream
sc tot recycle trim splitter Trim splitter in Spray Condenser Configuration 2
sc trim Heat exchanger in the Spray Condenser Configuration that
cools the entire total recycle stream
5 Select a suffix; then click OK.

The Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box appears.
6 Select a component.
The Project Component Map Preview dialog box now displays the
component category's item symbol (for example, AG) and the component
type (for example, DIRECT) in the Current Map List. More component
details are displayed in the Icarus Project Component Description
section.

By default, the Component Name field contains the block name. You may
want to modify it to be more descriptive and to distinguish the component
from others to which the block has also been mapped. This can be as simple
as adding a descriptor at the end.
Each component mapped from the block must have a unique name; if another
component already has the default component name, Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer prompts you to enter a unique name after you select
another component.
7 Click OK to complete the mapping.
If you selected to size the mapped component(s), Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer also performs automatic sizing or, in cases in which a single item is
being mapped to a single component for which interactive sizing is available,
the Interactive Sizing form appears. See Chapter 6, Sizing Project
Components, page 215, for information on this feature.

With the block now mapped, the List view displays the components mapped
from the simulator block.
Component Status
You may notice a "?" in the Status column of a project component mapped
from the simulator block. This indicates that there are still specifications that
need to be entered for the component.
To enter the specifications:

1 Right-click the component.
2 On the menu that appears, click Modify Item.
Entering specifications in the required fields will change the status to OK.
Required fields are indicated by color-coding explained on page 190, under
X X
Entering Component Specifications.

If you do not enter the specifications and the "?" remains in the Status
column, the item will not be included in the project evaluation and will have
"0" cost associated with it. It will not cause SCAN messages.
Deleting Mappings
To delete mappings:
 Right-click in the simulator area or simulator block in Process view; then,
on the menu that appears, click Delete.

Tower Configurations
Because a column can be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer requires that you select a tower configuration on
the Project Component Map Preview dialog box.
You can select from among ten possible configurations:

 Standard – Single
 Standard – Total
 Standard – Total w/Circ.
 Standard – Split
 Standard – Split Total
 Standard – Split Total w/Circ.
 Full – Single
 Full – Single w.Circ.
 Full – Split
 Full – Split w/Circ.
This term means
Single Tower has one condenser.
Split Tower has multiple condensers.
Total the reflux pump handles the total outlet liquid flow from
the accumulator. In such configurations, the splitting into

a reflux and overhead liquid product occurs after the
reflux pump.
Circ. there is a pump between the bottoms splitter and the
reboiler giving a forced circulation configuration around
the reboiler.
Note: Full configurations include the following equipment not found in

Standard configurations:
 overhead pump
 overhead product heat exchanger
 bottoms product pump
 bottoms product heat exchanger
Based on the tower configuration selected, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
automatically creates a model for each tower block and then maps the model
to an Icarus project component. In addition, you can specify how the
condenser requirements should be split between the Precooler and the Trim
cooler on the Design Criteria specifications form.
If subcooling is present, the precooler will completely condense the overhead
vapor and the trim cooler will perform the subcooling; the split specification
on the Design Criteria specifications form will be ignored when subcooling
is present.
The following figures display the ten possible configurations. The default item
description suffixes (see page 157) are used to identify the configuration
X X
parts, each of which is mapped to an Icarus project component.

Figure 1: Standard – Single

Figure 2 : Standard Total
Figure 3: Standard Total w/Circ

Figure 4: Standard Split

Figure 5: Standard Split Total
Figure 6: Standard Split Total w/Circ.

Figure 7: Full – Single
Figure 8: Full – Single w/Circ.

Figure 9: Full – Split
Figure 10: Full – Split w/Circ.

Figure 11: Spray Condenser Configuration 1 w/Circ.
Note: Flow rate of the Spray Cond Total Recycle (SCTR) stream is calculated
using Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates = mSCTR / (mOVH
LIQ PROD+ mREFLUX). Ratio of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates
is an input specified in the Design Criteria.
mSCTR = mass flow rate of the SCTR stream.
mOVH LIQ PROD = mass flow rate of the Overhead Liquid Product stream.
mREFLUX = mass flow rate of the Reflux stream.

Figure 12: Spray Condenser Configuration 2 w/Circ.
The duty for the SC COOLER and SC TRIM exchangers are calculated using
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty = QSCTRIM / QCONDENSER B B B
QCONDENSER = QSCTRIM + QSCCOOLER

B B B B B B
where:
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty is an input specified in the Design
Criteria
QSCTRIM
B B = Spray Condenser Cooler Duty
QSCCOOLER
B B = Spray Condenser Trim Duty
QCONDENSER
B B = Total Overhead Condenser Duty, obtained from
Simulator Data
Then the temperatures of the streams exiting the Spray Condenser Cooler
and Spray Condenser Trim exchangers are calculated using:
a Q = mCpDeltaT calculation.
Flow rate of the streams exiting the SC Tot Recycle Trim Splitter are
determined using:
SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio = mSCRTSEx1 / mSCCEx B B B B
mSCCEx = (mSCRTSEx1 + mSCRTSEx2)

B B B B B B

SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio is an input specified in the Design Criteria
mSCCE
B B = mass flow rate of the SC Cooler Exit Stream
mSCRTSEx1
B B = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex1
Stream
(this is the one that subsequently goes through the SC TRIM exchanger)
mSCRTSEx2
B B = mass flow rate of the SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex2
Stream
Sizing Selection
This section outlines the workflow of the sizing selection feature available in
Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator. Sizing selection is a mechanism that lets you
pre-define and/or define sizing rules for project components. Specifically, you
can set rules on equipment models or specific project components to be sized
with one or more custom models.
Project Sizing Selection

Typically, you load data from a simulation and then choose to map the
simulator unit operations. In the mapping screen that appears, there is a
check box to Review Sizing Selection. If selected (the default is based on
the Tools | Options | Preferences | Process | Sizing selection on the
item-size menu), the sizing selection appears.
You select any custom model for sizing the project components listed.
 If an item is selected, the sizing preview screen appears during a size or
re-size performed on one or more project component(s).
 If an item is not selected, the mapping preview screen does not appear for
editing during these steps, but the sizing selection specifications is applied
to the selected project component(s).

Figure 13: Mapping with option to review sizing selection
If selected, you will see the Sizing Selection preview after the mapping
preview screen for a chance to edit how the project components are sized
(see Figure 14).
Figure 14: Sizing Selection preview for specified project components

You can specify the sizing routines (System Sizing and custom models) for
each project component (created by mapping from a simulator or manual
creation) that will be applied during the size-all step.
If a custom model is specified in the current sizing list for a project
component, the project component will be sized in the order shown in the
Current Sizing List (see Figure 14). Any custom models listed will be sized
using the custom model tool automatically without any user-interaction
required. After sizing is complete, the system returns to a ready-state for
you to perform additional project tasks.

For Global Sizing Selection information, see page 221.
X X
Specifying Additional
Components
Icarus project components can be added to areas mapped from a simulator
report. However, these project components must initially be added in a user-
added area. You can later rearrange the components in Project Explorer’s
Project view, drag components from a user-added area to an area mapped
from the simulator report.
Follow the instructions for adding a project component on page 186.
X X
If the component you add is process equipment, Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer adds an icon representing the new equipment item in the upper left-
hand corner of the Process Flow Diagram (PFD). The next section, Working
with Process Flow Diagrams, includes instructions (see Editing Connectivity on
page 178) for connecting an added component to a stream in PFD view.
X178
Working with Process Flow

Diagrams
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) provide graphical representations of Icarus
process equipment mapped from simulator blocks and the interconnecting
streams. You can edit the layout and connectivity of the mapped items from
PFD view. You can also add streams. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
provides intelligent port selection, so that when drawing a stream you see the
candidate ports highlighted in green as the mouse is moved over them.
To access PFD view:

1 On the View menu, click Process Flow Diagram.

2 Use the Drag-and-Find feature to locate any equipment item on the PFD.
3 Drag an equipment item from Project Explorer (Project view) and drop it
on the PFD.
The icon in the PFD that corresponds to the selected equipment will be
positioned in the upper left-hand corner (regardless of magnification).
Editing the Layout

To change the position of an item:
 Use your mouse to drag the item to its new position.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer reroutes any streams connected to the
item.
To change the route of a stream:

 Click the stream; then drag the stream to straighten it or to create an
elbow bend.
Note: If you eventually select Reroute All Streams on the Run menu,
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer chooses the most logical routes for all
streams.
Process Flow Diagram View Menu

Note: The View menu contains some options that are displayed only when
the Block Flow Diagram is active.

Use this to
Toolbar View or hide the toolbar. See

page 40 for descriptions of toolbar
X X
buttons.
Status Bar View or hide the status bar. See
page 27 for a description of the
X X
status bar.
Project Explorer View or hide Project Explorer. See
page 28 for a description of
X X
Project Explorer.
Palette View or hide the Palette. See
page 34 for a description of the
X X
Palette.
Properties Window View or hide the Properties
window. See page 34 for a
X X
description of the Properties

window.
Workbook Mode Turn Workbook Mode on and
off. See page 29 for an
X X
explanation of Workbook Mode.

Capital Costs View Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter for
interactive reports (on-screen,

HTML, or Excel) or Icarus Editor
for evaluation reports (.ccp). The
Project Evaluation needs to have
already been run. See page 413 X X
and page 439 for details.

X X
Investment Analysis View Display Investment Analysis

spreadsheets. See Reviewing
Investment Analysis on
page 448 for instructions.
X X
Block Flow Diagram Display Block Flow Diagram of

the loaded simulator data.
Process Flow Diagram Display Process Flow Diagram.
This command is not active until
you have mapped the simulator
items.
Streams List Display a read-only list of all
simulator-derived stream
properties in a spreadsheet. You
can customize some of the
features of the spreadsheet
(which stream properties to
display, whether to display names
of the properties, and the display
style of the property values) by
editing the stream list template
file:
...\Economic Evaluation
V7.3\Data\ICS\strlist.fil
Grid Settings Access Grid Properties dialog
box, where you can set the grid
increments and select to view or
hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid Move blocks in increments
corresponding to the grid lines
when dragging to new location.
Show Page Bounds View or hide page separation
lines. When displayed, you can
see where page breaks will be
when printing.
Ports Visible View or hide ports.
Zoom Access Zoom tool. This is the
same as in the Block Flow
Diagram (see page 150). X X
Add Stream Access the Develop Streams

dialog box. See Adding A
Stream, page 180, for details.
X X
Draw Disconnected Stream Access the Disconnected Streams

dialog box. See “Drawing a
Disconnected Stream,” page 182, X X
for details.
Edit Connectivity Activate the Edit Connectivity
feature. See “Editing
Connectivity,” page 178, for X X
details.

Setting Grid Properties
You can select to display grids of any increments. In addition, you can select
the color of the grids and whether to be in Snap to Grid mode.
To set grid properties:

1 On the View menu, click Grid Settings.
The Grid Properties dialog box appears.
2 Set the Across and Down grid increments in the Increments section.
Specify in the Units section whether the specified increments are in
inches or centimeters.
3 Select the Snap to Grid check box to turn on Snap to Grid mode. When
you drag a block in this mode, the block’s bounding outline moves in
increments corresponding to the grid.
4 Click Color to select a grid color.
5 Finally, in the Visibility section, click whether to show or hide the grid.
6 Click OK to apply the settings.
Editing Connectivity
The Edit Connectivity feature lets you make changes to the layout of items in
the PFD. Because this involves connecting and disconnecting streams to
ports, the Ports Visible option should be on, as it is by default.
If the ports are not visible, click the Ports Visible button .
Connecting a Stream to Different Inlet Port

To connect a stream to a different inlet port:
 On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button

-or-

 On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.
2 Place the cursor over the end of the stream you want to connect to a
different inlet port.
The cursor becomes an arrow.
3 Click the end of the stream.

The cursor now appears as a crosshairs.
4 Move the cursor to another inlet port.
When the cursor is in close proximity to a component, the component's
available inlet ports display green.
5 Click the new inlet port.
Connecting an Added Project Component to a Stream

Project components that you add to the project appear in the upper left-hand
corner of the PFD and are not connected to any streams.
To connect an added project component to a stream:

 On the toolbar, click the Edit Connectivity button

-or-
 On the View menu, click Edit Connectivity.
2 Place the cursor over the added project component that you wish to insert
into an existing stream.
The cursor becomes a hand.

3 Click the component.
A bounding outline, representing the component, appears around the cursor.
4 Move the cursor over a stream. Click when you have placed the cursor
over the desired stream.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer disconnects the Sink end of the stream
from the inlet port on the current component, then automatically re-connects
it to the inlet port on the inserted component.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer also creates a new stream, which appears
white and has properties relative to the initial stream. Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer connects the Source end of this new stream to the outlet
port of the inserted item and the Sink and to the inlet port of the original.
The added item can now be sized manually or using the Size Item option,
which either automatically sizes the item or, if interactive sizing is available,
accesses the Sizing Expert. The Sizing Expert, explained in Chapter 6, will
utilize the newly connected streams.
Adding a Stream
From PFD view, you can create a new stream and specify its connectivity. The
process of developing streams is explained in detail under Developing
Streams, page 118.
X X

To add a stream:
 On the toolbar, click the Add Stream button .

-or-
 On the View menu, click Add Stream.

 To create a stream from scratch, click Create and proceed to Step 3.
-or-
 To create a stream based on an existing stream, in the Base Stream
section, click the existing stream; and then click a Basis:
o Absolute If the Basis Mode is Absolute, the data from the base
stream is copied to the new stream at the time the new stream is
created. If the data of the base stream is altered at any time after
this point, the data of the new stream remains unchanged.
o Relative If the Basis Mode is Relative, the new stream’s data is
dynamically linked to that of the stream on which it’s based. This
means that alterations to the data of the base stream immediately
affect the new stream.
3 Click Create.

4 Type a name in the Stream Name field; then click OK.

The Develop Streams specifications dialog box appears.
5 Make any desired modifications; then click OK.
6 Move the cursor, which appears as a square, to an outlet port.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides intelligent port selection,
highlighting the candidate ports in green.
7 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired outlet port.
8 Move the cursor, which now appears as crosshairs, to an inlet port.
9 Click when you have placed the cursor over the desired inlet port.
Drawing a Disconnected Stream

To draw a disconnected stream:

 On the toolbar, click the Draw Disconnected Stream button .
-or-
 On the View menu, click Draw Disconnected Stream.
The Disconnected Streams dialog box appears.
2 Click a stream; then click OK.

3 Draw the stream as described in the previous instructions for Adding a
Stream.
Working with Streams

Right-clicking a stream accesses a pop-up menu with the following
commands.
Use this to
Modify Access the Develop Stream dialog box listing the stream’s
specifications, which you can modify.
Disconnect Erase the stream from the screen and store it, so that you
can select it when using the Draw Disconnected Stream
feature (see page 182).
X X
Reconnect Source Reconnect the stream to a new outlet port.

Reconnect Sink Reconnect the stream to a new inlet port.
Delete Delete the stream.

5 Defining Project
Components
When developing an Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project, you can add
project components in Project view to user-defined areas (areas not mapped
from the simulation report). Once added, you can drag them to different
areas. Components are categorized as follows:
Note: See ICARUS Reference Guide for information on individual components.

Category To define
Process Equipment Equipment for gas, liquids and solids
handling and off-site/packaged
systems.
Plant Bulks Material commodities that service a
section of the plant or the whole plant.
Plant bulks are divided into categories:
Piping, Civil, Steel, Instrumentation,
Electrical, Insulation and Paint.
Site Development Modifications that must be done to the
site. Site development items are
divided into categories: Demolition,
Drainage, Earthwork, Fencing,
Landscaping, Roads-Slabs-Paving,
Piling and Railroads.
Buildings Civil structures directly involved in the
process or for off-site use.
Quoted Equipment A way to enter special equipment not
found in Process Equipment above.
Unit Cost Library Items from a Unit Cost Library. See
Chapter 7.
Equipment Model Items from an Equipment Model
Library Library. See Chapter 7.
5 Defining Project Components 185

Adding an Area
To add an area:
1 In Project Explorer’s Project view, right-click on the Main Project folder.
2 Click Add Area on the pop-up menu.

The Area Information dialog box appears.
3 Define the area, including name, type, and dimensions.

The Area Type determines how equipment will be installed in the area. See
Chapter 36 of Icarus Reference for information.
4 Click OK.
Project Explorer now displays the new area.
Adding a Project Component

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides two methods for adding a project
component:

Drag-and-drop
Drag a component from the Palette to an area on Project Explorer’s Project
view and enter an item description. This adds the component to the area
without displaying the Component Specifications form; the specifications are
left to be entered at your convenience.
Pop-up menu
Right-click on an area and click Add Project Component from the pop-up
menu, then select a component from the Project Component Selection dialog
box and enter an item description. This adds the component and also displays
the Component Specifications form, where you can complete the component
definition right away.
Method 1: Dragging a Component from the

Palette
To add a component using the drag-and-drop method:
1 With the Palette (Components view) and Project Explorer (Project view)
displayed, drag a component from the components list to an area on the
Project Explorer.
Note: The Recent Items folder in the Components view stores the last 10
project component selections.
2 To drag, click the component and hold down the mouse button.
3 Move the cursor until over the area where you want to place the
component.
4 Release the mouse button.

The New Component Information dialog box appears.
5 Enter an item description (required) and User Tag Number (optional), then
click OK.
The component is added. Project Explorer displays a block for the component
under the selected area. The List view displays general information. You may
notice a question mark (?) in the Status column on the List view. This
indicates that there are still specifications that need to be entered for the
component. To enter the specifications, follow the instructions under Entering
Component Specifications on page 190.
X X
Method 2: Using the Pop-Up Menu

To add a component using the pop-up menu:
1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click on a non-simulator area and
click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

The Project Component Selection dialog box appears.
2 Enter the Project Component Name.

3 Highlight the category to which the desired equipment belongs (process
equipment, plant bulks, site development, buildings, quoted equipment)
and click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a list of sub-categories.
4 Continue to narrow down the selection to a specific component. Clck OK.
5 The component is added to the area.
The Component Specifications form is automatically displayed. You can
either complete the definition of the equipment item now or later.

Entering Component
Specifications
After adding a component, you still need to enter at least some component
specifications to complete the component’s definition. Many component
specifications have default values used when no value is entered, but most
component specifications require further input. If a component added still has
any specifications requiring input, a question mark (?) appears in the status
column of the List view for that component.
You do not have to enter specifications immediately upon adding a
component; you may wish to wait until more information about a project
becomes available.
As more information about a project becomes available, you may also wish to
modify previously entered component specifications. The following
instructions apply as well to modifying previously entered specifications.
To enter or modify component specifications:

If the Component Specifications form is not already displayed in the Main
Window, display the form by right-clicking on the component and clicking
Modify Item on the pop-up menu. You can right-click on the component in
either Project Explorer (Project view) or List view (Area level)
Double-clicking on the component will also display the Specifications form.
Color coding
 Red Border: An entry must be made in the field. All specifications forms
have at least one required entry field.

 Green Borders and Thick Gray Borders: An entry must be made in either
the field with the thick gray border or in the two fields with the green
borders. The field with the thick gray borders and the fields with the green
borders are mutually exclusive. In the form pictured to the right, either
the pump size must be selected or the fluid head and liquid flow rate must
be entered. The Properties Window notes this in the Description.
Enter the specifications.
Note: While on either the component or installation bulks specifications form,

you can quickly determine the net effect of all your changes by clicking the
Evaluate button and reviewing the resulting report. See page 470 for
X X
more information
Fields with red borders are required. If there’s a combination of two fields
with green borders and one with a thick gray border, an entry must be made
either in the two fields with the green borders or in the field with the thick
gray border.
To define installation bulks for the component:
1 Click the Options drop-down and select the type of bulks to define.
See “Defining Installation Bulks” on page 192 for a complete description of

X X
installation bulks.
After defining the component and installation bulks, save the specifications
form by clicking OK.

Defining Installation Bulks
Installation bulks are items directly associated with the component being
defined and are used to complete the installation of the item, for example, a
foundation for a vessel. The difference between an installation bulk and a
plant bulk is that an installation bulk is associated with a component, whereas
a plant bulk services the whole plant or mill.
Installation bulks may be defined when entering or modifying equipment or
plant bulk specifications. Most components are automatically outfitted with
installation bulks, so this feature is typically used to adjust, modify, or delete
selected bulks. However, because quoted equipment is not automatically
outfitted with installation bulks, this feature also serves as the method for
defining all installation bulks required for quoted equipment.
To access installation bulk specifications:
1 Display the Component Specifications form.
2 Click the down-arrow on the Options button .
3 Click the type of installation bulks you want to view or define.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the specifications form for the
selected installation bulk items. See the subsections that follow for
descriptions of the different types of installation bulks.
4 When you are done defining the installation bulk, save your changes in
either of two ways, depending on what you intend to do next:
o If you want to continue modifying this component’s installation
bulks or component specifications, click Apply to save the
changes. You can now select either Project Component or
another type of installation bulks from the Options menu.

o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to
the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and
close the specifications.
Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
return you to the main Component Specifications form after you click OK (see
page 53).X X
Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments
Using Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments, you can specify percent adjustments of
system-calculated values as follows:
Category Percent adjustment for
Equipment Material cost (COA 100-299)

Setting Man-hours (COA 100-299)
Piping Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 300-399)
Civil Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 400-499)
Steel Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 500-599)
Instrumentation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 600-699)
Electrical Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 700-799)
Insulation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA 800-899)
Paint Material costs and/or man-hours. (COA 900-999)
These adjustments compound material and man-hour indexing applied to the

same COA’s. User-entered material costs and man-hours (entered using
either Quoted Equipment or Mat’l/Man-hours % Additions) are not affected by
these adjustments.
A special options section at the bottom of this form allows you to specify
non-default installations for the item, including demolition (i.e.,
dismantlement) of the component and its installation bulks.
For example, to demolish a component item:

1 Click Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments on the Options menu of the
Component Specifications form.
2 Scroll down to the Special Options section and, on the Installation
Options list, click DEML.

Note: Clicking the demolition (DEML) option causes the following changes
to the component:
 Material costs are set to zero.
 Man-hours and labor costs are charged to demolition COAs (for example,
109, 309, 409, and so on)
 Piping and civil man-hours are down-adjusted:
o Shop fab man-hours are removed from piping man-hours.
o Civil formwork/bracing man-hours are removed.
3 Go back through the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments form and make the
proper adjustments to account for the relative difficulty of demolition
versus new build.
For example, if you know unsetting the component is 15% easier than initially
setting it, then enter 85% in the Setting labor adjustment field.
4 Save your changes in either of two ways, depending on what you intend
to do next:
o If you want to continue modifying this component’s installation
bulk or component specifications, click Apply to save the
changes to the Mat’l Man-hour Adjustments. You can now select
either Project Component or another installation bulk from the
Options menu.
o If you are done making changes to the installation bulks and to
the component specifications, click OK to save the changes and
close the specifications window.

Note: You can select in Preferences to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer return you to the main Component Specifications form after you
click OK (see page 53).
X X
Mat’l/Man-hours Additions
Using Mat’l/Man-hours Additions, you can add lump sum material costs and/or
man-hours to a specified COA. All additions are reported “as is.” Additions are
neither indexed nor adjusted by Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments. Up to 20
additions can be defined per component.
Pipe – General Specs

Use Pipe – General Specs to define the rules for developing all installation
piping on the selected component. You can use many fields to define general
piping specifications, such as: Material
 Pressure
 Temperature
 Installation - above or below grade
 Fluid or electric tracing
 Flange class and type
 Stress relief
 Insulation type
 Insulation jacket type
 Paint treatment
Pipe – Item Details

Use Pipe – Item Details to specify individual runs of piping and associated
fittings, tracing, paint and insulation. The line is developed using the rules
defined in Pipe – General Specs unless they are re-defined with Pipe – Item
Details. Up to 40 lines may be defined/adjusted for each component.
Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple items have
been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If Display P&I
Installation Items is unmarked on the Preferences General tab view, selecting
Pipe – Item Details will display a dialog box from which you can select the
item you wish to edit or select to add a new item. See page 52 for
X X
instructions on entering Preferences.

The component starts with piping depicted in the Piping and Instrumentation
Drawings manual. You can also display the component’s piping and
instrumentation drawing by clicking the P&ID button on the Component
Specifications form.
It displays the piping you are adjusting on the Pipe Details Installation
Bulk form.

You can revise the pipe volumetric model for a component line-by-line.
Specifications on the Pipe – Item Details Installation Bulk form override the
project-, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise determine
the design of all lines of pipe. For example, area dimensions determine all
lengths of lines generated by volumetric models except those lines for which
you enter a specific length.
The Piping Volumetric Model field offers the following options:
“blank” - Specified pipe only, no volum. model

This option should rarely be used. It is a rapid way to discard the complete
piping model for this item; however, in addition to discarding all of the
automatically generated lines of pipe, this also discards all the associated
drains/vents and pipe-associated instrumentation. The system now generates
only piping, drains/vents and on-/in-line instrumentation for those lines that
you subsequently define. Once you have used this option, the other options
below cannot be used because the model is already discarded. If you
subsequently re-create a line that the volumetric model would have
automatically created, the associated on-/in-line instrumentation is
automatically “re-created.”
A - Add line to pipe volumetric model

This option is used to add a new line of pipe to a component. The number of
the new line must be higher than any other automatically created or user-
defined line. For example, if a component generates lines 1 to 6, then an
added line may have the number 7 to 40. The area dimensions will have no
effect on the length of these lines. It is not necessary to add line numbers in

numeric order; however, they will be generated and reported in numeric
order. To associate instrumentation with a new line, specify that a sensor or
control element location is this line number. Line 40 is reserved for
drains/vents.
C - Change lines on pipe volumetric model

This is a commonly used option. It is used to modify automatically generated
lines of pipe; user-specified lines are not changed. The line is generated
exactly at it would have been in the absence of your specifications, except for
the items which you change. You may use this to change only the metallurgy,
diameter or length of a run, or only the valves and fittings (including setting
the quantity to 0) or any combination of these.
D - Delete line on pipe volumetric model

This option deletes a single line of automatically generated pipe and its
associated drains/vents and instrumentation.
R - Replace line on pipe volumetric model

This option replaces the automatically generated line completely with the
exact line that you specify. If you do not define something for this line, you
do not get it. For example, if you specify a line of fixed length containing no
valves or fittings, then you only get the straight-run of pipe.
To make more than one specification for Pipe – Item Details:
 Click Add.
This adds an item specs column to this form.

To delete any unwanted or unused column(s):
Click any cell in that column (or drag for a range of columns). Click Delete.
Note: Incompletely specified columns must be either completed or deleted

before saving.
Duct
Duct installation bulk items specify individual runs of process ductwork and
associated fittings and insulation. Up to 5 duct lines may be specified for each
component. Use the same methods described for multiple lines of pipe.

Civil
Civil installation bulk items specify bulk excavation and up to three different
foundation types/sizes. The available foundation types are listed in the Icarus
Reference.
From the specified foundation types and volumes, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer calculates:
 Excavation and backfill
 Form work (plywood/backup lumber with reuse)
 Rebar
 Sand mat (or ring wall foundation types only)
 Grout
 Anchor bolts/embedments
Steel
The Steel installation bulk specifies the following:
 Ladders
 Stairs
 Platforms
In addition, up to three different steel items may be specified.
Instrumentation
Instrument installation bulk items specify individual instrumentation loops or
parts of loops with associated sensors, transmitters and signal cabling. Up to
50 loops may be defined for each component.
Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple instrument
items have been added, select in Preferences to not display all items. If
Display P&I Installation Items is unmarked on the Preferences General tab
view, selecting Instrumentation will display a dialog box from which you can
select the item you wish to edit or select to add a new item. See page 52 for
X X
instructions on accessing and entering Preferences.

The component starts with instrumentation depicted in the Piping and
Instrumentation Drawings manual. You can also display the component’s
piping and instrumentation drawing by clicking the P&ID button on

the Component Specifications form. It displays the instrumentation you are
adjusting on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form.
You can revise the instrument volumetric model for a component loop-by-
loop. Specifications entered on the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form
override the project-, area- and component-level specifications that otherwise
determine the design of all instrument loops.

The Instrument Volumetric Model field offers the following options:
 blank - Specified loop only, no volum. model
This option should rarely be used, It is a rapid way to discard the complete
instrument model for this item. The system now generates instrumentation
for those loops that you subsequently define. To define new loops, you
continue to use this “blank” option for each successive loop. Once you have
used this option, the other options below cannot be used because the model
is already discarded.
 A - Add loop to instr. volum. model
This option is used to add a new loop to a component. The number of the new
loop must be higher than any other automatically created or user-defined
loop. It is not necessary to add loop numbers in numeric order; however,
they will be generated and reported in numeric order. For example, if a
component generates loops 1 to 6, then an added loop may have the number
7 to 50.
 D - Delete loop on instr. volum. model
This option deletes a single loop, including sensor, transmitter, cable, control
center connections and final control element.
 R - Replace loop on instr. volum. model
This option replaces the automatically-generated loop completely with the
exact loop that you specify. If you do not define something for this loop, or
you selectively delete a part, you do not get it. For example, if you specify a
sensor and transmitter only, then you only get the signal generated and sent
to the control center.
 “+” - Append to previous loop w/same no.
This option is used to append extra sensors or control valves to the
immediately preceding, user-defined loop (you must also correctly specify the
loop number of the preceding loop). It may not be used to append items to
automatically generated loops; to do this, you should first use the replace

option to redefine the loop, then use the “+” option. Whether you are
appending a sensor or control element, you should make entries for both the
sensor and control valve locations.
To define more than one adjustment, use the same methods described earlier
for Pipe – Item Details (page 197).
X X
Instrument Loop Adjustment

On the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form, there are eight Loop
Modification fields, which allow you to remove different elements of the
instrument loop from the project. Select “-” from the drop-down menu to
remove an element.
Two of the elements, sensor and control valve, can also be specified as
quoted (“Q”) or vendor-provided (“V”) equipment. When either “Q” or “V” is
selected, the system includes installation manhours for the element but not
material costs.
Deleting the process connection removes all of the instrument piping.

The indicating signal and control signal runs are reported together, so
removing one would decrease the amount of cable and supports by half.
The following diagram shows how the eight adjustable loop elements fit into
the loop design:

Notes:
(A) Junction boxes can be found under PLANT BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION,
JUNC-BOX.
(B) Multi-core runs can be found under PLANT BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION, ELECTRONIC SIGNAL WIRE. You can specify it with or
without the junction box.
(C) Control centers can be found under PLANT BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION, MULTIFUNCTION CONTROLLERS (electronic) or PLANT
BULKS, INSTRUMENTATION, INSTRUMENT PANEL – ANALOG (pneumatic).
Electrical
The Electrical installation bulk specifies local equipment lighting, control
wiring and power/cable and motor starters for up to three different types of
electrical loads.
Insulation
The Insulation installation bulk specifies insulation and fireproofing for
component and installation bulk steel. For components, the insulation type,
jacket type, thickness and area may be specified. For component and steel
fireproofing, type, rating and area may be specified.

Paint
The Paint installation bulk specifies surface preparation and painting of
component and installation bulk steel. Paint for pipe is specified under piping.
Entry field specifications include:
 Size of area to be painted
 Number of prime and final coats
 Percent of painted area to be sandblasted
 Galvanizing (for steel)
Defining Area Specifications

You can define mechanical design and cost basis specifications for the newly
added area. You can define or modify area specifications.
To define area specifications:

1 Right-click on the area in Project Explorer’s Project view and then click
Modify on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Process Economic Evaluator displays the Area Information dialog
box.
2 Select the specification category you want to define:

Select To do this
Area Name Change the area name.
Area Type Specify the area type:
 EXOPEN
 FLOOR
 GRADE
 OPEN
 PAD
Area Dimensions Specify the Area Dimensions:

Select To do this
 Length
 Width
 Height
3 When you have finished modifying the area, click OK.
Importing Areas and

Components
Using a drag-and-drop operation, you can import entire areas or individual
components from other project scenarios. Select in Preferences whether to
also include installation bulks and/or connected streams (see page 54). By
X X
default, installation bulks are included and connected streams are not.
To import an area or component:
1 Have Project Explorer’s Project view open, since you will drag the
component or area there.
2 In the Palette’s Projects view, double-click on the project scenario from
which you wish to import. This displays the project areas in the scenario.
3 Expand an area folder to display the components in it.
Note: You can only display the areas and components of a scenario that has
the same units of measure as the current scenario. If units of measure are
different, a message will appear in the Status bar notifying you of this when
you double-click on the scenario.
To import a component:
 Drag the component to the desired area in Project Explorer, Project view.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the component to the area.
To import an area and its components:

 Drag the area to Main Project in Project Explorer.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the area and its components.
To import all the components in an area to an existing area in the

current project scenario:
 Drag the area from the Palette to the desired area in Project Explorer.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the components to the area without
creating a new area.
Importing an Entire Scenario

As well as allowing you to import individual areas or components, Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer lets you import an entire scenario using a drag-
and-drop operation. This imports all the areas and components in the selected
scenario. You can select in Preferences whether to also include installation
bulks and/or connected streams (see page 54). By default, installation bulks
X X
are included and connected streams are not.
To import an entire scenario:

1 Have Project Explorer’s Project view open, since you will drag the scenario
there.
2 Click the scenario in the Palette’s Projects view.
3 Drag the scenario from the Palette to Project Explorer’s Project view.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays a confirmation window.

4 Click Yes.
The areas and components of the selected scenario are imported.
Note: You can only import scenarios that have the same units of measure as
the current scenario. If the units of measure are not the same, a dialog box
will inform you of this when you try to import.
Copying Components
The Copy command copies a selected component and all of its associated
installation bulks. This is useful if you want to add a component which is
similar to an existing item. The item can be copied and modified with less
effort than creating a new item.
Remember to change the Item Description when copying components to
distinguish the copy from the original.
To copy and paste a component:

1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the List view (at
area level, so that components are listed), and then click Copy on the
pop-up menu.
2 You can also copy multiple components at once: select the desired
components on the List view, right-click on one of the components, and
click Copy on the pop-up menu.
3 Right-click on the area to which you want to add the component(s) and
click Paste on the pop-up menu.
The component is added to the area.
Note: If the area contains a component with the same name as the one being
pasted, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer changes the new component’s
name so that “#1#” appears at the beginning.
Cut and Paste

If you want to delete (cut) a component from one area and add (paste) it in
another area, use the same procedure as above, except click Cut instead of
Copy on the pop-up menu.
Drag and Drop

You can also move a component from one area to another by dragging it.

Modifying Components
You can modify the following components using Spreadsheet View:
 Vessels
 Towers
 Heat Exchangers
 Pumps
 Quoted Components
To modify a component using Spreadsheet View:

1 On the main menu bar, click View | Spreadsheet View | <the type of
component to modify>.
The <the type of component to modify> spreadsheet view appears.
2 On the <the type of component to modify>spreadsheet view, click
Options.
3 On the menu that appears, click the option you want to modify.
4 On the spreadsheet, make your modifications.
5 When you are satisfied with your modifications, click Apply.
6 Click OK.
Your modifications are made in the project.
Note: You cannot use this feature if a component specs form is open that
would let you edit data that would also be editable in the spreadsheet view.
Copying Areas
Use Area Copy and Paste to create or modify an area specification that is
identical to an existing area.
To copy and paste an area:

1 Right-click an existing area.
2 On the menu that appears, click Copy.
3 Right-click the project node where you want to copy the area.
4 On the menu that appears, click Paste.
5 In the dialog box that appears, type a name for the new area (for
example, area1).
The new area is added identical (except in name) to the area you copied.
Deleting Components
The Delete command removes a component and all associated installation
bulks from the project.

To delete a component:
1 Right-click the component in either Project Explorer or the List view; then
click Delete on the pop-up menu.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
page 52).
X X
2 Click Yes to delete the component or click No to retain the component.

3 You can also delete multiple components at one time: select the
components on the List view, right-click one of the components; then
click Delete on the pop-up menu.
Re-numbering Components
After deleting components, you may wish to re-number the remaining
components so that the numbering contains no gaps and reflects the order in
which components were added.
For example, if you add components A, B, C, D, and E in that order, the
automatically generated Order Numbers would be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, respectively
(the Order Number appears on the List view). If you then delete components
B and C and re-number, components A, D, and E would have Order Numbers
1, 2, 3, respectively. The order in which they were created would still
determine the Order Numbers.
To re-number components:
 On the Run menu, click Re-number and then click Project Components
on the sub-menu.
Deleting Areas
The Delete Area command removes the selected area and all of its
components.
To delete an area:
1 Right-click the area in Project Explorer.
2 On the menu that appears, click Delete Area.

page 52).
X X
3 Click Yes to delete the area.

-or-
Click No to retain the area.
Re-Numbering Areas
Areas have reference numbers that are internally stored and then used by the
Evaluation Engine. They are not visible in the current version of Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer. Just as with components, re-numbering is
intended to close gaps in the numbering after deletion.
To re-number areas:
1 On the Run menu, click Re-number.
2 On the menu that appears, click Project Areas.
Using the Custom Model Tool

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer’s Custom Model tool lets you base
component specifications on formulas or fixed data stored in Excel. Use the
tool to send a component’s specification values, connection stream values,
and specified bulk information (pipe-item details, material and man-hour
adjustments) to an Aspen-designed Excel workbook, where you can enter
new specification values based on your own data or formulas. Then, use the
tool to send the new data back to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
For instance, you could use the Custom Model tool to calculate a pump driver
power based on a flow rate and pump head or to calculate project component
costs using your own custom method in Excel.
The specifications rules remain stored in Excel, so that you can change the
specifications in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer and then revert back to the
Excel specifications by re-running the tool (if the values are fixed). Once the
tool has been used with a project component, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer associates the customized project component with the last Excel
spreadsheet used. Running the tool at the project level updates all
components for which the tool has already been run.
The tool provides template files for mixers and pumps, as well as a general
template to use as the starting point for creating files for other components.
However, for components other than pumps and mixers, you must first copy
the general template file (or use Save As) and enter the slot names for the
component specifications you wish to input, as explained on page 212.

To use the Custom Model tool on a project component:
Note: Before using this tool, you must select the Activate Custom Model
option on the Process tab in Preferences. See page 52 for information on
accessing Preferences.
1 In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click the pump or mixer
component that you wish to customize.
2 On the menu that appears, click Custom Model.
The User Custom Model dialog box appears. It displays the name of the
project, scenario, and project component selected for the operation. It also
displays available Microsoft Excel (.xls) template files.

3 Click the Excel template file that you have created for the selected project
component.
4 Click Run.
Excel displays the workbook, with tabs for:
 Input
 Custom Rules
 Output
The Input worksheet displays the original Icarus system values from Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer.
 Item information is provided at the top of the worksheet. The item
information is from the Component Specifications form.
 Stream information, if available, is shown toward the bottom.
 Below the stream information is information on the installation bulks for
Material and Man-hour Adjustments and Pipe Item Detail.

The Custom Rules worksheet is provided for storing any data that you may
wish to use in the output formulas.
Input specs have been placed on the Custom Rules along with sample
alterations for the following:
 Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream
 Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments
 Pipe item details
The Output worksheet displays the same component specification slots as on
the Input worksheet. However, you can customize the values on the Output
worksheet.

The values are in the same column-row position as on the Input worksheet,
so that you can easily reference the Input data when entering formulas.
You send the entries on the Output worksheet to Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer by clicking Apply or OK on the Custom Model tool.
The following include customized values based on the sample alterations on
the Custom Rules worksheet:
 Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream
 Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour adjustments
 Pipe item details
These customizations have been entered solely for example purposes.
5 Enter new specifications on the Output worksheet. For example, if you
want to double the Input flow rate value provided on Row 10, Column C,
enter the following formula:
=Input!C10*2
6 Go to the Custom Model tool; then click OK to send the output to Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer and close the tool.
When you display the specifications form of the component, you will see the
values from the Output worksheet.
Creating a Template
To create a template for a component:
1 Open GeneralModelTemplate.xls; then save it as another file. The
folder in which you store Custom Model files is specified on the Locations
tab in Preferences (APICustomModelDir). The default is:
AspenTech\Economic Evaluation V7.3\Program\API Custom Models
2 Starting on Row 6, Column B for item information, enter the slot names
for the specifications that you want to have sent from Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer when the file is run for a component.

Slot names for every equipment and plant bulk item are provided in Icarus
Technology Object Definitions (API.pdf). For example, to have the tool send
Shell Design Temperature to Excel when the file is run for Fixed Tube
Heat Exchangers, you would need to enter CPDesignTemperatureShell.
3 For connection stream information, enter slot names starting on Row 43,
Column B.
4 For material and man-hour adjustments, enter slot names starting on row
70, column B.
5 For the pipe-item details, enter slot names starting on row 101, column B.
Running the Custom Model Tool at

Project-Level for Batch Update
The batch update process for the Custom Model can be done one of two ways.
 The first method is for a batch update of custom model operations
performed on project components that are already linked to a custom
model template.
 The second method is for a batch update of all selected components.
After using the Custom Model tool for any number of components, you can
continue to experiment with different specifications and easily revert back to
the custom specifications by running the tool at the project level. Simply
right-click Main Project or Project Area in Project Explorer’s Project view;
then click Custom Model.
If more than one project component has been selected for the custom model
(for example, multi-selection, area selection, project selection), a message
box will appear asking you to specify the mode of operation.

If you click Yes, you will be able to specify a custom model template and all
of the selected project components will be processed with the one chosen
template.
If you click No, only project components with a link to a custom model
template will be processed with their associated template.
Note: the output will be based on the values in the Output workbook in
Excel. If the Output workbook contains formulas based on input, changes in
input since originally running the Custom Model will affect the output when
the Custom Model is re-run.
This re-runs all custom models stored in the Custom Model tool.

6 Sizing Project Components
Overview
Note: To see the list of the Equipment and Slots of those Equipment which
will be affected by mapping when you do Map Based On Last Session, see
Appendix A. The slots listed on the table in Appendix A WILL CHANGE.
Sizing for Project Components Mapped

from Simulator Items
Operating conditions for the project components mapped from simulator
models are obtained from the information loaded into Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer from the simulator report. Any Design Data in the
simulator report is also loaded and used during sizing. The information
consists of a unit operation model and the streams connected to it.
You can size a mapped project component in either of two ways:
 Right-click the component in Project Explorer and click Size Item on the
pop-up menu.
 Click the Size button on the Component Specifications form:
6 Sizing Project Components 215

Interactive Sizing Expert
For the following components, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides the
Interactive Sizing form that allows you to adjust sizing specifications. The
Interactive Sizing form appears when you size the component.
Heat Exchangers DHE FIXED-T-S
DHE FLOAT-HEAD
DHE U-TUBE
DRB KETTLE
DRB THERMOSIPH
DRB U-TUBE
Compressors DCP CENTRIF

DCP GEN-SERV
DGC CENTRIF
DGC CENTRIF-IG
DGC RECIP-MOTR
EGC RECIP-GAS
DCP ANSI
DCP ANSI-PLAST
DCP API 610
DCP API 610-IL
DCP CANNED
DCP TURBINE
DCP PULP STOCK
DCP NAG DRIVE
Pumps DCP ANSI

DCP ANSI-PLAST
DCP API 610
DCP API 610-IL
DCP CANNED
DCP TURBINE
DCP PULP STOCK
DCP NAG DRIVE
Vessels DHT HORIZ-DRUM

DVT CYLINDER
DVT SPHERE
DVT SPHEROID
DVT STORAGE
If interactive sizing is not available, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer sizes

the item automatically using the simulator data.

Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped
from Simulator Items
Project components not mapped from simulator items can be sized if they are
connected to streams. See “Creating Streams to Connect to Components” on
page 218 for instructions on creating inlet and outlet streams. If the
X218
component is one of those for which interactive sizing is available (see list on
page 216), the Interactive Sizing form is displayed during sizing. See “Using
the Interactive Sizing Form” for instructions on connecting a component to
streams during sizing.
If sizing is not available for a component, the Size option as unavailable.
Resizing Project Components

If the process conditions associated with a component change, then use the
Re-Size command on the project component pop-up menu to update all
equipment sizing information.
The Re-Size command will clear all the previous sizing results and then size
the equipment based on the current process conditions (those that you have
entered and those available from the currently loaded simulator file).
Therefore, if the component being re-sized is one of those for which
interactive sizing is available, the Interactive Sizing form that appears is
blank.
If you would like to keep some of your component specifications (i.e., not
have them replaced by those calculated by the Sizing Expert), do not use the
Re-size command. Instead, use the Size command or the Size button to
access the Interactive Sizing form with current specifications retained, rather
than cleared. Then, clear all fields except those you want to retain and click
OK to execute sizing. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer will re-calculate only
the blank fields.

Creating Streams to Connect to
Equipment Items
For most components, the interactive Sizing Expert requires selection of an
inlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid to the equipment item) and an
outlet stream (that is, a stream carrying fluid from the equipment item).
The set of instructions below show how to create streams to connect to an
item. In the example, inlet and outlet streams are created to carry 49 DEF F
water to a heat exchanger and an outlet stream is created to carry 200 DEG F
water from the heat exchanger. In the example used in the set of instructions
following these, a heat exchanger is sized to heat water from 40 DEG F to 200
DEG F, using the streams created in the first examples.
To create an inlet stream and an outlet stream:

1 In Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, right-click Streams; then click
Edit.
2 On the Develop Streams dialog box, click the Create tab.

3 In the Streams tree structure, click User. Leave the Basis as Absolute,
since you are creating a completely new process stream.
4 Click Create.
T
5 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as

Process-IN.
6 Click OK.
7 On the Develop Stream specifications form, specify:
o a primary fluid component
o temperature
o pressure
o liquid mass flow
Example:
 In the Primary Fluid Component field, click and click Water.
 In the Temperature (DEG F) field, enter 40.
 In the Pressure (PSIA) field, enter 90.
 In the Liquid Mass Flow (LB/H) field, enter 50,000.
8 Click Apply.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer fills in the rest of the fields in the Liquid
Information section.

9 Click OK to return to the Develop Streams dialog box, where you now
need to create an outlet stream.
10 In the tree structure, click User. Notice that the inlet stream that you just
created is now displayed under User.
11 Click that stream and, in the Basis group, click Relative. The new outlet
stream will be based upon the inlet stream.
12 On the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as
Process-OUT.

13 Click OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears. Specifications that appear
gray are the same as those of the base stream. Any modifications made will
appear black.
14 Enter an outlet stream temperature that corresponds to temperature to

which the heat exchanger will be heating the fluid. In the example above,
the temperature has been entered as 200 DEG F and the pressure has
been entered as 80 PSIA. The other specifications are the same as the
base stream’s.
15 Click OK to apply the changes and return to the Develop Streams dialog
box, which you can now close.
Using the Interactive Sizing

Form
With the necessary streams created, you are ready to perform sizing.

To size an equipment item:
1 Add an equipment item for which interactive sizing is available and display
the Component Specifications form. If you are following the example,
add a floating head shell and tube exchanger. (See page 186 for
X X
instructions on adding components.)
It is not necessary to enter any values on the specifications form before

starting the Sizing Expert. However, all applicable sizing parameters that are
entered in the component specifications form will be carried over
automatically to the sizing expert and used in calculations.
2 Click the Size button.
The Interactive Sizing form appears.
Note: In order for the Sizing Expert to run, you must select process fluid
streams (one at Inlet and one at Outlet conditions) for at least one side (hot
or cold side).

Any other data you provide (for example,, Duty, Overall heat transfer
coefficient, LMTD, and so on) helps the Expert do its job better, but is not
necessary.
3 Click on the Hot Inlet Stream field and then click to access a
drop-down list that includes all utility resources and user-created streams.
Note: “fluid” refers to liquid or gas.

4 If you are heating a fluid, as in the example, select a utility resource to
use as the heating source. The tables on the following page provide
definitions of the utility resources.
To heat a fluid from 40 DEG F to 200 DEG F, as in the example, the utility
Steam @100PSI-Aspen Process Economic Analyzer UTILITY is appropriate.

-or-
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be
cooled.
Utility Resources
If you specify a utility resource as a stream, the Sizing Expert will estimate
the actual utility rate required for the heat transfer and use this rate to create
utility streams as though they were user-specified. The utility stream names
are prefixed by “ICU” and are present under the Utility category in the
Develop Streams dialog box. These utility streams differ from utility resources
in that they have an actual flow rate whereas a resource is a “reservoir” that
can provide utility streams at any required flow rate.
Default Utility Resources Available for I-P Projects
Inlet Exit Operating

temperature temperature Pressure
Utility
(DEG F) (DEG F) (PSIA) type
Steam @100PSI 327 327 100 Heat

source
source
source
Low Temp Heating Oil 600 550 25 Heat
source
High Temp Heating Oil 725 675 25 Heat
source
Refrigerant – Freon 12 -21 -21 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethylene -150 -150 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethane -130 -130 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – -50 -50 15.5 Heat sink
Propylene
Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 15.5 Heat sink
Cooling Water 95 75 50 Heat sink
Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Utility
(DEG C) (DEG C) (KPA) type
Steam @2760KPA 229.2 229.2 2760 Heat

source
Steam @1135KPA 184 184 1135 Heat
source
Steam @690KPA 164 164 690 Heat
source
Low Temp Heating Oil 315 287 2523 Heat

Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Utility
(DEG C) (DEG C) (KPA) type
source
High Temp Heating Oil 385 357 2523 Heat
source
Refrigerant – Freon 12 -29.8 -29.8 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethylene -101 -101 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethane -90 -90 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – -45 -45 105 Heat sink
Propylene
Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 105 Heat sink
Cooling Water 35 24 105 Heat sink

5 Click on the Hot Outlet Stream field and then click to access the
drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.
6 If you are heating a fluid, select again the utility to use as the heating
source.
-or-
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the cooled fluid from
the exchanger.
7 Click on the Cold Inlet Stream field and then click to access the
8 If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to be
heated.
9 A If you are following the example, select the Process-IN stream that you
created in the previous set of instructions (see “Creating Streams,”
pages 218 through 221).
X X X X
B If you are cooling a fluid, select a heat sink utility to use as a cooling
medium.
Click on the Cold Outlet Stream field and then click to access the
If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the heated fluid from the
exchanger.
 If you are following the example, select the Process-OUT stream that
you created in the previous set of instructions (see “Creating Streams,”
pages 218 through 221).
X X X X
If you are cooling a fluid, select again the heat sink utility to use as the
cooling medium.
Click Apply. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer fills in the other fields on the
Interactive Sizing form.

Note: results are not transferred to the Component Specifications form until
you click OK and the sizing is successfully completed (i.e., without generating
error messages).
10 Click OK.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides a message informing you of the
overdesign factor.
11 Click OK to accept this message.

The values obtained from Interactive Sizing now appear on the Component
Specifications form.

12 Click OK to save.
You can now run an item evaluation and see the values generated by the
Sizing Expert in the item report.
Global Sizing Selection

You can define and/or select a sizing selection library to pre-define the sizing
selection for a project scenario. For each type of component, you can specify
custom models that will be applied in the sizing phase. These rules can also
be modified on a component by component basis when working on a specific
project scenario. For example, if you want to have all “DCP CENTRIF” based
equipment models within a project scenario sizied with a specific custom
model, you can edit or create a Sizing Selection library (see figure 1) to be
used. These libraries must be edited/created outside of a project.

Figure 1: Library tab in palette
To edit the library:

1 Double-click the library name (for example, my sizing).
The Sizing Selection dialog box appears.
2 To view or edit the sizing selection, click on the equipment model. All
equipment models default to “System Sizing” (see figure 2).
Figure 2: Sizing Selection dialog box
3 To add or remove a custom model to the sizing selection list, click New
Sizing; then click your choice on the list of available custom models (see
Figure 3).

Figure 3: Add new sizing with custom model
The current sizing list for the equipment model is order dependent (see figure
4).
Figure 4: Current Sizing List with System sizing and two custom models
Once this library has been specified, it must be selected in the project (see
figure 5).
Figure 5: Selecting the Sizing Selection library for a project scenario
Sizing Areas
The Area sizing feature in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer develops length
and width of an area from the equipment in the area. When actual area
dimensions are not available, you can get a better estimate of area length
and width from the system when these parameters are not specified in the
area specs form.

The system calculated area length and width is used in the design of all area
bulks. You can use the system calculated area parameters as the area specs.
To have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer calculate the area:

1 Open the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project.
2 Modify an area spec by right-clicking the area; then, on the menu that
appears, clicking Modify.
3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Clear the values for Area length and Area width.
5 Click OK; then click Close.
6 Evaluate the project.
In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:
 AREA BULK REPORT
 AREA DATA SHEET
To specify the area yourself:

3 Click Specification | Area Specs; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Enter values for Area length and Area width.
5 Click Area Piping; then enter data for the piping envelope.
6 Click Area Electrical; then enter data for Distance equipment to
panel/DB.
7 Click OK; then click Close.
In the report, the system-calculated length and width for each area appear in:
 AREA DATA SHEET
To Develop Area Utility Piping and Pipe Racks – system calculated

area length and width:
3 Click Specification | Area Piping; then, on the menu that appears, click
Modify.
4 Clear the data in the Utility length parameter (0) and Utility stations
(-) fields.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Area Steel; then, on the menu that appears, click Modify.
7 Clear the data in the Pipe rack length (0) field; then click OK.
8 Close the Area Specification menu.

Some areas generate utility headers, utility stations. and pipe rack bulks. This
information appears in:
Sizing Requirements,
Calculations, and Defaults
Certain types of components have minimum input requirements for sizing.
Those requirements are provided in the following sections, along with
explanations of how the sizing is calculated for different component types.
Air Coolers
Minimum Input Requirements

 Inlet Stream
 Exit Stream
Sizing Procedure
The air cooler thermal and detailed mechanical design equations are given
below:
For thermal design:

Q = U*A*MTD
MTD = f*LMTD
For mechanical design:

A = pi*D_tube*N_tubeRows*N_tubesPerRow* Tube_length
where:
Q = Heat Duty
U = Heat transfer coefficient
A = Bare tube surface area
MTD = Mean Temperature difference
LMTD = Log mean temperature difference, based on
purely countercurrent flow
f = Temperature correction factor
N_bays = Number of bays
N_tube_rows = Number of tube rows
N_tubesPerRow = Number of tubes per row (takes into account the
presence of a fan shaft)

Tube_length = Length of tubes
The process fluid properties (temperature, pressure, and specific heat

capacity) are assumed to be constant throughout the air cooler and are
estimated as the mean of the inlet and outlet stream properties. The required
heat duty is calculated from the inlet and outlet process stream conditions if it
is not specified.
The process fluid stream temperatures, inlet and exit, are used along with the
temperatures specified for the air stream (Design Criteria specifications) to
calculate the LMTD. The temperature correction factor is then used to
calculate the MTD.
If the process fluid temperatures and air temperatures are appropriate,
meaning that there is no temperature crossover and the temperature
approach at the ends is reasonable, then the surface area required for the
given heat duty is estimated using the thermal design equation. The air flow
rate needed to realize this heat duty is then calculated using the specified
ambient and outlet air conditions.
An iterative algorithm has been developed to size the air cooler. The sizing
routine calculates the heat duty that can be realized using the specified tube
bundle geometry (bay width, number of tube rows, and tube length). It
assumes defaults for parameters that you have not specified. If the computed
heat duty is larger than the heat duty actually required, the iterative
procedure terminates. The tube bundle arrangement used represents the
specification of the air cooler selected. If the calculated heat duty does not
meet the required heat duty then a bigger air cooler is chosen (i.e. parameter
values are increased) and the above procedure is repeated. The iterative
procedure terminates either when a tube bundle geometry that can meet the
heat duty requirements is found, or when even the largest available air cooler
does not meet the process requirements.
Air-side heat transfer coefficients are calculated using the relations that take
into account the tube bundle geometry.
The work of Young, Briggs, and Robinson, as summarized in [6] is being used
to evaluate the heat transfer and pressure drop of air across the tube bundle.
The pressure drop thus calculated is used in estimating the fan power
required. The number of fans required is calculated based on the aspect ratio
(tube length/bay width). For any aspect ratio of up to 1.5, only one fan is
selected.
Defaults
Tube pitch = 2.5 INCHES
Tube thickness = 0.125 INCHES
Bay width = 4 ft to 20 ft
Tube rows = 3 to 6
Maximum Tube = 3*Bay width
length
Inlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)

Outlet air temperature (from Design Criteria specifications)
Agitated Tanks

 Inlet stream
 Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The capacity of the agitated tank is determined by the following equation:
C = Q * (T_r / 60.0)
where:
C = Capacity , CF
Q = Liquid volumetric flowrate, CFH
T_r = Liquid residence time, MINUTES
The diameter of the agitated tank is determined using L/D and geometry:
C = (/4) * D^2 * L
where:
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
L = Fluid height, FEET
Vessel height is obtained by the following:

H = L + h_d
where:
H = Vessel height, FEET
h_d = Vapor disengagement height, FEET
Design parameters are based on the current Design Criteria specifications if

available:
Length/Diameter Ratio: = 3
Default
Vapor disengagement height: = 1 FEET
Default
Agitator type: Default = ANCHOR
Driver type: Default = STD
Impeller type: Default = T6FB

Operating pressure is obtained from the simulator report. If the report does
not have a value, then the pressure of the inlet stream having the maximum
value is chosen as the operating pressure.
The operating pressure is used to obtain the L/D ratio (if user specification is
absent).
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D = 3

If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D = 5
where:
P = Pressure, PSI
L = Fluid height, FEET
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
The project component must have at least one process stream connected to
the inlet and exit. Also, since the sizing procedure is based on the liquid
holding period, at least one of the streams should have liquid phase.
The design pressure and temperature are based on the operating pressure
and temperature as modified by your entries on the Design Criteria
Compressors

 Inlet and Exit stream information
 Driver Power (for Reciprocating Compressors)
Sizing Procedure
The capacity requirement for the compressor is calculated from the inlet
stream information. The inlet stream flow rate and density are used to
estimate the total volumetric flow rate through the compressor.
The compression ratio (exit to inlet pressure) is obtained from the operating
pressures of the inlet and exit stream.
The compressibility factor (inlet and exit) is based on user-specified
information, if available, or estimated by the sizing expert based on the
Primary Fluid Component.
The Icarus Evaluation Engine estimates the driver power if it is neither user-
specified nor provided in the simulator report. The engine currently uses a
mechanical efficiency of 100% to arrive at the brake horsepower. The brake
horsepower, thus calculated, is compared against a table of available
standard motor sizes. If the calculated brake horsepower is not found in the
table, then the motor with the next higher horsepower is selected.

If the driver horsepower is either user-specified or provided in the simulator
report, the engine uses this value. However for pricing the compressor, the
table of available standard motor sizes is referred. If the specified horsepower
is not found in the table, then the price of the motor with the next higher
horsepower is used.
In the case of simulator inputs, different simulators provide information that
may be slightly different. For instance, in the case of AspenPlus, the
compressor calculations take into account any mechanical efficiency specified
during the simulation run. So the “brake horsepower” reported in the case of
AspenPlus already takes into account the mechanical efficiency. However,
other simulators, such as SimSci (“Actual Work”); HYSIM and HYSYS (“Energy
Required”), and ChemCAD ( “Actual Power”); do not account for mechanical
efficiency. Keep this in mind and be aware of what has been accounted for in
the simulation side when using simulator information as inputs.
Defaults
Minimum inlet pressure for air compressors is 14.696 PSIA
Crushers
Minimum Input Requirement

 Inlet and Exit stream information
 Final product size.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing expert estimates the solid flow rate from the inlet stream
information. The crushing ratio (feed to product size) is set at 4.
Work index is the total energy in KWH/TONS, needed to reduce the feed to a
size so that 80% of the product will pass through a 100 micron screen. The
sizing expert in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer assumes a default value of
13.81 for the material work index.
The total driver power required for the crusher is calculated using material
work index and the value of the product size.
The following equation is used to estimate the driver power:
P = 1.46 (T_m) (W_i) ( 1/(d_p ^ 0.5) - 1/(d_r ^0.5))
where:
P = Driver power, HP
T_m = Crusher capacity, TPM
W_i = Material work index
d_p = Product size, FEET
d_r = Feed size, FEET

Defaults
 Material Work Index: 13.8 KWh/ton
 Size Reduction Ratio: 4
Crystallizers
Minimum Information Required

Inlet and Exit Stream information
Additional Information
Final Product size
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the crystallizer capacity based on the inlet and
exit stream information.
Default value of 0.83 MM is used as final product size if the user-specified
value is not available from the simulator report.
In addition, the following defaults values are used for the design parameters:
Growth = 0.36 MM/H
rate
The residence time in hours for a batch crystallizer is determined by the

following relation:
Residence time = d_p / (3 * R_g
where:
d_p = Product size, MM
R_g = Growth rate, MM/H
Based on the minimum and maximum values for the required fields in the
component specification form, the number of additional crystallizers are
estimated.
Dryers

Inlet and Exit stream information

Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the dryer capacity based on the total
evaporation rate for the drying process. For tray and drum dryers, an average
depth of 2.25 FEET is used to determine the total dryer requirements. For
vacuum and jacketed rotary vacuum dryers, the dryer capacity is determined
by obtaining value of the drying time and the average percentage utilization
of the dryer capacity.
The system defaults are as follows:
Drying = 0.75 HOUR
time
Average = 25
percentage
utilization
The number of additional items required for the given drying operation is
determined from the knowledge-based engine in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer, which analyzes minimum and maximum values for the required
fields in the specification form.
Dust Collectors

Sizing Procedure
The sizing program estimates the vapor volume flowing through the dust
collector using the exit stream information available from the simulator
report.
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear velocity of
150 FPS. The height to width ratio is fixed at 2.5.
Using the above defaults, the volumetric rate through the separator is
obtained using Zenz correlation represented by the following equation:
Q = 2.5 (D ^ 2) V / 16
where:
Q = Vapor volumetric rate, CFS
D = Cyclone separator diameter, FEET
V = Linear velocity, FPS
In case of baghouse dust collectors, the sizing program uses Nylon as the
default filter cloth material to determine the air to media ratio which then
determines the diameter of the separator.

Air to media ratio is the flow rate of air (at 70 DEG F) in CFM. The default
ratio results in a pressure drop of 0.5 INCHES of water when passed through
1 SF of clean fabric.
The sizing program uses a default air to media ratio of 10 CFM.
The minimum and maximum values of the required field(s) shown in the
component specification form are used to determine the number of identical
equipment items.
Filters

 Inlet stream
 Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total amount of filtration product rate based
on the exit stream information. Based on the type of filter selected, the
average dimension of the filter equipment is selected and the filter size is
then optimized for the given operation such that the dimensions selected for
the equipment are within the minimum and maximum values as specified by
the knowledge-based engine.
In case of batch filtration, a default batch time of 0.25 HOUR is used. In case
of plate and frame filters, default value of cake thickness of 0.3 FEET is used.
In the case of continuous operation, the cycle time default is 0.08 HOUR.
Based on the actual capacity requirement and the maximum and minimum
sizes provided by the knowledge-based engine, the number of identical items
is determined.
Heat Exchangers
The heat exchanger sizing program estimates the heat transfer area required
for the given operating conditions. The model also performs detail estimation
of the number of tubes, tube length, and other internal components of the
heat exchanger based on either user-defined specifications (from the process
simulator report or the Design Criteria specifications form) or system defaults.

Inlet and Exit Process Stream Information
Sizing Procedure
The process stream(s) are classified into various categories. The Primary Fluid
Component class that you specify for the process fluid(s) flowing through the
heat exchanger is used to estimate the following design parameters:

 Latent heats (vaporization and condensation)
 Fouling resistance
 Specific heat capacity of the fluid
 Liquid film resistance
 Overall heat transfer coefficient
Duty requirement for the heat exchanger is either directly obtained from the
simulator report or estimated based on the inlet and exit process stream
information for the process model. In case the fluid undergoes phase change,
a boiling point temperature, Tb, is estimated that would lie between the inlet
and exit stream temperature. The estimated Tb is then used in the calculation
of the sensible and latent heats based on the Primary Fluid Component. The
sensible heat of any solids present in the stream is also accounted for in the
duty calculation.
In estimating the design pressure on shell and tube heat exchangers, the
2/3rd Rule is applied if it has been selected on the Design Criteria
P
P
specifications form (see page 90). X X
If only the process fluid conditions are specified by the simulator model, the
heat exchanger sizing program determines the appropriate utility from the list
of utilities that you specify using the Utility Specifications accessed from
Project Basis view (see page 102). If multiple utilities are available for heat
X X
transfer, then the sizing expert uses the utility fluid with a temperature
approach closest to the process fluid. This minimizes the heat transfer losses.
However, a minimum of 1 degree Fahrenheit difference in the final
temperature of the process fluid and the utility fluid must exist for the utility
fluid to be selected for the process. If an appropriate utility fluid is not
available for the heat transfer process, the heat exchanger sizing program will
terminate without estimating the heat exchanger size requirements.
The mean temperature difference (MTD) is estimated based on the fluid
temperature for both the shell and the tube side. It also depends on the flow
configuration for shell and tube heat exchangers, which is specified by the
number of shell and tube passes. For reasons of compactness of equipment,
the paths of both fluids may require several reversals in direction. Mean
temperature differences in such cases can be obtained by applying a factor
(called the F-factor) to the terminal temperature difference. The logarithmic
mean temperature difference (based on purely counter current flow) is
multiplied by the F-factor to obtain the mean temperature difference.
If the temperatures are not properly entered then appropriate warning
messages are displayed. In such cases it recommended that you check the
inlet and outlet temperatures of the shell and tube side streams and verify
that they are realistic.
The overall heat transfer coefficient is either directly obtained from the
simulator report or evaluated based on the shell and tube fluid properties
(film resistance, fouling tendency present for the various processes in the
system database).
The heat exchanger sizing program determines the position of the fluids in
the shell and tube heat exchanger. The position depends on both the process
and utility fluid class.

If duty is provided by the simulator report, then you can override the value
only through interactive sizing.
The final heat transfer area is obtained by multiplying the heat transfer area,
calculated based on the duty required, with the Heat Exchanger Minimum
Overdesign Factor. If you do not specify an overdesign factor then the default
value is used from the Design Criteria specifications.
If the duty generates a surface area less than minimum required for practical
design, the item report will give the appropriate warning message.
FLOAT HEAD or U-TUBE heat exchangers have an even number of tube
passes. If you enter an odd number for the number of tube passes for any of
these heat exchanger types, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer generates
warning messages.
The shell and tube design pressure and temperature are based on the
maximum operating conditions of the fluid flowing through the shell and tube
respectively. The Design Criteria specifications form allows you to change
them according to individual project requirements.
Heat Exchanger Internals

The final heat transfer area is determined by the actual number of tubes
chosen for the equipment. The least surface area of the combination of
numbered tubes and shells is changed for final design.
A default tube length of 20 FEET is used for calculating the number of tubes.
System default values for tube diameter, tube thickness, tube pitch and baffle
distances are used if user specifications are not available.
General Information
The utility requirement is estimated only when the system determines the
utility fluid. If both shell and tube side fluid stream information is specified in
the simulator report, then the system assumes that both of the fluid streams
are process streams and that no utility fluid is expended.
Presently, the model defaults are used for determining the material of
construction.
For shell and tube heat exchangers, if the heat transfer surface area
calculated by the sizing program is greater than the largest heat exchanger
designed by the design and cost engine, then the heat exchanger is divided
into multiple shells with identical configurations. The capital cost estimation is
then calculated based on the complete heat exchanger.
Note: When mapping a rigorous heat exchanger model (HXRIG) from

SimSci, the number of shells in parallel is used to determine the number of
shells in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. For Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer, the maximum number of shells in series is 1.

Double Pipe Heat Exchanger
The sizing program in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer estimates the total
surface area required for the given duty. During the capital cost estimation,
detailed design for the heat exchanger is developed based on the values for
tube length and number of tubes per shell obtained from the simulator report
or from the user.
Fin Tube Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given
duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat
exchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tube
obtained either from the simulator report or from the user.
Spiral Plate Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the given
duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for the heat
exchanger is developed based on the tube length and number of fins per tube
obtained either from the simulator report or from the user.
Pumps

Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total capacity requirements for the selected
pump based on the total flow rate of the inlet fluid stream(s) obtained from
the simulator.
Flow Rate/Capacity
Pump flow rate is obtained from the simulator information. If the information
does not exist, then pump flow rate is calculated based on the stream flow
rates. The stream is assumed to be completely liquid phase and no check is
made for presence of vapor phase.
The pump flow rate obtained from the simulator information is multiplied by
the pump overdesign factor, also referred as the capacity over-design factor,
present in the Design Criteria specifications file.
Pump % Efficiency
Pump efficiency is directly obtained from the simulator. If the value is not
present in the simulator report, then the default value of 70% is used.

Pump Overdesign
You can modify the pump overdesign factor either on the Design Criteria
specifications form or the Interactive Sizing form. Modifying the overdesign
factor using the Design Criteria specifications form (page 90) will applies the
X X
new factor to all the pumps in the project. Modifying the overdesign factor for
a pump using the Interactive Sizing form (page 221) applies the factor only to
X X
that particular pump. This allows you to either specify the factor for all pumps
or specify the factor individually for each pump.
Driver Power
If you specify a driver power in the component specification form then this
value is used. If the user does not provide the value then it is calculated by
the cost engine. The Icarus Evaluation Engine calculates the hydraulic
horsepower based on the capacity, viscosity and head, and then uses the
pump efficiency to estimate the brake horsepower. The brake horsepower is
compared against a set of standard available motor sizes to estimate the
pump driver power.
If multiple inlet streams are present, the minimum value of pressure is used
for determining the operating pressure of the equipment.
Defaults (if they are not obtained from the

simulators):
 Operating pressure: 14.696 PSIA
 Operating temperature: 77 DEG F
Calculating Pump Head

The total head developed by the pump is composed of the difference between
the static, pressure, and velocity heads. Additionally, friction at the suction
and discharge sides would also contribute to some head loss. The pump head
is calculated using the following relation:
Head, = h_d – h_s
FEET
where:
H = total pump head, FEET
h_d = discharge head, FEET
h_s = suction head, FEET
Assumptions:
 No friction losses at the entrance and exit.
 No static head on suction and discharge sides.
 Velocity heads are not included in estimating the suction and discharge
heads.

Head in feet is estimated by the following relations:
Head, = (Pressure, PSIA) * (2.31)/(Fluid specific gravity)
FEET
The specific gravity of the fluid is based on inlet streams conditions. The
discharge pressure for the pump is based on the maximum value for the exit
stream(s). The suction pressure is based on the minimum value for the inlet
streams(s).
Screens

 Inlet stream information
 Screen opening size (or average product size)
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program determines the capacity of the screen based on the inlet
flow rate estimated from the stream information.
The screen opening size is used to determine the final product size.
The feed material for the vibrating screen is obtained from the Design Criteria
specifications. The following choices are available:
 Sand and Gravel
 Limestone/Crushed Stones
 Coal
 Cinders
 Coke
 Wood
The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is defined as the
amount of solid (in tons per hour) flowing through one square foot of screen
cloth based on material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth having 50%
or more open area; 85% screen efficiency.
Based on the material selected and the screen opening size, the screen unit
capacity is chosen. Further, the sizing program assumes that five layers of
particles are present on the screen. The surface area required for the
vibrating screen is obtained.
Based on the maximum and minimum values specified by the knowledge base
for the screen capacity, additional items required by the operations are
determined.

Towers

 Stage temperature, pressure, flowrates
 Number of stages
 Inlet stream
 Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The distillation column sizing module can be used to size the following Icarus
process equipment:
 DDT TRAYED
 DDT PACKED
 TW TRAYED
 TW PACKED
 DC HE TW
The following simulator models can be used to generate the necessary
process information required for successfully executing the application:
Simulator Models used
AspenPlus ABSBR, DISTWU, DISTL, RADFRAC

HYSIM/HYSYS COLUMN
Pro/II COLUMN, IO, SURE, CHEMDIST, SHORTCUT
Loading Column Model from Simulator

In Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, the rigorous column unit operations
loaded from the simulator report (i.e., COLUMN UNITS model in PRO/II) are
developed in great detail, including all pieces attached to the main column
unit.
Typically, the simulator model develops stage information for the main tower
and duties for an associated condenser and reboiler. These duties are used
along with the specified fluid conditions available from the stage information
tables to generate all of the input specifications required for the equipment.
Sidestrippers and pumparounds are separated from the main tower if
necessary during the loading process after all the relevant information is
collected for the models. Once the report is loaded, these units are treated as
separate simulator models which can be mapped and sized independently of
the main tower design.
Sidestrippers
Sidestrippers attached to tower models are separated from the main tower
model during the loading process. Sidestrippers load information from the
same tables in the report from which the main tower information is discerned.

For example, the typical information loaded for sidestrippers in Pro/II are:
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
COLUMN SUMMARY
—————— NET FLOW RATES —————— HEATER
TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG C KPA KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR
————— ————— ———————— —————— —————— ————— ——————— ———————
1/ 10 200.3 600.50 22. 20.0L 8.5V

2/ 11 202.2 601.53 7.8 5.0V 20.1L
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
TYPE STREAM PHASE

FROM TO LIQUID FLOW RATES HEAT RATES
TRAY TRAY FRAC KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR
————— —————— —————— ————— ——— —————— —————————— ———————————
FEED ABCDRW LIQUID 10 1.0000 23.00 1.3216
FEED ABCSTM VAPOR 11 .0000 5.55 .2785
PROD ABCSRVP VAPOR 10 8.46 .5325
PROD ABCPRD LIQUID 11 20.09 1.0678
Information is obtained for the sidestrippers in the same manner as for the
main tower unit (Refer to information for obtaining process data for main
tower unit).
Pumparounds
The inlet and outlet fluid conditions for pumparounds are obtained from the
stage information to which the unit is connected. Additionally, the duty
associated with each pumparound is loaded into the unit. This unit is then
separated during the loading process and is treated as an independent
simulator model which can be mapped and sized on its own.
For example, the information required by pumparound units in PRO/II are
obtained from the following part of the column report:
COLUMN SUMMARY
————— NET FLOW RATES ————— HEATER

TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG F PSIG LB-MOL/HR MM BTU/HR
———— ————— ———————— —————— ————— ————— ——————— —————————
.
.
.
40R 355.9 33.00 5618.9 4301.4L 94.6551
PUMPAROUNDS
TRAY TEMP, DEG F LIQUID FRACTION ——————————— RATES ———————————

FROM TO FROM TO FROM TO LB-MOL/HR M LB/HR STD BBL/HR
—— —— —————— ————— —————— ————— ————————— ———————— ——————————
40 40 355.9 416.1 1.0000 .4108 7273.09 995.238 3569.48
Mapping the Tower Model

Typically, column models in simulators do not include the ancillary equipment
attached to the main tower. For example, a tower unit may really consist of
the following equipment:
 Main tower
 Overhead condenser
 Condenser accumulator
 Overhead split

 Reflux pump
 Overhead pump
 Overhead product sub-cooler
 Reboiler
 Bottoms split
 Bottoms product pump
 Bottoms product heat exchanger
Both overhead and bottoms split are process stream splitters and therefore
do not represent any project component. In Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer, during mapping and sizing process, they are typically mapped as a
quoted cost item with zero cost.
In addition, the equipment design could involve splitting the units into more
than one actual piece for reasons of economy. For example, in many
applications, condensers are split into a precooler (which is typically an air
cooler but also can be any other type of heat exchanger) and a trim cooler
(typically a shell and tube heat exchanger).
Tower models (such as RADFRAC model in AspenPlus, COLUMN UNIT in
PRO/II and COLUMN in HYSIM/HYSYS) can be mapped into any of the
following ten Aspen Process Economic Analyzer configurations:
 Standard - Single or Standard - Total
o Tower
o Condenser
o Condenser accumulator
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler.
 Full - Single
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Overhead product heat exchanger
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Bottoms product pump
o Bottoms product heat exchanger
 Standard - Split or Standard – Split Total
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcooler

o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
 Full - Split
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcoooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
 Standard - Total w/Circ.
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
 Full - Single w/Circ.
o Tower
o Condenser
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
 Standard – Split Total w/Circ.
o Tower
o Precooler

o Trimcooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
 Full - Split w/Circ.
o Tower
o Precooler
o Trimcoooler
o Overhead split
o Reflux pump
o Overhead pump
o Bottoms split
o Reboiler
o Circulation pump
Refer to Tower Configurations in Chapter 4 for detailed flow diagrams.
These configurations should be regarded as the “maximum” model with all
potentialities satisfied The components actually developed depend upon the
process conditions. For example, if the main tower model does not have a
condenser and a reboiler, then only the tower model is mapped.
If the overhead product is cooler than the temperature of the fluid from the
condenser outlet, then an overhead exchanger is mapped.
A bottoms product exchanger is mapped only when the bottoms product
stream has a different temperature from the temperature of the bottom stage
of the tower.
In the case of split models, where the condenser duty is split into precooler
and trimcooler duties, the ratio of the duty split is obtained from the Design
Criteria specifications form. The overhead vapor stream flowing to the
precooler is assumed to be at dew point if the condensation temperature is
not provided.
Loading Tower Input Information

From the tower results in the report, the tables consisting of stage
temperatures, stage pressures, stage molar vapor flow rates and stage molar
liquid flow rates are loaded in the mapping process.
For example, in the case of AspenPlus, the following tables in the RADFRAC
block are loaded by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer in the mapping
process:

Table 1: Stage temperature and Stage Pressures are loaded (Column 1 and
2)
ENTHALPY
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY
F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08

2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.
4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.
5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 45802+08
Table 2: Stage molar liquid flowrates and Stage molar vapor flowrates
are loaded. (Column 1 and 2)
STAGE FLOW RATE FEED RATE PRODUCT RATE

LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR
LIQUID VAPOR LIQUID VAPOR MIXED LIQUID VAPOR
1 1239. 430.0 .57657-01 430.0000
2 0.2571E+05 1669. .24001+05
3 0.2586E+05 2140.
4 0.2595E+05 2286.
5 0.2602E+05 2380.
6 0.2606E+05 2444.
7 0.2610E+05 2493.
8 0.2614E+05 2532.
9 0.2617E+05 2568.
10 0.2357E+05 2604. .23571+05
Inlet and exit streams (and their stage numbers) are loaded in the mapping
step.
For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the following
portion of the report is loaded in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:
INLETS7 STAGE 2
OUTLETS - 8 STAGE 1
9 STAGE 10
When sizing information is present in the report, the mapping program loads
all the relevant information present in the sizing sections.
For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, the following
portion of the sizing report is loaded in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer for
every section:
Case : Tray tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2

ENDING STAGE NUMBER 29
TRAY SPECIFICATIONS
— — — — — — — — —
TRAY TYPE SIEVE
TRAY SPACING METER 0.60960
***** SIZING RESULTS @ STAGE WITH MAXIMUM DIAMETER *****

COLUMN DIAMETER METER 4.00228
Case : Packed tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2

ENDING STAGE NUMBER 9
PACKING SPECIFICATIONS
— — — — — — — — — — —
PACKING TYPE BERL-SADDLE
HETP FT 2.00000
PACKING HEIGHT FT 16.0000
Determining Tower Process Conditions

 Operating Temperature
The maximum temperature value for all the stages (given by column 1) is
used as the operating temperature for the tower.
 Operating Pressure
The maximum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is
used as the operating pressure for the tower.
 Minimum Operating Pressure
The minimum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2) is
used as the minimum operating pressure for the tower.
 Design Pressure
The maximum value from the stage pressure profile is used for calculating
the design pressure of the tower (that is, after applying the user-defined-
design value from the design criteria file). When stage pressures are not
available, the maximum value of pressure from all the inlet streams is
used.
 Design Temperature
The maximum value from the stage temperature profile is used for
calculating the design temperature of the tower (that is, after applying the
user-defined design value from the design criteria file). When stage
temperatures are not available, the maximum value of temperature from
all the inlet streams is used.
 Number of Stages
The number of theoretical stages is provided by the number of rows in
Table 1. The final number is determined by taking into account condenser
and reboiler (if they are provided). Also, the number of stages is affected
by the reboiler type depending on whether the reboiler simulated in the
report is kettle or thermosiphon.
For example, in the case of RADFRAC model for AspenPlus, consider the
following table:
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY
F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08

2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.
4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.

5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 .45802+08
If the reboiler is kettle, then the number of theoretical stages is eight.

If the reboiler is thermosiphon (reboiler type is obtained from simulator),
then the number of theoretical stages is nine.
 Liquid Density
Density of liquid flowing inside the column is estimated from the density of
the inlet streams and the exit streams. If liquid density cannot be obtained
from the streams, the density of water is used as default.
 Vapor Density
Density of vapor flowing inside the column is estimated from the density
of the inlet streams and the exit streams. If vapor density cannot be
obtained from the streams, the vapor density is estimated based on gas
law. The vapor density is estimated at the minimum operating pressure
and operating temperature.
 Average Molecular Weight of Vapor Inside Tower
Average vapor molecular weight is estimated from the inlet and exit
streams. The lowest molecular weight of the streams is assigned as the
vapor molecular weight.
 Average Molecular Weight of Liquid Inside Tower
Average liquid molecular weight is the maximum molecular weight for the
inlet and exit streams.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing procedure varies depending on the type of internals desired and
the simulator model used for the operation. The procedure described below
gives a description of the actual steps used by the sizing module to estimate
the sizes for the different types of trayed and packed towers.
Trayed Tower Sizing

General Procedure (Followed for all tray internals):
1 The type (class) of the fluid in the column is used to estimate some of the
properties in designing the tray internals, such as surface tension,
foaming tendency, deration factor if they are not specified in the
simulation output report or on the Design Criteria specifications form.
You can specify the overall column tray efficiency in the Tray Efficiency box
on the Design Criteria specifications form. If the value is not provided,
then it is estimated using Lockett’s modification of the O’Connell
Correlation. This correlation is based on tests on actual plant columns and
has been the standard of the industry.

The tray efficiency is used to calculate the actual number of stages required
for the separation.
EOC = 0.492 ( L ) -0.245
where:
EOC = efficiency, O’Connell Correlation
L = viscosity of liquid, CPOISE
 = relative volatility of key component
A default value of 1.5 is used for the relative volatility of key components that
you can modify on the Design Criteria specifications form. The liquid viscosity
is either directly obtained from the report or estimated from the fluid
classification.
 Once the internal height of the column is estimated (based on the actual
number of trays), additional height for vapor disengagement and liquid
return is based on your Design Criteria specifications.
 In general, the number of stages provided by the simulator report
represent the theoretical number of stages. However, if detailed design of
the tower has been done by the simulator using tray efficiency, then the
number of trays are actual trays. If Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
finds that the number of trays are actual, then it uses the value to
estimate the height and does not add any additional tray efficiency.
Using Tower Sizing Information

When a simulator report provides sizing information, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer tries to use as much of the information as possible in the final
design. When multiple sections are present in the report, the information
used by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer depends on the equipment to
which the model is mapped.
Single Diameter Trayed Tower (TW TRAYED)

If multiple sections are present with different diameters and tray spacings,
then the largest values of the diameters and tray spacings are used for the
actual design of the tower.
Double Diameter Trayed Tower (DTT TRAYED)

For double diameter trayed tower, the two largest diameters in the sectional
report are used in the design. Once the tower is divided into two sections
(based on diameter), the value of the tray spacing for each section is based
on the stage numbers present in each section. The largest values of tray
spacing for each section are used to estimate the tower height.
For example, for AspenPlus, assume the following sizing information is
obtained from the report after completing the loading process.
Section 1:
Diameter = 5 FEET
Tray Spacing = 24 INCHES
Stages = 2 to 4

Section 2:
Diameter = 6 FEET
Stages = 5 to 7
Section 3:
Diameter = 8 FEET
Stages = 8 to 10
The sizing program will design a double diameter tower with the following
dimensions:
Top Section = 6 FEET
Diameter
Top Section Tray = 30 INCHES
Spacing
Top Section Stages = 2 to 7
Bottom Section = 8 FEET
Diameter
Bottom Section = 18 INCHES
Tray Spacing
Bottom Section = 8 to 10
Stages
The program estimates the cross sectional area for each stage. Then, the
maximum value is used to design the single diameter tower. In case of double
diameter tower, the program estimates the diameter for the bottom section
and the top section based on the cross sectional area estimated for each
stage.
Sieve Tray Design

The capacity factor, CSB, is evaluated based on the correlation developed for
entrainment flooding by Kister and Haas. Jeronimo et. al correlation is used to
estimate the clear liquid height in the spray regime. Strictly, the Jeronimo and
Swistowski correlation predicts the clear liquid height at the transition from
the froth to the spray regime. However, empirical evidence has shown that
clear liquid height in the spray regime is much the same as clear liquid height
at that transition.
The CSB estimated at the flooding point is used to evaluate the flooding vapor
velocity.
The bubbling area is calculated based on flood velocity, the derating factor
and the safety factor. (Column default design is 90% of flood.)
Downcomer liquid velocity is based on the foaming tendency of the fluid and
tray spacing. Foaming tendency can be specified on the Design Criteria

The downcomer cross-sectional area is based on the downcomer velocity and
the maximum liquid flow inside the tower.
The total tower cross-sectional area is calculated by adding the bubbling area
and the downcomer area.
The diameter of the tower is obtained from the cross-sectional area by
rounding the area up to the next half foot. The minimum diameter for the
tower is 1.5 FEET.
Valve Tray Design

Valve tray sizing is based on the V-type Ballast trays produced by Glitsch. The
system factors are estimated based on the fluid classification performed on
the fluid flowing through the column. The tray diameter is evaluated for either
single pass trays or two pass trays. It is based on 24 INCHES tray spacing
and 80% of flood.
Bibliography
“Distillation Design”, by Henry Z. Kister.
“Applied Process Design For Chemical And Petrochemical Plant”, Volumes 1
and 3, by Ernest E. Ludvig.
“Standard Handbook of Engineering Calculations”, by Tyler G. Hicks
“Chemical Engineers HandBook”, by Perry and Chilton, 6th Edition.
Bubble-Cap Tray Design

The allowable vapor velocity and the corresponding diameter for bubble-cap
trays have been represented by the Jersey Critical formula which
corresponds to the work by Souder and Brown for column flooding.
D  0.0956 Wv / K  L  v  12
where:
D = Diameter, FEET
Wv B B = vapor flow rate, LB/H
L
B B = liquid density, LB/CF
v
B B = vapor density, LB/CF
The factor K depends on the tray spacing as follows:

Tray Spacing, INCHES 18 24 30 30+
K 3.4 4.2 4.7 5.0
Packed Tower Design

Packed tower design is accomplished for both random and structured
packings. The various types of packings supported by the system are
described in the Icarus Reference.

Kister and Gill flood point correlation is used to estimate pressure drop at the
flood point as a function of packing factor alone.
FL = .155 (Fp0.7)
where:
FL = Pressure drop at flood point
Fp Packing factor
Note: You can provide the value for the packing factor on the Design Criteria
specifications form. The system defaults are used for each of the different
types of packings if you do not enter a value.
Once this pressure drop is known, the flood velocity is calculated using the
latest version of GPDC (Generalized Pressure Drop Correlation) charts for
both random and structured packings.
HETP Prediction
You can provide the HETP value on the Design Criteria specifications form. If
the value is not specified, rules of thumb prediction reported in literature are
used to predict the packed tower efficiency.
For random packing columns, the following rules are used for estimating HETP
(FEET):
HETP = 1.5 dp
dp = Packing diameter, INCHES
HETP > DT for DT < 2 FEET
For estimating the structured packing efficiency, the following rule of thumb is
used:
HETP, = 1200 /ap + 4
INCHES
ap = Packing surface area per unit volume, SF/CF
System Defaults
The following system default values may be modified on the Design Criteria
specifications form and Component Specifications form:
Trayed Tower Defaults

Tray Type = Sieve
Tray Spacing = 24 inches
Flooding Factor = 80 %
Foaming Tendency = Moderate

Packed Tower Defaults
Packing Type = Random
Packing Material = 1.0PPR
Specific area per unit = 0.75 SF/CF
volume for the
packing
General Defaults
Top vapor = 4 FEET
disengagement
height
Bottom sump height = 6 FEET
SimSci’s SHORTCUT Column Operation

In case of SHORTCUT column operation, the simulator provides only the
minimum reflux ratio for the distillation process. To design the tower, the
ratio of the operating reflux ratio and minimum reflux ratio has to be
provided. The system uses the default value of 2.0 for the ratio. The ratio can
be changed on the Design Criteria specifications form. If the simulator
report does not contain information (number of trays) for the operating reflux
ratio, the tower sizing program returns to the system without performing
sizing for the tower.
Vessels
Horizontal Vessels
The following graphic shows a typical horizontal vessel.

The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria
specifications form:
 Residence Time
 Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
 Average Liquid Particle Diameter
 Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
 Separation Factor
 Vapor area /cross sectional area
 Separation Factor Multiplier
 Minimum Boot Length (used in Horizontal Vessel Design)
 Minimum Boot diameter
 Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
Design Requirements
The maximum number of exit streams is three; two of the streams can be
liquid.
Calculating Diameter
Vessel diameter is based on the maximum allowable vapor velocity inside the
separator, to reduce the liquid entrainment in the vapor.
The following two methods are available in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
(chosen from the Design Criteria specifications) to obtain vapor velocity.
 Liquid Entrainment Method
 Particle size separation method.
Calculating Vapor Velocity

Liquid Entrainment Method
The maximum allowable vapor velocity, to reduce liquid entrainment is
obtained as a function of liquid and vapor density and the Separation Factor,
which itself is a polynomial function of vapor and liquid density and vapor and
liquid flowrates. The polynomial equation was based on 5% of liquid entrained
in the vapor and is valid for the range (defined below) of 0.006 to 5.0. Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer allows you to override the computed value of
Separation Factor.
W = l_mfr/v_mfr * sqrt (v_rho/l_rho)
X = ln (SF)
k_v = EXP(A + BX + CX^2 + DX^3 + EX^4)
K = k_v * k_vm
v_m = K * sqrt ((l_rho - v_rho)/v_rho)

where:
l_mfr = Light Liquid Mass Flow rate
v_mfr = Vapor Mass Flow rate
l_rho = Light Liquid Density
v_rho = Vapor Density
K = System Factor
SF = Separation Factor
k_v = Polynomial Function of SF
k_vm = Separation Factor Multiplier
A = -1.877478097
B = -0.8145804597
C = -0.1870744085
D = -0.0145228667
E = -0.0010148518
The above relation for Separation Factor is valid for a “W”(SF) between 0.006
and 5.0. If “W” falls outside the range, the sizing program gives a warning
message and the limiting value of W is used to estimate Separation Factor.
For example, if calculated value of W is 0.001, then the value used in the
correlation is 0.006. If the calculated value of W is 10.0, then the value used
in the correlation is 6.0.
Particle Size Separation Method

This method estimates the disengagement velocity of liquid bubble in the
vapor space. The maximum allowable vapor velocity is determined as a
percentage of the disengagement velocity.
Liquid drops falling in gases appear to be spherical up to a Reynolds number
of 100. Large drops (greater than 0.3125 INCHES) will deform, with a
resulting increase in drag, and in some cases shatter.
For estimating vapor velocity, the liquid bubbles are assumed to remain in
spherical shape.
The terminal settling velocity can be obtained for different flow conditions.
For laminar flow (K < 3):
v = g * (rho_l - rho_v) *(dp^ 2)/ (18.0 * mu_v)
and for turbulent region:

v = 1.74 (g * dp * (rho_l - rho_v) / rho_v)^0.5
where:
K = dp * (g * rho_v * (rho_l - rho_v)/ (mu_v^2) )^0.33
v = disengagement velocity
g = gravitational constan
rho_l = liquid density
rho_v = vapor density

dp = liquid bubble diameter
mu_v = gas viscosity (assumed to be 0.05 LB/FT/H)
The design velocity is then estimated by the following equation:

v_m = v*f
where:
v_m = disengagement velocity
f = design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
v = disengagement
Calculating vessel cross-sectional area

Vapor cross sectional area is estimated based on the vapor velocity and the
vapor volumetric flow. The vapor cross sectional area is divided by the ratio of
vapor area/cross sectional area to get the total required cross sectional area.
v_csa = v_vol/v_m
t_csa = v_csa/r_vc
where:
v_csa = Vapor area
v_vol = Vapor volumetric flow
r_vc = Vapor area/cross sectional area
t_csa = Vessel cross sectional area
Estimate Vessel diameter based on vapor flow:

D_v = sqrt ((t_csa * 4) /)
where:
D_v = Vessel Diameter based on vapor flow
 = 3.14
Estimate vessel diameter based on liquid holdup volume and user-specified

value of L/D ratio.
The maximum value of diameter calculated using vapor velocity and liquid
holdup is used for final design.
Calculating Length
Vessel liquid holdup volume is obtained based on the light liquid flowrate and
the residence time. The vessel length is then calculated as given below:
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t

L = (l_vol * 4) / ( * D^2 * (1 - r_vc))
where:
l_vol = Liquid holdup volume
L = Length
l_vfr = Light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = Residence time
r_vc = r_vc
Checking L/D Ratio

For all liquid vessels L/D is calculated as follows:
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D= 3
If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P> 500 PSIA, then L/D= 5
After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of
L/D is compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on
the Design Criteria specifications form.
Estimating Boot Dimensions

Boot dimensions will be estimated only if the exit streams contain a heavier
liquid phase. Boot diameter is based on the heavier liquid phase volume and
boot liquid velocity.
Boot volume (bt_vol) = hl_vfr * r_t
Boot cross section area = bt_vol / hl_vel
(bt_csa)
Boot diameter (d) = sqrt (4.0 * bt_csa /)
Boot length (l) = (bt_vol * 4)/( * d^2)
where:
hl_vfr = heavy liquid volumetric flow rate
hl_vel = heavy liquid velocity
l = boot length
d = boot diameter
Vertical Vessels
The following graphic shows a typical vertical vessel.

The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria
specifications form:
 Residence Time
 Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
 Average liquid particle diameter
 Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
 Separation Factor
 Minimum Disengagement Height
 Minimum height above the mist eliminator
 Height of Mist Eliminator
Vessel diameter is calculated in the same manner as for horizontal vessels.
The default value of Separation Factor Multiplier is available in the Design
Criteria specifications.

Calculating Vessel Height
Vessel liquid holdup volume is based on the light liquid flowrate and the
residence time. The liquid height in the vessel is then calculated and the
additional height is added to obtain the overall vessel height.
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t
l_ht = (l_vol * 4) / ( * D^2)
h = LLLTap_ht + l_ht+ HLLTap_ht + d_ht + me_ht + mea_ht
where:
l_vol = liquid holdup volume
l_vfr = light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = residence time
l_ht = liquid height based on residence time
LLLTap_ht = minimum height between low liquid level tap and
tangent line (design criteria)
ddHLLTap_ht = height between inlet nozzle and high liquid level
tap (desig criteria)
d_ht = disengagement height
me_ht = mist eliminator height
mea_ht = Height above the mist eliminator
If the calculated l_ht is less than the minimum height between the taps,
specified in the design criteria, then the minimum height is used.
Checking L/D ratio

For all liquid
After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the ratio of
L/D is compared with the Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio specified on
the Design Criteria specifications form.

7 Piping and Instrumentation
Models
Interconnecting Volumetric
P&ID Lines
Connect pipelines between components in an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
project, estimate the project, and create piping line list report for connected
lines with the same line tag.
Open an Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

project
Open a new or existing Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project and add
equipment components to the new project.
Run Interconnect Piping Lines

To run interconnect piping lines:
1 On the main tool bar, click Run.
2 Click Interconnect Piping Lines to launch the GUI as shown below:
7 Piping and Instrumentation Models 265

The GUI displays five lists. All equipment and its associated pipelines in the
project are displayed in two groups:
 Connect From
 Connect To
The first two lists display equipment and piping lines in the Connect From
group.
The third list displays all connected lines.
The fourth and fifth lists display piping lines and equipment in the Connect
To group.
3 On the list in the Connect From and Connect To groups, click the
desired equipment item.

The line lists will then display only the lines corresponding to the selected
equipments. When the mouse hovers over an equipment or a line, the tooltip
in the list provides additional information related to this item. The related
additional information is also displayed in the bottom text area when clicking
on an equipment or a line.
Connecting Piping Lines

To connect two lines:
1 Select the Auto Generate Line Tag check box, or, in the Line Tag field,
type a unique line tag.
2 In the Connect From line list, click a piping line.
3 In the Connect To line list, click the desired line.
4 Click Connect.
5 Repeat Steps 1-4 above to connect all the desired lines between the
equipment items.
Note: Use Filter to display all disconnected equipment or all disconnected

lines.

Disconnecting Piping Lines
To disconnect all existing pipeline connections between all
equipments:
 Click Disconnect All.
All connected lines will be removed from middle list and will be displayed in
the respective line list.
To disconnect a specific line between the two equipments:

 In the middle list, click a line item; then click Disconnect.
Renaming a Line Tag

To rename a line tag:
1 On the Connecting list, click the desired item.
2 In Line Tag field, edit the line tag.
3 Click Rename Line Tag.

Saving All Connections and (optionally)
Updating the Project
To save all the connections and update the project:
 Click the Update Project.
To save all the connections without updating the project:

 Click the Save Mapping & Exit.
All connections on the GUI are saved, but the project is not updated.
Getting the Connected Line List Report

To get the connected line list report:
1 Evaluate the above project.
2 Click View | Capital Cost View.
The Select Report Type to View dialog box appears.
3 On the Select Report Type to View dialog box, click Interactive
Reports; then click OK
The reporter is active.
4 Click Excel reports.
5 Click Other reports | Discipline | Pipe:
o Connected Line List
-or-

o Model Line List
as shown below:
6 Click Run Report.

The report is shown below:
Connected Line List
Model Line List

Mapping Streams to Piping
Lines
Note: For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator with Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer Overlay project, see the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer user
guide (AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV7_0-Usr.pdf).
In an existing or new Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (or Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer Overlay) project, you
can assign stream physical properties to lines in order to size the line
diameter.
To Map Streams to Lines:

1 Open an existing Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator (with Aspen Process Economic Analyzer overlay) project, or
create a new project.
2 On the main menu, click Run | Map Stream to Lines to launch the GUI.
The GUI displays four lists. All the streams are displayed in the STREAM list
box. All equipments and their associated pipelines in the project are displayed
in the last two list boxes. The middle list displays all mapped streams and
lines.

3 On the Equipment list, click an equipment item.
The line list will then display only the lines corresponding to the selected
equipment. When the mouse hovers over an equipment or a line or a stream,
the tooltip in the list provides additional information related to this item. The
related additional information is also displayed in the bottom text area when
clicking on an equipment item, a line, or a stream.
Mapping Streams to Piping Lines

To map a stream to a pipeline:
1 On the STREAM list, click a stream.
2 On the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator | Line list, click a piping line.
3 Click Map.
Mapped streams and lines are displayed in the middle list.

4 Repeat steps 1-3 above to map all the desired streams and lines.
Note: Use Filter to display all unmapped equipment and all unmapped lines
if needed.
Un-mapping Streams to Piping Lines

To Un-map all existing mapped streams and lines:
 Click Un-map all.
To Un-map a specific stream and line:

1 On the Mapping list, click a mapped item.
The Map button becomes Un-Map.
2 Click Un-Map.
The selected items are removed from the middle list and go back to their
respective lists.

Using the Auto-Map Option
You can set the Auto-Map option in two ways:
 On the Preference tab
 From the Mapping GUI
To use the Auto-Map Option using the Preference tab:

The Auto Map button will be unavailable in the mapping GUI if on the Tools
| Options | Preferences | Process tab the Auto Map Streams to Lines
check box is selected.
The Pre-auto-mapped streams-lines will be displayed in the middle list box of
the Map Stream to lines GUI.
To make the Auto Map button available:

 On the Tools | Options | Preferences | Process tab, clear the Auto
Map Streams to Lines check box.

To use the Auto-Map Option from the Mapping GUI:
 On the Map Stream to Lines dialog box, click Auto Map to automatically
map streams to lines.
To save all the stream mappings to lines and update the project:
 Click Update Project.
To save all the stream mappings to lines without updating the

project:
 Click Save Mapping & Exit.

8 Developing and Using Cost
Libraries
The Libraries view on the Palette arranges libraries in a tree-structure. Most

of the libraries listed access project specifications (explained in Chapter 3).
The Cost Libraries are unique, however, in that they comprise collections of
particular cost items that you can add as project components. The cost
libraries are customizable; you can add items to the libraries provided, as well
as add your own libraries.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer includes two types of cost libraries:
Equipment Model Library (EML) and Unit Cost Library (UCL). Each library type
may include one or more library files, which in turn may contain one or more
library items, each representing a particular type of cost item.
Equipment Model Library (EML)

The EML is intended to store custom equipment items, for which you create
component specification forms. In a project, you can add an item from the
EML as a component and fill out the form that you earlier created.
The library can store a generic equipment item that comes in discrete sizes,
such as an extruder, or an equipment item that follows a continuous
cost-capacity relationship such as linear, semi-log or log-log.
Unit Cost Library (UCL)

The UCL is intended to store and retrieve direct costs and installation
man-hours, which are based on a simple unit of measure (for example, the
cost of a material item or installation man-hours per unit of area, per unit of
length, per item, etc.). Costs can also be stored in a library for indirect items
such as project management man-hours per month, crane rental (plant hire)
on a daily, weekly, monthly basis, etc.
8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries 277

For one-of-a-kind cost items not worth storing in a library, the unit cost
library may be used to create a dummy item for recall and modification in a
project. The dummy item is stored in the library with as little data as possible.
This can be retrieved and modified in as much detail as required whenever
you need a one-time cost added into a project.
Developing and Using an

Equipment Model Library (EML)
Creating an EML
The instructions in this sub-section show you how to create an EML. The
instructions in the sub-sections that follow this one, which show you how to
add an item to an EML and then add the item to a project, use a single
example that can be added either to an Inch-Pound EML that you created or
to one of the two Inch-Pound EML’s provided.
To create an EML:
1 With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
2 Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure, and then expand Equipment
Model Library.
The libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.
3 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measure
basis, as in the example used in these instructions, right-click Inch-
Pound; then click New on the pop-up menu.
The New Equipment Model Library dialog box appears.

4 Enter a file name (required) for the EML and a brief description (optional),
then click OK.
An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new library.
Adding an Item to an EML

The instructions below for defining and using an EML item follow a single
example from item creation through the addition of the item to a project.
Using the example provided will define the item in such a way that it
automatically generates a foundation and/or electrical power supply bulks.
To add an item to an EML:
Note: If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, and
you can skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
1 Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.

2 Expand Cost Libraries, Equipment Libraries, and either Inch-Pound or
Metric. (If following the example provided, select Inch-Pound.)
3 Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and then click
Modify on the pop-up menu.
4 Click Add on the Library dialog box.
5 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.
The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies
the library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library
items. The first character must be a letter.
6 Click OK.
7 Enter the descriptive data for a the item in the Develop Equipment Model
Library form. If following the example, enter the data exactly as shown
below. Be sure to correctly enter the sizing parameters, CAPFLOW and
PWRDRVR; Aspen Process Economic Analyzer knows to use GPM (or L/S
for METRIC) and HP, respectively, for these parameters.

Sizing method: the data
is in the form of either a
continuous curve
(linear, log-log or
semi-log) or a set of
discrete tabular values.
When an equipment
model library item is
retrieved into a project,
the specified size for
the project component
is used to develop the
appropriate cost,
man-hours and weight
from the library data.
8 Click OK to save your specifications.

The new item appears on the Library dialog box, which you can now close.
Adding an EML Item to a Project Scenario

To add an EML item to a project scenario:
1 Open the project to which you want to add the EML item. For the purposes
of this example, you can use either an existing or newly created US/I-P
based project.

2 In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in which to add
the EML item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.
3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a project
component name for the item.
4 Click Equipment Model Library and click OK.

5 On the Select an Equipment Model Library File dialog box, click the
EML to which you added the item; then Click OK.
6 On the Select an Equipment Model Library Item dialog box, select the
item you added; then click OK.

7 Enter your specifications for the item at the Component Specifications
form, as shown below. Note that the Size parameters CAPFLOW and
PWRDRVR are included on the form.
8 Click OK to apply and save the specifications.

The item will now be included in project evaluations.
Note: If you want to use sizing parameters with the EML, you must use one
of the sizing parameter symbols listed below:
Symbol Description
AREA Heat Exchanger Area
AREAH Area Height
AREAL Area Length
AREAW Area Width
CAP Liquid Volume

CAPACITY Liquid Volume
CAPFLOW Liquid Flowrate
CAPREF Refrigeration Capacity
DENS Fluid Density
DENSITY Fluid Density
DIA Vessel Diameter
DIAMETER Vessel Diameter
DIA1 Bottom Diameter
DIA2 Top Diameter
DTMP Design Temperature
DTMP2 Alt Design Temperature
DUTY Heat Transfer
FLOW2 Alt Gas Flow
FLOWRATE Gas Flow
HEAD Fluid Head
HEIGHT Vessel T-T Height
HGT Vessel T-T Height
HGT1 Bottom Height
HGT2 Top Height
JPRES Jacket Pressure
LENGTH Equipment Length
LTH Equipment Length
MWGT Molecular Weight
NITEMS Multiple Items
POWER Power
PRES Pressure
PRES2 Alt Pressure
PRESSURE Pressure
PWRDRVR Power
RAT Flow
SPGR Specific Gravity
TMP Temperature
TMP2 Alt Temperature
VISCOS Viscosity
VOL Gas or Solid Volume
VOLUME Gas or Solid Volume
WIDTH Equipment Width
WTH Equipment Width

Developing and Using a Unit
Cost Library (UCL)
The instructions below use as an example a library of asbestos abatement
(ASBABT) costs and man-hours. This example has been selected because
environmental remediation data is difficult to model, since costs and
man-hours tend to vary greatly based on site conditions and project types.
Items of a unique and/or variable nature are ideal for storing in a UCL.
The instructions take this example through the following stages: library
creation, adding items to the library, adding a library item to a project as a
component, and forming an assembly in the project out of multiple UCL
items.
Creating a Unit Cost Library

To create a unit cost library:
1 With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
2 Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure, and then expand Unit Cost
Library.
The libraries are divided into Inch-Pound and Metric.
3 To create a library for use in projects with an Inch-Pound units of measure

basis, as in the ASBABT example used in these instructions, right-click on
Inch-Pound and click New on the pop-up menu.
4 In the New Unit Cost Library dialog box, enter a file name (required) for
the UCL and a brief description (optional).

5 Click OK to create the new UCL.
An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new UCL.
Adding an Item to a UCL

To add items to a UCL:
1 If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed, and you
may skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
a. Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
b. Expand Cost Libraries, Unit Cost Libraries, and either Inch-Pound or
Metric.
c. Right-click on the library to which you want to add an item, and then
click Modify on the pop-up menu.
2 Click Add on the Library dialog box.
3 Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.

The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies the
library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library items.
The first character must be a letter.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Develop Unit Cost Library form, enter information for the new item.
Note: Costs for the item will be allocated to the specified Code of Account
(COA). See ICARUS Reference, Chapter 34, for COA definitions.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer uses the Material Cost Per Unit and Labor
Cost Per Unit to cost the item in an estimate. If Labor Hours Per Unit is
specified and Labor Cost Per Unit is left blank, Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer will calculate the labor cost using the project wage rates at the time
of the estimate.
The Unit of Measure can be designated for “each” or by any appropriate unit
(i.e., “1000 SF” ). Be sure to sufficiently describe the item so that you know
what the unit costs include when the item is retrieved at some future date.
The quantity is entered when the library item is retrieved into a project.
The Date and Source are for your reference and are not transferred into an
estimate.
6 When done entering specifications for the item, click OK.
To add a set of items as in the ASBABT example, repeat the process (Steps
2-4) to add the following items in addition to the one shown in the previous
graphic.
Code of Mat’l Cost Per Labor Cost Unit of Date of
Reference No. Item Description Account Unit Per Unit Measure quotation

AAB200 Polyethylene 800 .021 .004 SF 04APR01
Sheeting
AAB201 Duct Tape ( 300’ roll ) 800 3.50 ROLL 04APR01
AAB202 Adhesive Spray (60’ / 800 6.00 CAN 04APR01

can)
AAB300 Decontami- 800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01
nation Shower
AAB301 Neg Air Pressure 800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01
System
AAB400 Lighting Fixture 800 .01 EACH 04APR01
Removal
After the above are added, the Library dialog box will appear as shown
below.
7 When done adding items to the UCL, click Close on the Library dialog box.
Adding a UCL Item to a Project

To add a single UCL item to a project:
1 Open the project to which you want to add the UCL item. To add an item
from the ASBABT library developed as an example in the previous
instructions, you can open either an existing or newly created US/I-P
based project.
the UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.
3 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify a project
component name for the item.

4 Select Unit Cost Library and click OK.
5 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCL to
which you added the item and click OK.
6 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the item you
added and click OK.

7 On the Component Specifications form, click the Option drop-down
button and click Unit Cost Items.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer retrieves the unit cost data you set up in
Libraries.
Creating an Assembly of UCL Items

This section shows how to add several items from the library to form an
assembly. In the example, the items from the ASBABT library are added to
form an Asbestos Abatement Area Preparation Assembly.
To create an assembly of UCL items in a project:

the UCL item, and then click Add Project Component on the pop-up menu.

2 On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, enter as the
project component name a description of the assembly.
3 Click Unit Cost Library and click OK.

4 At the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCL
containing the first item to add to the assembly and click OK.
5 At the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the first item
to add to the assembly and click OK.

6 On the Component Specifications form, click the Option drop-down
button and select Unit Cost Items.
7 Click Add.
8 On the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the UCL
containing the next item to add to the assembly and click OK.
9 On the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the next item
to add to the assembly and click OK.

10 Repeat the process of adding items until the form contains columns for all
the items in the assembly.
11 After entering quantities for the items click OK.

The assembly is listed as one project component on the Project Explorer
(Project view) and the List view.
You can now run an evaluation on the item (see page 470 for instructions).
An Item Report would summarize total costs and man-hours, as well as list
each assembly item’s costs and man-hours.

Working with Cost Libraries
Equipment model and unit cost libraries share the functions described in this
section.
Copying a Library Item

When adding a library item similar to one that already exists, it is easier to
copy the existing library item and modify the necessary specifications.
To copy a library item:

1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click Copy.
2 Enter a Reference ID for the new item.

The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely identifies
the library item being added. The ID is used to sort and search for library
items. The first character must be a letter.
3 Click OK. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer adds the new item with all the
same data as the original — only the Reference ID has changed.
Deleting a Library Item

When a library item is no longer useful, it can be removed from the library
file.
To delete a library item:

1 Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click Delete.
A dialog box appears to confirm the delete.

2 Click Yes to delete the selected library item.
-or-
Click No to retain the library item in the library file.
Escalating Library Costs

Library items contain costs which change over time due to inflation.
Escalating library costs bring the library costs up to date.
To escalate library costs:

1 Click Escalate on the Library dialog box.
The Escalate Costs dialog box appears.

2 Enter the escalation specifications.
In this field type

New Base Date: The date of escalation or the date
at which the prices are current.
Material Escalation: Amount by which to escalate
material costs.
Labor Escalation: Amount by which to escalate
labor costs. Since equipment
model libraries only include
setting man-hours, not labor
costs, this field only appears
when escalating unit cost
libraries.
3 Click OK to escalate all the library items in the library file.
Importing a Cost Library

You can import UCL files, which have the extension “.LIB”, and EML files,
which have the extension “.EML”, from elsewhere on your computer or
network.
To import a cost library:

1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the appropriate Units of
Measure basis (Inch-Pound or Metric), and then click Import on the
pop-up menu.

2 In the Select a File for Import window, locate the file and then click
Open.
The file is now included in the Palette and its items can be added as Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer project components.
Duplicating a Cost Library

To duplicate a cost library:
1 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the library you wish to
duplicate, and then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu.
2 Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new library.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Library dialog box for the new
Library, which contains the same items as the original. You can add, modify,
or delete the items without affecting the original.
Deleting a Cost Library

To delete a cost library:
 In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the library to be deleted,
and then click Delete on the pop-up menu.

9 Changing Plant Capacity
and Location
Two modules within Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Analyzer Scale-up

Module (ASM) and Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) let you evaluate
alternate plant capacities and locations.
Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) When you change plant capacity,
Analyzer re-sizes each project component to your desired plant capacity.
Unique expert system rules, based on engineering principles, provide the
basis for revising the size of every project component in the process facility
that is implicated in stream flows, as well as the size of other plant facility
components in the plant layout, including process and utility components
inside battery limits (ISBL) and outside battery limits (OSBL), associated
installation bulks, piping, cable runs, buildings, structures, pipe racks, and
site improvements. Quoted costs and installation hours, and in some
instances, numbers of identical items (for example, the number of trees along
a fenceline) are also subject to change on changing production capacity.
Changing Plant Capacity

Changing the production capacity affects not only every stream flow, but the
size, and in some cases, the number of project components. The Analyzer
Scale-up Module (ASM) automatically examines each element of a project,
applies a set of scale-up rules unique to that element and recreates the entire
plant description according to the new production capacity.
ASM contains rules for each of the hundreds of Aspen Icarus project
components. Rules are based on engineering principles for elements that are
directly linked to production capacity. For other elements that are footprint
oriented such as building and structures, rules based on heuristics are
applied.
When the scaled project is evaluated, design quantities that are developed for
the newly sized components are designed to meet the needs of a project.
Further, revisions to P&IDs and similar user adjustments contained in the
baseline project are also treated in the same way. The idea is to design a
scaled project as it is intended to be built. This methodology eliminates the
9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location 299

need for applying a factor to the baseline plant cost to scale it up or down.
Given a new capacity, ASM recreates the entire plant.
The ASM process is automatic and rapid. ASM revises sizes of components to
meet a revised capacity and the project evaluation engines do the difficult,
time-consuming evaluation work. Users find ASM performs its re-sizing
operation results to be similar to engineering design methods with the added
benefit of much reduced time and resources. Further, equal confidence can be
applied to evaluation results before and after using ASM as rules are
discipline-based and the before and after evaluation processes are identical.
To change plant capacity:

1 Open your baseline project and save it under a new scenario name that
reflects the new capacity. This will ensure that your baseline project
remains intact, separate and apart from your about-to-be scaled project.
2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the “A” button on the
toolbar.
The Decision Analyzer dialog box appears.
3 Select the Change Plant Capacity by (5-600%) check box.

4 Enter the desired percentage adjustment or select it using the Up/Down
arrow buttons. For example, if you need to revise the capacity by a value
beyond 600% to 700%, scale your project twice. For this, the Evaluate
Project check box should be cleared. Then you can split the desired

700% into two parts: first use 350%, and on completion, scale it again at
200%.
5 Click OK to initiate the Analyzer Scale-up Module.
6 Upon completion, save the scaled project.
Analyzer Scale-Up Module

(ASM)
How ASM Works
Scale-up of a project to a new production capacity is a two-step process.
1. The Aspen Scale-up Module is invoked. The ASM processor
(a) analyzes each specification in your project
(b) applies the appropriate scale-up rule
(c) revises the specification to a new value
(d) moves on to the next specification
You can follow the progress of this phase by noting the item names in the
display at the bottom of your screen.
2. The project is evaluated. This phase performs the designs, develops quantities,
hours, costs, etc., and prepares the basic set of reports for your project at the
new capacity. On completion of this step, you can proceed to prepare special
reports and perform other analyses on your newly scaled project.
Save the project after the scale-up operation.
Scale-Up Rule Set

Analyzer contains rules for hundreds of components and cost elements that
are based on:
 engineering design principles for scale-up of all process equipment,
stream flows, quoted costs and hours, and so on.
 heuristics for plant items that are based on footprint and plot plan
The current rule set in some instances modifies the number of items rather
than change sizes, as in the simple example of trees along a fence line, where
the number of trees would be revised rather than the size of each tree. In the
current rule set, there is no automatic provision for changing the number of
project components.
Limiting Conditions
It is possible that on extreme capacity scale-ups, sizes of certain equipment
or bulk items may surpass a system limiting value. In this case, an error
condition would be issued. The user would then examine the scaled model for

the particular item(s) and revise the size and number of out-of-range items
accordingly, as an item in an error condition would be excluded from the
estimate.
Warning messages are generated after project scaling (via ASM) is performed
notifying users if scaling rules could not be applied to certain equipment
components due to min/max limits on equipment specs being reached. In the
event scaled values fall outside either min. or max. equipment spec limits, the
pre-scaled value is retained. Once an error condition is met, you have the
option to either stop the scaling operation or continue. If stop is clicked then
further operations based on your selection in the Decision Analyzer dialog (for
example, evaluation) will not be run. These error messages are similar to
scan errors dialog and will provide you with a listing of components in which
the ASM rules cannot be applied (see example below).
Scale-up Candidates
ASM rules apply to the following types of project information:
1 Area specs: distances, dimensions, cost per unit weight
2 Project Component specs: specific rules based on item type and
specification, typically size dimension, capacity, power and occasionally
number of items
Note: Several sanitary process equipment items associated with batch food
processing are not scaled.
3 Installation specs: quoted costs, hours and numeric dimension specs for
piping, duct, civil, steel, electrical, insulation, paint. Text-based sizes such
as pipe schedule, wire size, etc. are symbolic and are not scaled.
4 Project Component Quoted Cost and Hours: While ASM has rules for
quoted cost and hours, the ASM rule may not be the best for your type of
item. Here, it’s better to apply a % Adjustment to the system’s estimated
cost in an amount that will bring the estimated cost up to your quoted
value. Then, on scaling, the new reported cost will be calculated by
applying your % Adjustment to the estimated cost. Based on the scaled
sizes.
o Quoted hours: based on item type
o Quoted weight: based on item type

o Stream flow rate: scaled to the new capacity
Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis

Often, sections of a proposed facility may be required to consist of parallel
trains, joining up to meet downstream units. Situations such as these are best
handled by creating models of these sections at a standard capacity and then
scaling desired sections to say 50% capacity. You would then import the
various sections into an overall model, with multiple trains being imported as
many times as required. The resulting model would then be evaluated for
capital investment and process economics.
Analyzer Relocation Module

(ARM)
The Analyzer Relocation Module lets you evaluate the impact of worldwide
location on capital cost and a variety of other econometrics. Specifically, you
can “relocate” a project from one base location to any one of 89 worldwide
locations. You can choose to retain the location of your engineering workforce
or choose any one of 89 worldwide locations.
When you need to evaluate a project that you might engineer and/or
construct in a different city or country location, ARM will quickly and
automatically revise your project parameters with those contained in its
location knowledge base. The ARM knowledge base includes key location-
dependent data and rules to convert your project from its starting base
location to your selected location using location dependent values for design
parameters, engineering and construction work forces, cost of materials, and
engineering, material and construction indirects. You can use ARM in
combination with the Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM) and Analyzer
Economics Module (AEM) all in the same run or separately from the other
modules.
Relocation Terminology
 Baseline project: initial case, before executing ARM.
 Relocated project: after ARM processing of the baseline project.
 Relocation: a process of evaluating an initially formulated project
(baseline project) to a new location (relocated project).
 Locations: a general location, characterized by a city and country name,
which is used to represent a particular EPC function. The function may or
may not be physically sited in that city.
 Engineering location: city and country name used to characterize the
engineering workforce assigned to the project.
 Plant location: city and country name used to characterize the plant site.

Workflow
The figure below shows the general work process. ARM specs, contained in
the ARM rule set are applied to the user’s model. A description of the
elements in the table is provided in the section following the Workflow.

How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module (ARM) Works
Baseline Reports
U
Relocation Reports
U
For Base For New

Engineering and Engineering and
Plant Location Plant Location
Reports
Analyzer
Project
Baseline Relocation Relocated
Project Module Project
(ARM)
ARM Specs
Project
Specs
Construction Construction Material Engineering Engineering

Hours Rates Quantities Hours Rates
Construction Materials Engineering

Indirects Indirects Indirects
Construction Materials Engineering

Contingency Contingency Contingency
Construction Engineering
Fee Cost
Construction Material
Cost Cost
Project
Contingency

1 Since ARM processing is automatic, it is wise to first save your base
project under a new scenario name in advance of running ARM. Use a
scenario name that refers to the planned new capacity. This will ensure
that your baseline project remains intact for further evaluations.
2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the “A” button on the
button bar:
Figure 1. Button Bar
This will
display the Decision Analyzer dialog box, Figure 2.
Note: ARM shares space with ASM and AEM and Evaluate Project on the
four-part Decision Analyzer dialog box.
3 Select the check box Change Plant Location to.
4 Click the Plant Location from its pull-down list.
5 Click the Engineering Location from its pull-down list.
6 Use the remaining check boxes to select options to:
o Enable escalation for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
projects.
o Retain your defined construction start date and duration. If
unchecked, a new date will be developed on relocation.
Note: The last line on the Decision Analyzer dialog box displays three pieces
of information:
 plant location
 currency name
 currency symbol, in parentheses
This information is a reminder to users of the Analyzer Economics Module
(AEM) who are interested in reporting costs in currency different from the
plant location currency. For this, two entry slots are provided for an exchange
rate and symbol. If AEM is not invoked, values so entered will not affect the
reporting aspects of relocation aspects. In Figure 2, the user elected to run
AEM. This would take place immediately after ARM completed the relocation
process, described as follows.
Figure 2. Decision Analyzer Dialog Box – Illustration for a plant to be
engineered in Rotterdam and constructed in Singapore. The currency of the
plant location is displayed in the last wire-frame.

Figure 2. Decision Analyzer Dialog Box
Relocating the Project

7 Having completed the choices, click OK to run the project. If you click
Cancel, all choices will be ignored and control will return to the explorer
view.
With your OK, Decision Analyzer’s relocation module will automatically
convert your base location project to the selected engineering and plant
location. Your project will then contain the results of the relocation, which you
can review and modify. To do this, select the Project Basis view and click on
the desired basis category. Open the associated form, review the data and
modify, as you desire. When pleased with the results, SAVE the project,
making sure that it is saved under a scenario name that describes the
relocation and most important, that your baseline project is not disturbed by
the SAVE. You can then evaluate the project and review the results. A final
SAVE will save the results.

ARM Knowledge Base
The ARM knowledge base consists of approximately ten thousand location-
specific data values plus rules that govern the way the location data will be
applied to your baseline project. The ARM knowledge base is derived from a
variety of qualified sources including:
 Aspen Richardson international construction data: raw data from this
source (also used to prepare the Aspen Richardson International Cost
Factor Manual) were analyzed and mapped into Icarus technology formats
for use in ARM
 Proprietary sources
 Practicing professionals, EPC and owner customers and associates
 Surveys
 Technical publications that specialize in international construction costs
 Government sources: seismic, climate data and other location data
 Financial sources: exchange rates, etc.
 Aspen Icarus models: to blend and fill in sparse data areas
Five Bodies of Data

The ARM knowledge base consists of five bodies of data:
 Location specs
 Project specs
 Engineering specs
 Construction specs
 Material Cost specs
Highlights of each component follow.
Location Specs
ARM is formulated for 89 locations in 33 currencies. Locations listed below
include the four Icarus country base locations. The locations are similar to
those in the Aspen Richardson International Cost Factor Manual list.
Locations are organized and sorted by continental region, country and city.
For Canadian and US locations, names include state, province or territory.
Conventional short forms of country and city names are used for simplicity.
 Regions - The number of locations for each region is listed in Table 1.
 City Locations outside the US are listed in Table 2
 US locations are listed in Table 3.
TABLE 1. List of Locations in Each Region

Africa 3
Asia 15
Australia 3
Canada 6
Central America 2
Europe 12

Middle East 6
South America 5
United States 37
All Locations 89
Non-US Locations 52
TABLE 2. List of Non-US Locations

Region City, Country Near
Africa El Hassania, Morocco Casablanca

Ibadan, Nigeria
Johannesburg, South Africa
Asia Beijing, China
Guangzhou, China
Shanghai, China
Bhopal, India New Delhi
Mumbai (Bombay), India
Jakarta, Indonesia
Kobe, Japan
Tokyo, Japan
Kuantan, Malaysia Kuala Lumpur
Manila, Philippines
Singapore, Singapore
Seoul, South Korea
Taipei, Taiwan
Samutprakam, Thailand Bangkok
Binh Duong, Vietnam Hanoi
Australia Melbourne, Australia
Perth, Australia
Sydney, Australia
Central America Guatemala City, Guatemala
Mexico City, Mexico
Canada Calgary, Canada
Montreal, Canada
Toronto, Canada
Vancouver, Canada
Windsor, Canada
Winnipeg, Canada
Europe Brussels, Belgium
Paris, France
Frankfurt, Germany
Dublin, Ireland
Milan, Italy
Amsterdam, Netherlands
Rotterdam, Netherlands

Warsaw, Poland
Moscow, Russia
Barcelona, Spain
London, United Kingdom
Manchester, United Kingdom
Middle East Cairo, Egypt
Kuwait City, Kuwait
Dammam, Saudi Arabia Al Jubail
Jeddah, Saudi Arabia
Gebze, Turkey Istanbul
Abu Dhabi, UAE
South America Buenos Aires, Argentina
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil
Medellin, Colombia
Lima, Peru
Caracas, Venezuela
TABLE 3. List of US City Locations

Anchorage, AK
Atlanta, GA
Baltimore, MD
Boston, MA
Cape Girardeau, MO
Cayey, PR
Charlotte, NC
Chicago, IL
Cincinnati, OH
Dallas, TX
Denver, CO
Fairbanks, AK
Green Bay, WI
Houston, TX
Huntsville, AL
Indianapolis, IN
Kansas City, MO
Knoxville, TN
Las Vegas, NV
Los Angeles, CA
Louisville, KY
New Orleans, LA
New York, NY
Newark, NJ
Oakland, CA
Philadelphia, PA

Phoenix, AZ
Portland, ME
Portland, OR
Sacramento, CA
San Francisco, CA
Seattle, WA
Sherman, TX
Spartanburg, SC
St Louis, MO
Syracuse, NY
Wilkes-Barre, PA
Project Data
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of values for project
level data. These should be considered as a starting point in the evaluation of
a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge base values in
their relocated project with more representative values obtained from
company surveys of the intended site.
 Currency: Exchange rate (FEX), as of the first day of the basis year, with
exchange rate and currency units scaled to meet Icarus currency formats.
Scaled currency units are provided at three levels: 3-character symbol, 8-
character name and 24-character description. Values are listed in Table 4.
o Currency: 33 currencies are defined; some ARM locations
share the same currency
o Exchange rate, for each location. The ARM knowledge base
works with exchange rates relative to the currency of each of
the four country bases (US, UK, JP, EU). The currency table
contains the rates as of the listed date.
o Exchange rates are scaled in size to conform with Icarus
exchange rate formats (0.01 to 99.9 in value)
o Scaled currency symbols, names and descriptions are defined
to conform to Icarus format; these contain symbols such as K
to represent thousands and M to represent millions of scaled
currency units, as indicated in Table 4.
TABLE 4. List of Currencies
Exchange Rate,
Currency Currency per USD
Country Currency Description Name Symbol (1 Jan 2010)
Argentina Argentine Peso Peso-A P 3.8434
Australia Australian Dollar Dollar-A A$ 1.1144
Brazil Brazilian Real Real R 1.7578
Canada Canadian Dollar Dollar-C C$ 1.051
China Chinese Yuan Renminbi Renmimnbi R 6.8291
Colombia K Colombian Peso K Peso K-P 2.05533
Egypt Egyptian Pound Pound-E PDE 5.5581
European Union Euro Euro EUR 0.6961

Guatemala Guatemalan Quetzal Quetzal Q 8.4921
India Indian rupee Rupee R 46.899
Indonesia K Indonesian Rupiah K Rupiah K-R 9.42507
Japan K Japanese Yen K Yen K-Y 0.092586
Kuwait Kuwaiti Dinar Dinar DK 0.2871
Malaysia Malaysian Ringgit Ringgit R 3.4567
Mexico Mexican Peso Peso-MX P 13.0899
Morocco Moroccan Dirham Dirham-M D 8.1004
Nigeria K Nigerian Naira K Naira K-N 0.15154
Peru Peruvian Nuevo Sol Nuevo Sol NS 2.9128
Phillipines Phillipine Peso Peso-P P 46.766
Poland Polish Zloty Zloty Z 2.864
Russia Russian Rouble Rouble RBL 30.3477
Saudi Arabia Saudi Riyal Riyal R 3.7527
Singapore Singapore Dollar Dollar-S S$ 1.4036
South Africa South African Rand Rand ZAR 7.4034
South Korea K South-Korean Won K Won K-W 1.1773
Taiwan Taiwan Dollar Dollar-T T$ 32
Thailand Thai Baht Baht B 33.4768
Turkey Turkish New Lira New Lira NL 1.4991
United Arab 3.6731
Emirates Utd. Arab Emir. Dirham Dirham-U DK
United Kingdom British Pound Pound-UK PDS 0.6202
United States US Dollar Dollar US USD 1
Venezuela K Venezuelan Bolivar K Bolivar K-B 2.1505
Vietnam K Vietnamese Dong K Dong K-D 18.6169
Current European Union Locations:

 Belgium
 France
 Germany
 Ireland
 Italy
 Netherlands
 Spain
Note: Certain combinations of location currencies and country base

currencies may result in exchange rates that exceed the format bounds for
exchange rate. In such cases, ARM will automatically scale the exchange rate
ratio and revise the currency units, usually with a prefix of "K" to indicate
thousands of the above-listed currency unit. Example: The exchange rate for
Plant location: India, at 46.899 per USD and Country Base: Japan at
0.092586 is 495.74 R/K Yen, which is beyond the exchange rate bound: the
resulting ratio will be scaled by 1000 to 0.496 KRupee/K Yen, and costs will
be reported in KRupee (KR)

 Equipment: design code (ASME, BS5500, DIN, JIS depending upon the
plant location)
 Civil and Steel: seismic acceleration, soil, footing depth, low/high ambient
temperatures, wind velocity, hand excavation
 Electrical: power supply frequency
 Equipment Rental: a Construction Technology Level (CTL) parameter
(L, M, and H) is assigned to each location. Locations assigned as H-level
draw from the entire system slate of equipment rental items. S-level
locations select from a smaller slate than M-level locations.
 Use of gin poles vs. heavy cranes: each location is assigned a value for
the heavy lift option
Engineering Work Force

The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of engineering
workforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in the
evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge
base values in their relocated project with more representative values
obtained from company surveys of the intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each engineering work force location:
 Hourly rates for each of 77 disciplines in the engineering workforce slate.
Hourly rates are provided in the currency of the engineering location.
During the processing of a project, these rates are converted, for
consistent cost reporting, to the currency of the plant location using the
exchange rate ratio:
Discipline Rate in Plant Location Currency =
Discipline Rate in the Engineering Location Currency x Plant Location
Exchange Rate / Engineering Location Exchange Rate
 Engineering workforce productivity – one value is provided for each
engineering location, relative to the engineering productivity at the
country base location
 Engineering Indirect Costs – values are provided for each location for each
of the eight phases of engineering:
o Expense rates
o Payroll burdens
o Office indirects
The eight phases of engineering are:
o Basic Engineering
o Detail Engineering
o Procurement
o Engineering Management
o Home Office Construction Services
o Field Office Supervision
o Construction Management
o Start-up, Commissioning

 Engineering confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of engineering
contingency. Engineering contingency is computed as the root-mean
square value of the user engineering contingency and engineering
confidence level. For example, if the user contingency before relocation
UC =18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%, then the
computed contingency after relocation is:
=  (UC2 + LC2) =  (182+102 )
P
P
P
P
P
P
P = 20.6%
P
Construction
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of construction
workforce values, which should be considered as a starting point in the
evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the ARM knowledge
base values in their relocated project with more representative values
obtained from company surveys of the intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each construction work force location:
 Field Craft rates – hourly rates (“nearly all-in”) for each of 28 field crafts
in the construction work force slate and a foreman differential for each
location. By “nearly all-in”, we mean that each craft rate is a unique
composite of the following rate contributions:
o Craft Worker Base Hourly Wage Rate
o Health, Welfare, Pension
o Fringe Benefits
o Hourly Indirect Rate for:
 Temporary Construction
 Consumables and Small Tools
 FICA Unemployment Workers Compensation Insurance
 Multi-level construction
Craft rates in the ARM knowledge base do not include indirect
construction costs for the following categories as these would be
determined during project evaluation:
o Construction Equipment Rental, including Fuel, Oil, Lubrication,
Maintenance (FOLM)
o Field Supervision
o Contractor Home Office Costs
 Construction workforce productivity – one value is provided for each plant
location, relative to the construction productivity at the country base
location
 Field indirect costs, including construction equipment rental (see Project
Data, below), field supervision, home office costs
 Work week: hours, number of shifts, overtime
 Construction equipment rental: slate of items (see Project Data, below)
 Extent of hand excavation vs. machine excavation
 Construction confidence level, associated with the sources of the ARM
knowledge base data, used to compute a value of construction
contingency. Contingency is computed as the root-mean square value of

the user construction contingency and construction confidence level. For
example, if the user contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM
location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency after
relocation is:
=  (UC2 + LC2) =  (182+102 )
P
P
P
P
P
P
P = 20.6%
P
Material Costs
 Location Indexing
The ARM knowledge base contains a set of location indexes which will
adjust country base material costs to the plant location. Two sets are
provided:
o The first deals with equipment costs.
o The second applies to bulk materials.
Use of the supplied location indexes should be considered as a starting
point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users should replace the
ARM knowledge base values in their relocated project with more
representative values obtained from company surveys of the intended
site.
The location indexes make use of Aspen Richardson values for the average
split of local vs. imported materials. Costs of local and imported materials
are figured by applying location values for freight, taxes, VAT, and other
expenses. Location indexes are stored for each of the four-country bases
and are used to characterize material costs by account code (100 to 299
for equipment, 300 to 999 for bulk materials.)
o Unit cost of rebar, ready-mix concrete, in the currency of the
plant location
o Material cost confidence level, associated with the sources of
the ARM knowledge base data, used to compute a value of
material cost contingency. Contingency is computed as the
root-mean square value of the user material contingency and
material cost confidence level. For example, if the user
contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM location
confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed contingency
after relocation is
=  (UC2 + LC2) =  (182+102 )
P
P
P
P
P
P
P = 20.6%
P

10 Analyzer Utility Modules
Introduction
Analyzer Utility Modules (AUM) – Design
and Scope Generators for Utility Systems
One of the difficulties with process economic analyses, both capital cost and
payback determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process or
outside boundary limit (OSBL) portions of the project. With AUM modules
creating utility systems in harmony with the process sections of a project,
more accurate, realistic and confident business assessments can be made for
cost and economics.
Each AUM module works in the same way. It extracts information on the
specific utility needs of each project component and area in your project. You
can then interactively revise default values for design preferences and
configuration, evaluate messages, review reports of design results. On
completion, a press of a Load button will automatically transfer to your
project, a list of selected, sized, designed project components assembled
within a unique date- and time-stamped utility area. Should a prior utility
area of the same type be present in your project, you can chose to delete the
old one and replace it with new scope.
All of this takes place in times measured in minutes rather than traditional
days and weeks. Of course, evaluation time depends on the size of the
project. For front end engineering design work, AUM modules can be revisited
in each cycle of scope change to ensure the project needs are properly
satisfied by each utility system.
A Control Panel, a task bar button and numerous hypertext links provide for
easy navigation and rapid access to a status report, specs for preferences and
configurations, reports, an a guide. Messages are provided to assure data
integrity; an error condition will disallow loading of results into your project.
10 Analyzer Utility Modules 317

AUM_CW: Cooling Water Utility Selection,
Sizing, and Design Module
The cooling water utility module requires Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer plus Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to
identify cooling water resource streams and their flow conditions. Up to four
cooling water systems can be configured for a project, each with its own set
of sized components: cooling towers, circulation pumps, chemical injection
pumps, supply and return distribution piping, valves, and fittings.
You can interactively define design conditions such as ambient air
temperatures, size limits to distribution piping, equipment types, and assign
individual areas to each cooling water system. Redundancy capabilities
include stand-alone pumps, two 50% capacity pumps, stand-by spares.
Distribution piping includes expansion loops for long runs and circuits include
main lines, branch lines, area headers, and risers and laterals for 3D-type
areas. Each line type has its own “iso” for valve and fitting type. Line sizes
and pump heads are pressure drop based.
AUM_Air: Instrument and Plant Air Utility

Selection, Sizing, and Design Module
The air utility module can be accessed by either Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer or Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. AUM_ Air gathers air
requirements from your project in two ways:
 Instrument air: From a count of air operated control valves and controllers
and instrument air flow required for each based on control valve size
 Plant air: From an air usage model based on a common air tool usage set,
with area utility stations derived from area size and equipment count
within an area
Up to four air plant units (APU) can be configured for a project, each with its
own set of sized components:
 air intake filters/screens
 ductwork
 compressors
 interstage coolers
 air receivers
 pre-filters
 air dryers
 after-filters
 piping distribution network
You can interactively define design premises such as ambient air conditions,
equipment types, equipment redundancy, etc. and assign individual areas to
be served by each air plant unit. Redundancy capabilities include stand-alone
compressors, start-up compressors, receivers, dryers. Redundancy choices
include one at 100% capacity, two at 50% capacity, stand-by spares.
Distribution piping includes two sets, each sized for the required flow of
instrument air and plant air. Piping isos for line segments include expansion

loops for long runs, valves and fittings, Line segments are defined for main
feeders, main manifolds, main lines branch lines, area feeders, area headers
and for 3D–type areas, risers and laterals. Each line type has its own “iso” for
valve and fitting type. Line sizes are pressure drop based.
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)

Cooling Water (AUM_Water)
Introduction to Analyzer Utility Module
(AUM) Cooling Water
Cooling Water Selection, Sizing, Design Model

This section is divided into four parts:
1 Overview
 Analyzer Utility Module (AUM)
 Cooling Water Design Model
o Value in Time and Effort
o The Key Steps
2 Working with the Cooling Water Model
 Preparation Workflow
 The Workflow Cycle
 Accessing The Cooling Water Model
o Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phase
o Overview
o Details of the Work Process
o The Initial Design
 Interactive Session Workflow – The Design Phase
o Overview
o Details of the Work Process
o The Initial Design
3 Working with the Cooling Water Model Worksheets
 Introduction
o Worksheets
o Button actions
 Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets
 Worksheet Details
o Status Worksheet
o Preferences Worksheet
 How to Revise Default Values

 Design Preference Categories
o Circuits Worksheet
 Initial Configuration
 Step 1: Assignment of Areas to Circuits
 How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design
 Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between Areas
 Status messages and Values Used for Circuit Design
4 Basis for the Cooling Water Design Model
o General Flow sheet for cooling water service
o Cooling Water Model Circuitry
o Cooling water distribution network
o Naming conventions
 Project cooling water area
 Areas Requiring Cooling Water
 Plant bulk pipe item descriptions
 Distribution Piping Line types
o Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line
o Cooling Water ”Footprint Model”
o Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count
o Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations
 Projects with a prior cooling water utility model area
 Cooling towers- terminology and the defining stream
temperatures
1. Overview
Analyzer Utility Module (AUM) Water

One of the difficulties with economic analysis, both capital cost and payback
determination, is the lack of scope definition for non-process utility or outside
boundary limit portions of the project. The Analyzer Utility Module, AUM, was
created as the “home” for a series of automated utility design models to
address this difficulty. The Cooling Water Selection, Design and Sizing Model
is the first utility design model in AUM and its functionality and method of use
is described in detail in this chapter.
Cooling Water Design Model

The Cooling Water Design Model is an automated, interactive and rapid design
module that is contained in Aspen Decision Analyzer and works with stream-
based projects. The cooling water model identifies heat exchanger equipment
or any other type of project component that requires cooling water by its
connection to a cooling water utility resource stream.

To access the Cooling Water Design Model:
1 Starting with an open project that contains utility streams as part of its
definition, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, simply click the U
button to access utility models.
2 Click Cooling Water.
At this point built-in design and processing procedures do all the hard work
under your control and guidance and a few minutes later, your project will be
augmented with a new cooling water utility area that contains designed
cooling water circuitry and associated project components. You can use the
model results using its set of adjustable design parameters or revise any and
default values within prescribed limits to suit your needs.
In the discussions to follow, the term early design metrics is used to
indicate values prepared by the cooling water model during an interactive
design session. These are presented for guidance in advance of final design
values that would be prepared on completing a project evaluation run.
Note: Worksheet names are shown in italic bold face to distinguish the
names from text.
Value in Time and Effort

The cooling water design model does all the hard work – design, selection,
reporting, loading the design results – in minutes rather than traditional hours
and days. It is a powerful resource in the development of a typical Front End
Engineering Design:
 Early process technology evaluation stage - focus is on Inside Battery
Limits (ISBL) components
 With the process technology selected and additional scope, total project
costs are sought. Outside Battery Limits (OSBL) components are
required, particularly cooling water utility service.
The cooling water design model
 Automatically selects, designs, and adds sized utility system components
to the project scope definition
 Can be revisited in each cycle of scope change.
The Key Steps

On initiating the cooling water model, the model automatically analyzes your
project for cooling water requirements and automatically generates selected,
sized and designed cooling water utility service project components – all
based on initial default design preferences and circuitry. Two interactive
workbooks Preferences and Circuitry enable you to revise default values for
the design and selection basis. Studying design alternatives starts with either
a click of an option box or a data entry. Being interactive, the cooling water
model enables you to cycle from design basis to early design results in a
matter of mouse clicks. Each new specification results in a new design and a
report of key decision metrics. The list of sized project components is
retained until you choose to load the results into your project. Messages and

metrics reports are provided extensively to guide you quickly and knowingly
through a study of design alternatives.
When you have settled on a design you can load the results into your project.
The loading operation begins with a click of a Load button and processing is
automatic. After a minute or so, the loading process will be complete and the
Project Basis view will be displayed on your screen. Scope items added to
your project include a uniquely named cooling water area followed by a list of
cooling water utility project components: cooling towers, circulation pumps,
chemical injection pumps, working and stand-by spares, and distribution
piping, valves and fittings. Each component is selected, designed and sized in
harmony with your design basis and the needs of heat exchange equipment in
your various project areas.
2. Working with the Cooling Water Model
Preparation Workflow
The Cooling Water Design model requires a stream-based project built in
either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Decision Analyzer, with
components that require cooling water connected to one or more cooling
water utility resources.
The flow rates, water temperatures, duties and components provide the basis
for the design requirements. The cooling water model will first diagnose the
project’s requirements and initiate a design. The user can then revise the
design basis and review early design metrics for a variety of design scenarios,
settle on a design basis and load the design results into the project.
The Workflow Cycle

Figure 2.1 illustrates the cooling water design cycle: from project to design
model and back to the project with added new scope. Two buttons control the
process:
 U to select the cooling water model
 Load to load designed results
Using these two actions, you can participate interactively in the design
process, making design selections, reviewing early metrics, revising
selections, and clearing any error messages.

Figure 2.1. The Workflow Cycle, extracted from the Welcome worksheet
To initiate a cooling water design model session, three steps are required
1 Save the project under a new scenario name.
2 Evaluate the project
3 Run the Cooling water utility model
Each of these steps is detailed and illustrated in the following sections.
Accessing the Cooling Water Utility Model

1 SAVE AS: Since AUM-Cooling Water processing is automatic, it is wise to
first save your base project under a new name. This will ensure that your
base project remains intact for further evaluations.
2 Evaluate the project: Click Run |Decision Analyzer as in Figure 2.2a or
click the A button as in Figure 2.2b. This will provide the Decision Analyzer
dialog box, Figure 2.2c. Check Evaluate Project and provide a file name.
Figure 2.2a. To evaluate from Run:

Figure 2.2b. To evaluate using the A-button.
Figure 2.2c. Choose Evaluate Project.

The reason for this step is to ensure that the project scope and cooling water
requirements developed during evaluation are current and up to date. It will
also eliminate an error message (Figure 2.2d) that would be displayed when
accessing the cooling water model no evaluation data were available.
.
Figure 2.2d. Error message if the project was not evaluated
3 Select the Cooling Water Model: To do this, click Run | Utility Model
(Figure 2,2a) or press the “U” button on the button bar (Figure 2.3a):
Figure 2.3a. To obtain utility models using the U-button.

This will bring up the Utility Model dialog box, Figure 2.3b. A blank value
under Status indicates the project does not contain a prior cooling water
model area. If a project contained a prior area, the Status field would indicate
Loaded.

Figure 2.3b. Utility model selection
3b Select Cooling Water: Click OK. This will either initiate an interactive
Cooling Water Design session in MS Excel and display a Load option or
display a project-not-evaluated error message (see Step 2 above).
Interactive Session Workflow – the Design Phase
Overview
When the cooling water model is invoked, it:
(a) analyzes for project cooling water requirements
(b) works from Preferences (user-modifiable, default set of design
parameter values)
(c) prepares an initial design.
Results of the initial design and any subsequent interactive scenario are
presented in a Capture worksheet. If the design meets with the user’s
approval, a user click of the parked Load button will load the design results
into the project, at which time the project can be re-evaluated.
The Preferences and Circuits worksheets allow the user to modify the
default design basis. Each spec change will result in a new design. Hyperlinks
provide rapid access from one sheet to another and sections in a sheet. The
Control Center toolbar button opens the Control Center worksheet, which
has hyperlinks to other sheets and their major categories. Worksheet tabs
are color coded to match hyperlinks at the top of each worksheet.
The following sections provide a detailed description of the work process as
well as detailed descriptions of each worksheet, category and item.
Details of the Work Process

With the click of the OK button in step 3b above, three actions will occur
1 The model first identifies if a prior cooling water model area is present in
the project. If present, the user can choose to Delete the prior area and
continue with the model or return to the project. If Delete is chosen, the
utility model will proceed with the design and delay deletion until it is time
to load the new results.
2 If no prior cooling water utility area is detected, the Welcome screen is
displayed and remains present during a time when:
a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model
b The model prepares an initial design
c A Load | Cancel | Minimize option is provided (Figure 2.4). To
continue, click the minimize button at the top. This will park the
button box for access during the design phase. Cancel will end the cooling
water model session and return normal project functions with no change
to the project.

Figure 2.4. Load-Cancel-Minimize button boxes
 a Control Center button bar (figure 2.5) is provided to access the
Control Center worksheet from any worksheet
 Seven worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:
o Welcome
o Control Center
o Status
o Preferences
o Capture
o Guide
3 The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which links to all
other worksheets and provides an indication of success (green signal) or
failure (red signal) to create an initial design based on default design
parameters.
The Initial Design

On initiation, the cooling water model will report the Status of the design on
the Control Center (see Figure 2.5) worksheet under Status Report, and if
any, will identify clashes on the Status worksheet and further, on the
Preferences and Circuits worksheet.
A Status Report message: “Successful. A Load can proceed” indicates all is
well between project requirements, design parameters and design
methodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics by
accessing the Captured Results worksheet (see Figure 2.6). The user can
return to Preferences and Circuits to study design alternatives. If captured
results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button will (1) carry the
design results into the project, (2) close the worksheets and (3) return to the
project for evaluation of the augmented project.
Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error
messages and flags will be displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets.
The first indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center
Worksheet. The Status worksheet is the central reporting agency, where
checks are made and links are provided to source locations in the
Preferences and Circuits input worksheets.

Figure 2.5. Illustration of the Control Center Worksheet, with display of
Control Center toolbar and Load button

Figure 2.6. A section of a Results Capture sheet showing values in the project
units of measure set.
3. Working with the Cooling Water Model

Worksheets
Introduction
Worksheets: Seven worksheets are provided, of which Preferences and
Circuits are for user input, to revise the design basis:
 Welcome: greetings, workflow graphic
 ControlCenter: navigation
 Status: message center
 Preferences: design selections
 Circuits: circuit definition
 Capture: early design metrics
 Guide: help
Button Actions: The Control Center toolbar is always available during a
model session. A click will open the Control Center worksheet and a hyperlink
click will direct you to a chosen worksheet. When the Control Center toolbar is
parked together with the Excel Web toolbar you can quickly search forward
and backward.

You can step from one sheet to another, revise the design basis, review
status and results, decide on an alternate design basis, make revisions,
review the results and when ready, click the Load button (see Load-Cancel-
Minimize) to inject the results in the project. Or, you can refuse the design
using Cancel. Clicking Load conveys the design results to the project, the
cooling water design model’s Excel sheets and return to normal Analyzer
functions. Cancel bypasses the cooling water model and returns to Analyzer.
Cooling Water Design Model Worksheets

The SPECS cooling Model workbook consists of
 Two design basis sheets – this is where you input your selections
o Preferences: process and mechanical design specs:
 Red error flags and messages are displayed for out of
range or missing data values
 Uses click boxes for either/or choices, “B” and “R”
switches to select base (default) or revised value and
user value to replace the base value
o Circuits: assignment of areas to a circuit, spacing of areas in
a circuit along the main line:
 Assignment uses 1, 2, 3, 4 to assign an area to a circuit
 Spacing uses the “B” and “R” switch method and user
spacing to replace the base footprint model value
 Status sheet – all messages are summarized here for your review and
repair
o Key status message is highlighted in color (green: Loading can
be performed, red: Errors must be cleared)
o Summarizes other messages, links directly to input locations for
revision
 Capture Results: displays early design metrics for decision making,
provides the basis for alternative choices of preferences or circuitry.
By “early design metrics” is meant values in advance of those created
during project evaluation
 Guide: provides instructions, describes data entry, color coding
 Control Center: hypertext links interconnect all sheets and main
categories for rapid navigation
 All sheets: are conveniently color coded, with red flags appearing on
error condition. All error conditions must be cleared before results can
be loaded
 Welcome sheet: Welcome, displayed during the initiation process,
contains a workflow graphic
On completion of an error-free interactive session, pressing the LOAD button
will automatically load and inject the results into the project. The project will
then contain new scope additions: (1) a uniquely named, time-stamped
cooling water area will be used to contain (2) a selected, designed list of
cooling water utility project components. Each item so added by the model
may be opened, reviewed, revised in the same way as any other project
component.

Worksheet Details
Status Worksheet
The Status sheet reports messages and has hypertext links to source
locations in the event of a reported error. Major report categories are:
 Overall status
 Existing cooling water area is in the project
 Cooling circuit components – wet bulb temperature, minimum
approach temperature, lowest desired cooling water temperature
 Cooling water resources: naming, excluded streams and reasons, net
number
 Project components: total, number served by cooling water
 Project areas: total number, those served by cooling water
 Cooling water loads: total flow rate, total heat duty, excess capacity,
total flow rate at excess capacity
 Layout distances: number of parameters out of range
 Pumps specs out of range
 Piping specs out of range
 Circuit assignments out of range
 Spacing assignments out of range
Figure 3.1 illustrates an extract of a Status sheet
Figure 3.1 Extract, sample of a Status Sheet

Preferences Worksheet
Units of measure used in the Preferences worksheet correspond to those
defined in the project. Error messages are displayed alongside each entry;
errors are flagged in red. This sheet uses click boxes and data entry fields for
specifying design preferences. Each preference is provided with a

explanatory text, limit values, user entry field and a default value which is
used in the initial design and any subsequent design should the user not
provide an over-ride selection or value.
How to Revise Default Values
This worksheet uses two methods, check boxes and data entries controlled by
switch boxes to revise the supplied set of default (base) design parameters.
Throughout data entry discussions, the term used for a model-supplied set of
data is referred to as default values. For a particular parameter, the model-
supplied value is termed a base value, symbolized by the letter B. A value
supplied by the user is termed a revised value and is symbolized by the letter
R. A mouse click will switch between using a base value and a revised value.
See Figure 2.2c (page 324) for information on how to use a check box:
 A default value is provided to the left of the check box
 A check box title signifies the alternative to the default value
 The resulting choice is displayed to the right
 A status message is displayed that provides additional information
Figure 3.2 Extract, sample of a Preferences sheet showing click box method
of selection
Design Preference Categories:
 Cooling Tower (values in this section affect the circuitry, sizing of
cooling towers and flow-related equipment such as circulation pumps
and distribution piping)
(a) Design Capacity, excess capacity
(b) Design Temperature: Summer wet bulb temperature (see
Cooling Tower discussion of wet bulb temperature, approach
gradient, range)
(c) Messages relating to cooling water resource requirements
vs. design preferences
(d) Number of Cooling Towers

(e) Multiple Cooling Towers: choose either one tower for all
circuits or one for each circuit
(f) Working “Twin”: choose a single tower at 100% capacity or
two “(twins), each at 50% capacity
 Layout (these are dimension limit checks that are applied to entries on
the Circuits worksheet
o Distance
 From tower to first branch to an area
 Minimum value to first branch to an area (often defined
by fire regulations)
 From a branch to an area header
 Maximum spacing between areas (a limit check)
 Status messages related to distance
 Pumps
o Area Pressure Drop: pressure drop for equipment requiring
cooling water, applies to all areas
o Working Pumps
 Limiting value for number of working pumps in a circuit
 Pump type: horizontal (CENTRIF or API 610 model
types) or vertical (TURBINE model type, at low speed
only)
 Pump speed: low or high RPM
 Stand-by pumps if four or less pumps in a circuit: yes
or no
 Stand-by pumps if more than four pumps in a circuit:
yes or no
 Electrical power to pumps based on voltage choice: LV
(low-voltage), MV (mid-voltage), HV (high-voltage).
Limiting values of power per pump motor are displayed
based on project specifications. A voltage choice defines
the maximum power to a motor driver and hence, the
number of pumps in a circuit. Recall that each change
to a specification results in a completely new design; a
voltage selection results in a design value for the
number of pumps and can produce an error condition
and message if the number of pumps exceeds the
limiting value for number of pumps in a circuit.
 Design messages for pumps and piping for each of four
possible circuits
 Piping: Limiting values for line size, by line type, where line sizes are
in the units of measure of the project, either “IN DIAM” or “MM DIAM”
 Suction line size for circulation pumps (a flow rate per
pump suction line based on selected line size is provided
for information purposes)
 Main line segment line size
 Branch line size
 Area header line size

 Risers line size (for 3D area types)
 Laterals line size (for 3D area types)
Circuits Worksheet
Units of measure used in the Circuits worksheet correspond to those defined
in the project
This worksheet is designed to handle up to one hundred cooling water areas.
Areas are listed vertically. The worksheet is divided into five major categories
in columns of data:
1 Initial Configuration
See Figure 3.3 for the initial configuration
Figure 3.3 Extract from Circuits sheet – Initial Configuration (left), Step 1
(right)
The following (see Figure 3.3, left side) are reported for each area being
served by a recognized cooling water utility resource stream:
 Initial Sort Sequence: sequenced by area, from the area with highest
cooling water requirements to the area with the lowest
 Area Name: user-assigned name, carried into the cooling water
design model from project area specs
 Area Type: user-assigned area type, carried into the cooling water
design model from project area specs
 Area CW Rate: area cooling water (CW) flow rate, the sum of all
recognized cooling water flow rates for equipment in an area as
adjusted by the Excess Capacity value in the Preferences worksheet
 Initial Circuit Number: always 1 as all areas are initially assigned to a
single circuit
 Initial Circuit ID: always “A”
2 Step 1 – Assignment of Areas to Circuits (User entry one of two)
Please refer to Figure 3.3 (right side):

 Enter a Circuit Number 1, 2, 3, or 4: user value is required; if only
one area requires cooling water, enter 1. If two areas, use 1 for both
or assign 1 to one area and 2 to the other. The design model will
sequence the areas. In an error condition, an error message and a red
flag will be displayed. Error conditions must be resolved to obtain
loadable design results.
 System-Assigned Circuit Id: The model will assign a letter ID (A, B, C,
D) to each area based on circuit assignments and total circuit flow
rate. If the project contains four or more areas, then it is possible to
assign areas to circuit numbers 1 to 4. The model will collect all the
area flow rates in each circuit and sequence the circuits from greatest
flow to least in the sequence A, B, C, D. The “A” circuit will have a
larger total flow rate than circuit “B”, “B” will be greater than circuit
“C” and “D” will have the least flow rate. Similarly, for three areas in a
project, valid circuit numbers range from 1 to 3 and circuit IDs assign
to these circuits, based on total flows will be sequenced and labeled A,
B and C. A one-area project will be assigned a circuit ID of “A.”
 Status
o Status of all entries: summarizes number or errors to be
resolved; if none, “OK” is displayed
o Status for individual entries: message is issued for invalid
circuit numbers and field is flagged in red
3 How Area Assignments are Used for Circuit Design
Please refer to Figure 3.4
Figure 3.4 Extract of Circuits sheet – defining area spacing using the B/R
switch
Each line item in this section represents an area and its properties. Areas are
sorted and sequenced in descending total circuit flow rate and then by area
flow rate. Circuits are labeled A, B, C, D with circuit A being the one with the
highest flow rate; B is next etc. An area that was tagged as circuit 2 in step 1
may be in a circuit with the lowest flow and would be organized accordingly
and given a Circuit ID letter depending on the other circuit flows.
This section displays the properties and attributes of each area in the
sequenced list.

Values displayed for information purposes are:
 New Sort Sequence: displays values vertically in the sequence 1, 2, 3,
etc
 Initial Sort Sequence: displays the initial sort sequence number for the
area
 ID of Area In Report Group (ArRg): the ArRg ID for the area
 Area name: user-assigned project area description
 Area CW Rate: displays the cooling water rate, as adjusted by the
Preferences value for excess capacity
 Area Heat Duty: heat duty requirements for all equipment within the
area identified as requiring a valid cooling water resource
 User circuit number: value entered in Step 1, for reference purposes
 Circuit ID: letter A, B, C, D assigned by the cooling water model based
on sequencing circuit flow rates
 Position Of Area In Circuit: Only one area can be first in line in a
circuit. “First” if the area has the highest flow rate of all areas in the
circuit, otherwise no a blank display. The area with a “First” position
will take on a default distance from the cooling tower as defined by the
Preferences value for that distance.
4 Step 2: Assignment of Spacing Between areas
Each line item in this section corresponds to item 4 above. A line item
represents an area and its properties, with areas being sorted and sequenced
in descending circuit and area flow rate.
This section enables the user to revise base values for the spacing of areas
along the main line. It uses the “Switch” method to revise a base value as
described in the section on Preferences.
 Base Value for Spacing Along Circuit Main Line: This is the run length
of the main segment between the prior and current area as developed
by the footprint model.
 Enter Switch: B for Base, R to revise. Choose a blank entry or enter
either a B (or b) to indicate use of the base value. Use R (or r) to
indicate use of a revised value
o Switch value is blank: design will use the base value
o Switch value is B or b: design will use the base value
o Switch value is R or r: indicates a forthcoming user value will
revise the default spacing value. The design will use the
revised value if the user value is within range of prescribed
limits.
 Enter Revised Spacing Along The Circuit Main Line: This value will
replace the base value if it meets range limit conditions set forth in the
Preferences worksheet. By spacing is meant the distance between
successive areas. As the line items in this section represent areas that
are sorted and sequenced, the spacing for a particular line item is the
spacing between the start of the prior area and the start of the current
area. This spacing is a measure of the area’s main line segment. See
the section on the Cooling Water Footprint Model. Piping runs lengths are
typically longer than spacing as they include pipe to configure fittings,
expansion loops, etc.

Enter a value. The resulting action depends on the corresponding switch
value
o Switch value is blank, B or b: user value is ignored, base value
will be used
o Switch value is R or r: user value is tested against range limits
and design criteria. If error free, the user value will be
displayed as the Applied Value. Error conditions will display
instructional status messages, red flag, and prevent completion
of a valid design
5. Status messages and values used for design
o Flag: A red flag is displayed to indicate a line item error
condition
o Status: B (Base) uses base value, R (Revise) uses revised value
or status message (displays limiting values, error messages)
o Value used for spacing along circuit main line: The value used
in the design
4. Basis for the Cooling Water Design

Model
This section describes the basis of the cooling water design model. It is
presented with numerous graphics to enable a clear understanding of the
work being performed by the model when it is analyzing and designing
cooling water project components that are in harmony with your design
preferences and the needs of components requiring cooling water.
General Flow Sheet for Cooling Water Service

Figure 4.1 is a schematic diagram of a typical cooling water circuit. In this
figure, circulation pumps draw cooled cooling water, the cooling water supply
stream, from the supply basin at the bottom of a cooling tower and distribute
it through piping to heat exchanger located in one or more project areas.
Cooling water return streams are combined and sent to a cooling tower where
it is cooled, principally by evaporative cooling. Motor driven fans mounted on
the tower draw (induced draft) or force (forced draft) ambient air into the
cooling tower where it contacts the downward flow of cooling water. The
cooled cooling water drops down from the tower into a supply basin, awaiting
withdrawal by the circulation pumps.
Water is added to make up for losses through evaporation, air-born drift and
for blow-down. Water drawn from the system to prevent the build-up of
contaminants is termed “blow-down.”
See below for more on cooling towers, terminology and defining stream
temperatures
Cooling water in such a circuit tends to accumulates algae, corrosion
contaminants and particles that slough off the distribution system. Water
treatment chemicals are added to alleviate these conditions, with the degree
of such treatment depending on the water supply source and environmental
conditions. Five types of treatment chemicals are typically used in small

quantities to control the water quality. The cooling water model provides each
cooling tower with a diaphragm type of pump and a stand-by for each of the
treatment chemicals. The model uses the following labels to identify the
types:
 Sulfuric acid (pH control)
 Sodium hypochlorite (pH control)
 Biocide (algae growth control)
 Corrosion inhibitor
 Dispersant (suspended particles control)
Figure 4.1 Illustration: Cooling Water Flow Diagram
Cooling Water Model Circuitry

The cooling water model is designed to support up to four independent
cooling water circuits. Each circuit can have its own cooling tower or all
circuits can be defined to share a cooling tower. A circuit consists of pumps
and distribution piping to and from project areas. It is the P&ID specs that
define the component’s hook-up piping to the cooling water model’s circuitry.
Summarizing, the cooling water model develops piping runs to a project area
and distributes cooling water to components in the area via an area header or
risers and laterals in the case of 3D area types. Each circuit is provided with
a supply and return distribution network; what is supplied must be returned:
one supply line implies one return line.
Figure 4.2 is a schematic diagram showing several areas that have equipment
requiring cooling water and one that does not. The cooling water model will
not serve an area that does not have cooling water requirements. If such an
area is to be included, then it is recommended that one or more exchangers
connected with cooling water utility streams be introduced in that area.
The cooling water model allows for a one cooling tower (or two 50% towers)
to serve all circuits or individual cooling tower (or two 50% towers) for each
circuit. Clearly, if only one area requires cooling water, only one circuit can
be defined, up to two circuits for two areas, up to three circuits for three

areas and a maximum of four circuits for four or more areas requiring cooling
water.
Figure 4.2 Single, Independent Cooling Water Circuit

Figure 4.3, case (a) is a diagram showing a single treed circuit. Figure 4.4,
case (b), illustrates multiple treed circuits. The difference between the two
cases is (a) one cooling tower for each circuit or (b) one for all circuits. Case
(a) would apply to projects with a single area or for multiple circuits, with
each circuit being served by its own cooling tower.

Figure 4.3 (case a). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve a set of
areas in a single circuit. The model will permit up to four single circuits, each
having its own cooling tower and circulation pumps.
Figure 4.4 (case b). Illustration of one cooling tower used to serve multiple
circuits. For this case, the model will provide one cooling tower for all
circuits and a set of circulation pumps for each circuit.

Cooling Water Distribution Network
This section describes the methodology used in circuit design
 Naming conventions
 Sequencing of areas on the main line
 Cooling water footprint model
 Pipe, valves and fittings count
 Line sizing and pressure drop calculations
Naming Conventions
Project Cooling Water Utility Area: The cooling water design model will create
a cooling water model utility area to contain project components for each
circuit. On loading, the area will be named with a date and time stamp to
ensure it is unique and can be detected and properly deleted when a new
design is to take its place.
The naming convention is: “AUMCoolWater ddmmmyy_tttt”, where
 dd is the day number of the session month (1, 2, 3, ….., 31)
 mmm is a three character representation of the session month (jan,
feb, mar, apr, may, jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, dec)
 yy is the last two digits of the session year (05 for 2005, etc)
 tttt is the decimal fraction of the session day
Utility project components are time-stamped in a similar manner. As only
four digits are used (tttt), it is possible that a load action might span two tttt
times (one ten-thousandth of a day, duration of 8.64 seconds) with no
significant resulting consequence.
Once a cooling water utility area is loaded in the project, the user may access
any item in the usual way, by using the Project View, clicking on any
component and viewing the design parameters in the forms view. Any and all
data in the cooling water utility area may be modified as required.
Areas Requiring Cooling Water: Each area that requires cooling water is
identified by a unique ArRg number that is made up of system–assigned
numeric values for Area ID and Report Group. An ArRg value of 201 indicates
Area ID = 2 in Report Group 1. The user-assigned area description, which
may not be unique in a given project, is printed in reports along with its
unique ArRg value.
Plant Bulk Pipe Item Descriptions: The naming convention above is combined
with the Area Code and is time stamped when loaded into the project. For
example, “MainSeg, ArRg 201_T7883” is the item description for main line
supply and return line segment that serves area 2 in report group 1, time
stamped T7883.
Distribution Piping Line Types: The distribution network in this cooling water
model consists of the following named types of lines:
 Main line segment: a portion piping along the main line
o “MS”
o “MainSeg”
o “MainChk” for a main segment that contains a check valve

 Branch segment: a short run of pipe, from the main line to a specific
project area
o “B”
o “Branch”
o “BrChk” for a branch that contains a check valve
 Area header: a line of pipe, valves and fittings that distributes cooling
water along the long dimension of the base of a project area
o “AH”
o “Area Header”
o “ArHdrChk” for an area header that contains a check valve
 Risers – vertical runs of pipe to bring cooling water to each level in a
3d structure
o “R”
o “Risers”
o “RiseChk” for a riser that contains a check valve
 Laterals – horizontal runs of pipe that distribute cooling water to each
floor in a 3D structure
o “L”
o “Laterals”
o “LatChk” for a lateral that contains a check valve
 Vents and drains – high-point vents, low-point drains on supply and
return lines, short runs of small bore pipe
o “VD”
o “VentDrain”
Lines with check valves are of minimal length to satisfy the plant bulk PIPE
mode and are separate line items as only one check valve is assigned to a
supply-return line pair.
Figures 4.5 and 4.6 illustrate these line types for 2D (PAD, GRADE) and 3D
area types (OPEN, EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)

Figure 4.5 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 2D area type (PAD, GRADE)
Figure 4.6 Schematic of cooling water piping for a 3D area type (OPEN,
EXOPEN, FLOOR, MODULE)

Sequencing of Areas on the Main Line
Upon identifying which areas that require cooling water and their assigned
circuit, the cooling water model arranges the areas in decreasing cooling
water usage. The largest consuming area is placed at the front of the line
and the smallest consumer is placed at the end. In this way, min line
segments will be larger in diameter at the front of the line and decrease as
each consumer reduces the total flow rate to the next area.
Figure 4.7 illustrates various line types and sequenced areas.
Figure 4.7 Schematic of Line Types Serving Areas Requiring Cooling Water
Cooling Water “Footprint Model”

Upon identifying an area as one that requires cooling water, the footprint
model develops an area footprint by using (a) the total number of
components in an area, (b) the area type (2D or 3D), (c) the number of level
and (d) a packing density (number of components in a bay) and (e) area
aspect ratio, length:width, of 1.5:1.0.
The result of the footprint model is a set of dimensions for each area requiring
cooling water. These dimensions are used to develop a default value of the
spacing between the start of one area along the main line and the next area.
The default spacing distances are reported in the Step 2 of the CIRCUITS
worksheet and can be over-ridden by the user.
Pipe, Valves and Fittings Count

Each line type is provided with a piping iso model that consists of set of pipe,
valves and fittings. Pipe and fitting diameter is determined by volumetric flow
rate and limiting line velocity (suction lines being different from distribution

lines). Line length is determined by (a) minimum length of pipe required to
each type of fitting and (b) the long area dimension, which is developed from
a cooling-water “footprint model” for each project area and area type.
Fittings are assigned to each line type from a list that includes elbows (EL),
tees (TE), reducers (RE), flanges (FL), blind flanges (BL), gate valves (GA),
check valves (CH).
Each line type is based on five configuration components. The total line
length is determined by as the sum of the linear run distance plus pipe
lengths of pipe to satisfy the make-up of the configuration components. The
make-up of each configuration component is based on line type and consists
of quantities of the following:
 “Main run” component: pipe, of length determined by (a) the footprint
model, or (b) user preference value
 “Fixed” component: FL, GA, CH fittings, pipe length based on diameter
of run
 “Head” component: EL, FL fittings, pipe length based on diameter of
run, to provide directional change
 “Branch point” component: TE, RE, FL, BL fittings, for connection to
next line type
 “Vent and drain station” component: TE, FL GA fittings, pipe;
frequency of placement is based on linear run distance
 “Expansion loop” component: EL fittings, pipe length based on
diameter of run, frequency of placement is based on linear run
distance
Expansion loops and vent and drain stations are placed along the run based
on line length
The configuration of each line type serving each area is defined as a project
component located in the cooling water area created by the cooling water
model. Once loaded in the project, any line configuration can be reviewed
and modified in the usual manner by opening that project component in its
form.
Line Sizing and Pressure Drop Calculations

The Cooling Water Model has a Preferences worksheet where, in the Piping
section, limiting sizes of each line type are defined. Once areas are assigned
to a circuit, the flows through the circuit are known. Areas are ordered in
sequence according to their flow requirements, with the largest consumer at
the head of the line. The computations are interactive and a new design will
be computed unnoticed each time a design value is revised. It is wise to
check early design results that are displayed in the Capture worksheet when
revising design specifications.
Line size and pressure drop computations take place in this general manner:
 Starting point is limiting velocity, as defined in the Icarus Reference
Guide
 Flow rate combined with limiting velocity results in required flow area
 Maximum line size determines number of parallel lines
 Built-in iso for each line type defines valve and fitting count

 Line length is derived from spacing between areas from circuitry input,
minimum spacing between areas and minimum lengths from line
 Total run length is a combination of line length and number of parallel
runs
 Pipe friction is based on Fanning type equation
 Line-size based fitting resistances are used to determine fitting friction
losses
 A single average value for the pressure drop across cooling water
usage components in any area is defined in the Preference worksheet
 Pressure at junctions, where flows meet, is common to junction
streams
 Overall circuit pressure drop comes from a stepwise calculation across
all junctions
 An addition head loss due to cooling tower elevation completes the
pressure drop determination
It is possible that the limiting line size for branch and area headers may be
too small for some circuits with large flows. This would result in a cluster of
two or more parallel lines. To alleviate this condition, consider increasing the
limiting line size.
Projects with a Prior Cooling Water Utility Model Area

The cooling water model will allow a single cooling water utility area of its
making in a project. If a project contains a prior area, the model will detect
its presence and defer action until the user decides to load a new cooling
water model design. Choosing to load will delete the prior area and the new
one will be loaded. Is the choice is not to load, the model worksheets are
closed with a return to the normal view.
Cooling Towers: Terminology and the Defining Stream Temperatures
Figure overview_4.8 shows a cooling tower with air and cooling water
streams and their temperatures.
Terms used in the cooling tower industry, illustrated in Figure 4.8, are:
 Cooling tower: a device used to cool water by the countercurrent
action of ambient air against a downward flowing stream of water to
be cooled. The cooling process involves the cooling of entering water

by evaporative cooling of water and sensible heat to a much lesser
degree
 Cooling water supply stream: cooling water supplied to heat
exchangers for purpose of cooling process streams
 Cooling water return stream: cooling water streams leaving heat
exchangers, combined for return to a cooling tower
 Range: cooling water return temperature, Tr – cooling water supply
temperature, Ts, directly related to the heat duty
 Approach Gradient: the difference between the wet bulb air
temperature and cooling water leaving the cooling tower.
Theoretically, the cooling water temperature can not drop below the
air wet bulb temperature. For a given cooling water flow rate, as the
approach gradient decreases, the cost of a cooling tower will increase.
Notes to Analyzer Utility Model (AUM)

Users:
Cooling Water utility resources that must accounted in the Analyzer Utility
Model (AUM) should be named either:
Cooling Water or "Cooling Water xx"
where:
xx can be two digits ranging from 01 to 99,
for example, Cooling Water 01
User created utility resources that do not adhere to this format (for example,
CW, Sea Water, Cooling Water o3) will not be identified as cooling water
streams and will be excluded from AUM's cooling water analysis.
Cooling water streams that are not associated with any equipment, will be
assigned to the Area with the maximum cooling water flow rate. For areas
assigned to two or more circuits, the collected unassigned cooling water flow
rate will be assigned to the first area in the circuit handling the largest circuit
flow rate.
Cooling water can either be bought or be made. If it is to be made, the dew
point of ambient air added to the lower model limit for the approach gradient
will determine the lowest possible deliverable temperature. To ensure that
your specified cooling water utility resource streams can be made, please
review the limits for the two cooling water models:
 CTWCOOLING
 CTWPACKAGED

AUM_Air
Utility Design and Scope Generator
for Instrument and Plant Air
Overview
The Air Utility Module automatically and interactively:
 selects, designs, and sizes air plant project components that conform to
your:
o Project scope design basis
o Interactive entries for air utility design and configuration
preferences
 Augments the scope of your project with a list of designed air utility
project components in a unique air utility area on the click of the Load
button
 Interactive session enables a review of results prior to LOAD creates
o Status messages, suggestions to alleviate design clashes
o Interactive report of equipment and distribution piping design
results
With the Air Utility Module, you can review, revise, add other project
components and/or Run the augmented project to obtain a new project
evaluation.
The Air utility model can be
 applied to projects that have been created using
o Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Decision Analyzer
o Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
 within Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer
Project areas and their project components

 Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer projects:
o Each group of project components is contained in a unique
“Report Group”
o A report group is a project area
 Aspen Process Economic Analyzer projects: You can create
o A project area
o A report group to coordinate a group of project areas
o The AUM Air utility module works with each project area and its
air requirements

Benefits:
 You get early design metrics for decision making
 Decide what’s best, then trigger the LOAD operation
 With LOAD, a new Air utility area will be inserted into your project with its
designed list of air system project components
 Before LOAD, air system project components are interactively
o Selected based on your selection preferences
o Designed in accordance with your project basis and air design
preferences
o Sized
o Reported
 In a small fraction of the time and effort it takes to do this work in the
traditional manner
 Change the project scope? Re-run the utility module!
How AUM_Air Works
General AUM_Air Workflow

1 Press U button to initiate.
2 Select Air Utility.
AUM_Air opens in MS Excel
3 Move the supplied Control Center toolbar to the top and click it.
4 Check Status.
5 Review the Guide, page 355.
6 Select and enter Preferences.
7 Check messages, review results in Report.
8 Revise Configuration parts 1 and 2.

9 Check messages, review results in Report.
10 Click the Load button to close AUM_Air and load the design results into
your project.
11 Review Area and components.
12 Run the project, review results.
Using AUM_Air
Accessing AUM_Air
To access AUM_Air:
1 Starting with an open project that has been evaluated, click Run, then
click Utility Model. Or, click the U button to access utility models.
The Utility Model dialog box appears:
2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant.

3 Click OK.
Three actions now occur
1 The model first identifies if a prior Air – Instrument, Plant
model area is present in the project. If present, you can choose to
Delete the prior area and continue with the model or return to the
project. If you click Delete, the utility model will proceed with the
design and delay deletion until it is time to load the new results.
2 If no prior Air – Instrument, Plant utililty area is detected,
the Welcome screen is displayed and remains present during a time
when:
a Project requirements are automatically passed to the model
b The model prepares an initial design
c The model then displays the Control Center worksheet, which
links to all other worksheets and provides an indication of success

(green signal) or failure (red signal) to create an initial design
based on default design parameters.
3 A Load | Cancel | Minimize dialog box is provided.

4 To continue, click the minimize button at the top. This parks the
button box for access during the design phase. Cancel ends the Air –
Instrument, Plant model session and returns normal project functions
with no change to the project.
Note: A Control Center button bar is provided to access the

Control Center worksheet from any worksheet.
Nine worksheets are presented in a MS Excel framework:
 Welcome
 Control Center
 Guide
 Status
 Preferences
 Config 1
 Config 2
 EquipStats
 PipeStats

The Initial Design
On initiation, the Air – Instrument, Plant model reports the status of the
design on the Control Center worksheet under Status, and if there are any,
identifies clashes on the Status worksheet and, further, on the Preferences
worksheet.
A Status Report message: Successful. A Load can proceed indicates all is
well between project requirements, design parameters, and design
methodology. At this point, it is wise to review early design metrics by
accessing the EquipStats and PipeStats worksheets.
If captured results are acceptable, a click of the parked Load button:
 carries the design results into the project
 closes the worksheets
 returns to the project for evaluation of the augmented project
Should the design basis produce a clash with project requirements, error
messages and flags are displayed in a top-down succession of worksheets.
The first indication is given under Status Report on the Control Center
worksheet. The Status worksheet is the central reporting agency, where
checks are made and links are provided to source locations in the EquipStats
and PipeStats worksheets.
To load the Air – Instrument, Plant data into your Icarus project:
When you are satisfied with the model and the Status worksheet shows that
there are no errors, you can load the Air – Instrument, Plant model into
the project.
1 Click the Maximize button on the parked Load | Cancel | Minimize
dialog box.

2 Click Load.
The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML
data into Icarus.
When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus,
the following confirmation message appears:
3 Click OK.
The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.
Modifying Air – Instrument, Plant Data

When you have loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data in your project, you
modify that data using the AUM_Air module.
To Modify Air – Instrument, Plant Data:

1 On the main menu, click Run, then click Utility Model. Or, click the U
button to access utility models.
The Utility Model dialog box appears. Note that the Status column says
Loaded.

2 Click Air – Instrument, Plant.
3 Click OK.
The following warning message appears:
Note: Clicking Yes does not actually delete the Air – Instrument, Plant
data in your project. You can click Yes, modify the Air – Instrument, Plant
data, then choose not to replace the previous Air – Instrument, Plant data
with the modified data by clicking Cancel on the Load | Cancel | Minimize
dialog box.
4 Click Yes.
5 Modify the data to your satisfaction.
If you want to replace the loaded data with your modified data, follow the
steps below.
dialog box.

2 Click Load.
The Aspen Icarus Loader appears, showing the progress of loading the XML
data into Icarus.
When the Air – Instrument, Plant data has been loaded into Aspen Icarus,
the following confirmation message appears:
3 Click OK.
The Air – Instrument, Plant data is now included in your project.
If you want to keep loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data and not replace it
with your modified data, follow the steps below.
dialog box.

2 Click Cancel..
The following warning me
message appears:
3 Click Yes to cancel the loading process.

Your original loaded Air – Instrument, Plant data is retained.
Guide for the Air Utility Model

(AUM)

SPECS Organization Chart
About this SPECS Book

About an Air Plant Unit

About Distribution Piping for an APU
Methods
In the conceptual design phase, lacking a plot plan, this method is used to
develop air distribution piping.
 Some runs may be long, some short.
 Components in the augmented project scope definition may be modified,
deleted, new ones added.
The following is a brief description of the methods used.
 Areas assigned to an APU are collected in the sequence of the project and
are assembled in a column-row array
 Array dimensions are determined from area dimensions
 Row and column dimensions are figured from total area, number of areas
and an initial aspect ratio of 3:2
Air Distribution
 Piping is developed for Instrument Air as well as Plant Air.
 Piping for each service is developed in the same way, except for
volumetric flow and line size
Distribution Piping
 The APU feeds air to the array through a Main Feeder (MF)
 The Main Feeder length is defined in Preferences
 Two Main Manifolds (MM) are used on extra-wide arrays, els one or none
for an array one column wide
 Each MM feeds a Main Line (ML)
 Main lines feed Branch Lines (BR)
 A tee of the Branch line supplies air to an Area Feeder (AF)
 Area Feeders connect to Area Headers (AH)
 Area headers, for 2-D area types such as Grade, Pad, etc supply air to the
I-P transducers, control valves
o P&ID information from the original project provide the
requirements for I-P and control valve components
o Utility station requirements are developed for each area based
on anticipated air tool usage and area size
 A plant air connection is made off the Area Header Plant
for each utility station
 Area headers, for 3-D area types such as open steel structures, etc supply
air to Risers, then Laterals which then connect to I-P transducers and
control valves.
o Utility station requirements are developed for each 3-D type
area based on anticipated air tool usage and area size

Schematic
The following schematic was prepared to illustrate a large project of 78 areas:
Configuration of Air Utility

Project Components
 Project Components
 An Air Plant Unit - APU

 Schematic of an APU
 Multiple APUs
 Compressor Redundancy
Project Components
The Instrument and Plant Air Utility Model creates a set of project
components in accordance with the needs of your:
 Project Scope definition
 Design and selection preferences for Instrument and Plant Air
Typical components
 Air Compressors
 Interstage and After-coolers
 Air Filters
 Air Receivers
 Air Dryers
 Air distribution piping (instrument, plant air)
 Utility Stations (air, water, steam, condensate drain services)
 Associated installation bulks would be developed during project run
Components are contained in a uniquely defined

Area
 Area Title contains a unique time and date to differentiate one run from
another
 Area can be modified or deleted in the usual way using Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer/Analyzer
An “Air Plant Unit” - APU

 Air intake screens
 Air intake ductwork
 Air compressors
o One main compressor at 100% capacity or two at 50%
capacity each
o Optional standby spare compressor
o Optional start-up compressor
 Interstage and after-stage coolers
o Optional TEMA water cooled or fin-fan air cooled exchangers
 Air receivers
o Optional individual receivers for instrument and plant air or
combined receiver
o Optional main receiver or two at 50% capacity each
o Optional stand-by receiver

 Air filters – pre-filter and post-filter, one or more of each
 Air dryers - dual tower type (one working, one regenerating)
o One main at 100% capacity or two at 50% capacity each
o Optional standby spare air dryer
o Optional dryer for Plant Air
 Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return
 Distribution piping
o Instrument and plant air
o Utility stations
o Cooling water, steam/condensate headers
o Interconnects between two or more air plant units
Schematic of an Air Plant Unit

General Layout
Multiple Air Plant Units for Multiple Areas

One or up to four Air Plant Units to serve area air requirements.
Two distribution networks for each APU:

 instrument air
 plant air

Compressor Redundancy: Multiple, Stand-
by, Start-up
Design Considerations
 Designed Components
 Volumetric Air Flow Rate
 Equipment Selection and Design
o Compressor Model Selection
o Interstage and After Coolers; choice of
 Air Coolers (for rack mounting)
 Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers
o Air Receivers
o Air Filters
o Air Dryers
Units of Measure
Values are reported in the Unit of Measure set of the user’s project, in the:
 Utility Module interactive worksheets and reports
 Augmented user’s project file

Air Utility Area
 Designated as AUM_Air_ddmmyy_tttt (date and time stamped)
 Contains Air Utility system project components
Air Utility Project Components

Each item is selected and sized:
 Area headers for cooling water/return, steam/condensate, instrument and
plant air
 Air intake screens
 Air intake ductwork
 Compressors
 Interstage coolers
 Utility piping for turbine steam/condensate, cooling water/return
 Plant and Instrument Air Receivers
 Air Pre-filters, After-filters
 Air Dryers
 Distribution Pipe, Valves, Fittings
o Distribution circuits: up to four circuits (one to four air plant
units)
o Distribution piping, for 2D, 3D area types
o Utility stations (total number of stations)
Instrument Air (IA) Requirements: Air Flow

Rate

Plant Air (PA) Requirements: Air Flow Rate
Compressor Model Selection Method
Sizes compressor based on

 Total project air flow
 Number of desired air plant units
 Project areas assigned to each air plant unit
 Air plant unit redundancy (working spares, stand-by spares)
 Specs for start-up compressor
Model type is based on compressor air flow rate

 Low flow rates – reciprocating
 High flow rates – centrifugal
 Flow rates less than model minimum -reciprocating

Reciprocating Compressor for Low Capacity
Range
Gasoline Motor-Driven Reciprocating Compressor

for Low Capacity Range, Stand-by Spare

Centrifugal Compressor for High Capacity Range
Inter- and After-compression stage Coolers

Air Filters
Air Receivers

Air Dryers
Interactive Specs
 Design Basis
o Equipment Redundancy
o Equipment Configurations
o Selection Specs
o Design Preferences
o Air Distribution
 Areas and Air Plant Units
 Layout
 Air Distribution Configuration
o Assignment of APUs to Areas
User Preferences
 User enters specs interactively in MS Excel SPECS workbook
 Preferences worksheet– design and equipment configuration basis
o Organized by category
o Color coded
o Either/or selections are provided with a base (default) value
o Numeric selections are provided with a base (default) value
o Help messages assist selections
o Error messages are issued for out-of-limit or design clash
conditions
 CONFIG worksheets: basis for distribution air piping to areas
o Part 1: Assignment of plant air to areas devoid of equipment
o Part 2: Assignment of an APU to an area

Equipment Redundancy
 Main item at 100% capacity
 Main item split into two, each at 50% capacity
 Stand-by spare
o Optional
o Same size as main item or main item at 50% capacity
o Power option for stand-by compressors
 Electric motor drive
 Large compressors: steam turbine drive
 Small compressors: gasoline engine drive
 Start-up compressors only
o Optional
o Size based on user % of total capacity of main item
Equipment Configurations
Equipment configuration choices:
Combined air train
Individual Instrument air train
Wet or dry plant air train

Basis for Design: Preferences - 1
With the exception of item 1 (Conversion of “Quoted cost” items ….) where no
default value is provided, every other user preference is supplied with a
default value and minimum and maximum limit values where appropriate.
Item 1 requires user entry for an exchange rate which is used in an air utility
internal cost model to evaluate costs of air intake screen/filters.
1 Conversion of "Quoted cost" items to Project Currency Units (PCU)
o Exchange rate, Project Currency Units per USD:
Note: This entry is required.

2 Ambient Air Conditions (one set for all APUs)
o Dry bulb temperature
o Wet bulb temperature
o Atmospheric pressure
3 Air Requirements - Capacity for Instrument and Plant air (one set for all
APUs)
o Excess capacity, %
 Instrument air
 Plant air
o Air system leakage, %
o Install utility stations?
o Number of utility stations, % adjustment
4 Air intake screens/filters (uses an AUM_Air cost model)
o Air to media ratio
o Adjustments to model estimate
 Cost
 Hour to install
 Weight
5 Compressors (one set of specs for all APUs) Main compressor:
o Main compressor
 One at 100% capacity or two each at 50% capacity
 Limiting flow rate for a single main compressor, % of
model maximum flow
o Stand-by spare compressor
 Install?
 Driver type (electrical or other: turbine, gas motor)
o Start-up compressor
 Install?
 Minimum flow rate to qualify for installation
 Running time
o Interstage Coolers
 Type:
 Water cooled (small: Pre-engineered type or
large: TEMA BEU)

 Air cooled (AIR COOLER)
 Cooling water inlet and rise temperature
 Air temperature rise for fin-fan air coolers
Notes:
If low capacity type is selected, may generate multiple low capacity
compressors
High capacity compressors may require project mid- and/or high voltage
power distribution levels.
o Utility services for compressors
 Steam lines: run distance from boiler house to turbines
 Cooling water lines: run distance from cooling water
plant
6 Air Receivers
o Common or separate receivers for instrument air and plant air?
o One main receiver at 100% capacity or two, each at 50%
capacity
o Install a stand-by spare?
o Horizontal or vertical vessels?
o Maximum diameter
o Maximum tangent-to-tangent length
o Instrument air supply time during emergency shut-down
o Plant air supply time during emergency shut-down
7 Air Dryers (Dual Bed–one working, one regenerating)
o Common air dryer for instrument and plant air?
o Is plant air to be dried?
o One main dryer at 100% capacity or two, each at 50% capacity
o Air purge rate
8 Air Filters
o Instrument air
 Number of pre-filters
 Number of post-filters
o Plant air
 Number of pre-filters
 Number of post-filters
9 Distribution piping
o Minimum line size for air piping
o Distance from APU to process area
o Typical tie-in run length from one APU to another

Configuration Layout Method and
Distribution
Basis for Air Utility Model Piping

o Layout and primary distribution piping is based on the specs for
all areas assigned to an APU
o Area feeder and header, risers, laterals are based on area specs
Area layout in lieu of a project plot plan

o Project areas are arranged in project sequence
o Each area is given an ID code based on its report group and
area number
 Example:
 Report group 2 “Solvent Recovery”
 Area 4 description: “Distillation”
 Is given an ID code of 100 x 2 + 4 = 204
 ID code 204 is characterized by its report group
name and area description
o Areas are placed in a rectangular array according to the total
number of areas with an initial aspect ratio of 2:3 (fewer
columns than rows)
o Column-row arrangement is modified to obtain a row-column
balance
o A branch line is run across each row with area feeder take-offs
to each area in a row
o Area headers (and risers and laterals for 3D area types)
connect to individual project components in that area
o Branches are fed using a Main Line
o Main Lines are fed by Main Manifolds for wide arrays
o Main Manifolds are fed by a Main Feeder from the Air Plant Unit
APU Configuration:
o Choose default (one APU for all) or assign each Report Group to
one of four APUs

Example layout – group of areas served by
APU “A”
Circuit Preferences: Configuration of APUs

 Worksheet provides a list of Project Areas and air consumption
 Configuration in two parts:
o Part 1: enables areas with no Instrument air requirements to
be provided with plant air, else no air is provided
o Part 2: enables each area to be assigned to an APU
 Initial configuration: all areas are assigned to APU “A”
o Design results are presented for the initial configuration
 Revised configuration: use of up to four (4) APUs
o Design results are presented for the revised configuration

Sample Layouts: One APU
Sample Layouts: Multiple APUs
Design Methods
 Sizing Distribution Piping
 Schematic of Distribution Piping
Basis for Sizing Air Distribution Piping

 Configuration (IA = instrument air; PA = plant air)

o Assignment of an APU to Project Areas
o Initial configuration: all are areas assigned to one APU
o APU Air flow for IA and PA is determined from sum of area
usage requirements
 Sizing
o Air Module uses a built-in layout model to estimate air
distribution piping line lengths
o Each line type is assigned an “Iso” with valve and fitting counts,
expansion loops for long runs
o Areas provides air flow requirements for each line
o Lines are sized based on air consumption and a pressure drop
of 1 PSI per 100 ft [22.6 KPAG/100 M] or less with a minimum
line size as defined in Preferences
o Design pressure: 150 psig [1350 KPAG]
Air Distribution Piping to Project Areas

Distribution for a 3D-Type Area
Sample AUM_Air Worksheets

Displayed below are sample AUM_Air worksheets. Note the following details
about AUM_air and these sample worksheets:
 sheets are non-functional
 all worksheets visible to the user have the version number printed at the
bottom of the sheet
 the project illustrated is Aspen Process Economic Analyzer ETOH Sample
Project
 except for currency and exchange rate, sheets are in the user's units of
measure defined in the user's project specs
o currency is referred to as PCU - project currency unit
o you must enter an exchange rate when opening a project for
the first time. The exchange rate value will be "remembered"
on opening the project thereafter
o ControlCenter, Status and Preferences sheet will always
show an error because you must enter an exchange rate for the
currency of the project (hyperlinks lead the you from
ControlCenter to Status to Preferences to the item to be
revised)
o on entering a proper value, the error message is not displayed
List of AUM_Air Worksheets
 Welcome
 ControlCenter

 Guide
 Status
 Preferences
 Config_1
 Config_2
 EquipStats
 PipeStats
Welcome Worksheet
Control Center Worksheet

Guide Worksheet

Status Worksheet

Preferences Worksheet

Configuration Part 1: Assignment of Plant
Air to Areas Not Requiring Instrument Air
Configuration Part 2: Assignment of Areas

to an APU

Note: For clarity in this documentation, the following screen shot is shown
below the one above it. On the actual Config 2 Worksheet, they are side by
side.
Report – Equipment Component Stats

Report – Pipe Stats

11 Evaluating the Project
Running a Project Evaluation

After all the process simulator data has been properly mapped and defined,
you are ready to run a project evaluation. The project evaluation produces
capital costs, operating costs and investment analysis reports. If any of the
components are modified, the evaluation process must be re-run.
To run a project evaluation:
1 Click on the toolbar.

– or –
On the Run menu, click Evaluate Project.
The Evaluate Project dialog box appears.
The dialog box shows the default Capital Costs report file name, Cap_Rep.ccp.
This is the report reviewed in Icarus Editor. If you want it to have a different
name, type the file name in the Report File field.
2 Click OK.
scans the project specifications for errors and/or inconsistencies and any
11 Evaluating the Project 393

found are listed in the Scan Messages window.
Note: You can select in Preferences to skip the scan for errors (see
page 52).
X X
There are four types of messages:

Scan Message Description/Importance Level
INFOrmational For your information

WARNing Design can be produced, but you are alerted to problems
ERROR A design or cost cannot be produced for an item
FATAL Rare instance for extreme problems
You have the option to continue or stop the evaluation process (except in the
case of FATAL errors, which stop the evaluation process). You should carefully
review these and fix any problems before proceeding.
When the project evaluation is done, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer lists
all errors found in the capital cost evaluation for your reference.
automatically displays the Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the Main
Window when the evaluation is complete. See “Reviewing Investment
Analysis” on page 448 for a description of these spreadsheets.
X X
Note: You can select in Preferences not to have Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer automatically display the Investment Analysis (see page 52). X X

Reviewing and Revising
Process Economics in the
Analyzer Economics Module
The Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) includes an interactive economic
evaluation workbook, that allows you to review economic, scheduling, and
manufacturing premises and see the impact of revisions to those premises. It
displays in Excel key economic information over the project timeline to help
you evaluate projected operations and the return on investment.
Loading the Analyzer Economics Module

(AEM)
To initiate an economic scenario, first load the AEM.
To load AEM:
1 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer.
2 On the Decision Analyzer dialog box, mark the Develop Detailed Process
Economics Reports check box.
3 Enter the desired reporting currency symbol to use for the reporting of all
costs.
4 If the plant location currency is different from the currency used on the
reports, enter the exchange rate as the ratio of Report Currency/Plant
Location Currency.
5 Click OK.
In Excel, two workbook files open: SPECS and RESULTS.

Overview of Workbooks
In addition to showing you the economic analysis of the current project basis,
the workbooks allow you to instantly see the impact that revisions to the
basis will have on economic measurements. For example, you can revise the
required working capital percentage on the Project Input worksheet in SPECS
and, as a result, the Cash Flow bar chart on the Figures worksheet in
RESULTS will change to reflect this revision. This is explained in detail in the
“Revising Premises” section, page 405.
X X
SPECS Workbook
The SPECS workbook consists of the following worksheets, which you can
navigate by clicking the sheet tabs at the bottom of the workbook window:
Guide
The Guide provides you with an online reminder of helpful information, which
you may refer to during an interactive scenario session:
 Purpose of Analyzer's Economics Module (AEM) and what AEM does.
 The three classes of information from which AEM works.
 The two workbooks for new scenario premises.
 Details on the worksheets containing input.
 Details on the worksheets containing results.
 Strategy - how to use this module effectively for evaluating business and
economic options.
Control Panel
The Control Panel allows you to revise high-level stream premises. It features
spinner controls and reset buttons, enabling you to change unit prices and
instantaneously see the resulting economic metrics and graphed results.

Key economic metrics displayed include: graphs of net present value (NPV)
and annual production revenue, payout date, Internal Rate of Return (IRR),
NPV over project lifetime, gross, operating and net revenue margins.
Decision Center
The Decision Center is AEM's navigator. It enables you to move quickly across
all of AEM's user-interactive worksheets, all of which are included in horizontal
format. To view all the worksheets in a vertical format, use the DC_V
worksheet.
Both the horizontal and vertical formats enable you to quickly locate high
level and lower level categories and the ultimate worksheet locations.
Important error messages are displayed on the Decision Center header.
An NPV graph displays the current state of the scenario including high-level
error messages with pointers to error locations.
DC_V
This worksheet contains the same content as the Decision Center worksheet
in a vertical format.
Input Worksheets
The two input worksheets are for user-interactive revisions to premises. They
define your economic scenario. Revisions are immediately reflected in the
Status, Statements, EPC, and Figures worksheets. See page 405 for
X X
information on revising economic premises.

Project Input
In the Project Input worksheet, you can revise the schedule, time periods,
capital investment, cost of capital investment, phase durations, capital cost
parameters, manufacturing cost parameters, operating labor and
maintenance cost parameters, general investment parameters, and
escalation.
The following is an excerpt:
Stream Input
In the Stream Input worksheet, you can revise the stream factor to determine the
impact of turndown, turnarounds or a proposed expansion; split production into a
domestic and export stream with their associated unit prices; revise prices of by-
products, raw materials, and utilities. An important aspect of the Stream Input
worksheet is the use of periodically changing values of stream factor, unit costs
and percent to export. This feature will enable you to study the impact of market
cycles and identify economic threats and opportunities related to production over
the life of the project.
Status Worksheet
View the Status worksheet for a quick summary of which values on the input
worksheets have been revised, need correction, or are incomplete.

The Status worksheet also displays a panel board
graph of Net Present Value (NPV) and summary
status report of project and stream input
conditions and major economic indicators to help
guide the analyst.
Capture Worksheet
The Capture worksheet and its initiating buttons
enables you to review and capture highlights of up
to 50 economic scenarios. A set of buttons is
provided to initiate the capture of current scenario
highlights in advance of working on the next
scenario.
RESULTS Workbook
The RESULTS workbook consists of six worksheets, which you can navigate by
clicking the sheet tabs at the bottom of the workbook window.
The following is an overview of the worksheets.
EPC Worksheet
The EPC worksheet provides before and after information regarding the
engineering, procurement and construction aspects of your project. The term
“before” refers to the state of your project based on your initial premises,
prior to interactively changing from one scenario to another in Analyzer’s
Economic Module. The EPC workbook provides costs in both the currency of
the plant location and a user-defined “reporting currency. For example, if your
project were modeled using the European Union country base (EU, currency
in Euro) and you wished to see costs reported in Euro for a project relocated
to Mexico (reporting currency in k-Peso), you could define the reporting
currency to be Euro and enter the desired exchange rate between the Euro
and k-Peso. You would define the reporting currency and exchange rate along
with the relocation country, at Run time. The EPC worksheet would report
plant location costs in both Euro and k-Peso. This worksheet currently
provides the only connection between costs in the country base currency and
plant location currency.
The EPC worksheet provides the following information:
 EPC results based on the initial premises (before the scenario)
o Status of stream data
o Exchange rate used to compute plant location costs in the
country base currency
o Summary costs, man-hours in both plant location and country
base currencies
o EPC start and end dates
o Breakouts of costs and man-hour for direct materials,
engineering and construction and project indirects.

 EPC scenario results and key economic measures
o Economic measures: NPV, IRR, payout time, average annual
production over the life of the project
o Summary and detailed cost and man-hour information resulting
from changes during the interactive session.

Project Basis
The Project Basis worksheet provides project name, project description,
simulator type, capital cost evaluation and parameters, time periods,
construction schedule, manufacturing cost parameters, operating labor and
maintenance cost parameters, general investment parameters, escalation,
cost summary, and EPC details based on your initial economic premises.
Design Basis
The Design Basis worksheet provides summary-level presentations of income,
product revenue, manufacturing costs, margins, raw material costs, utility
costs, and earnings based on your initial economic premises.

Statements Worksheet
The Statements worksheet, like the EPC, Status and Figures worksheets,
shows results of changes made in the Input worksheets.
 Timeline of events (dates, periods).
 Payout time, IRR, NPV.
 Present values for individually selected production periods.
 Period-to-period statements with a display of results for a selectable
production period: income-expense statement, summary cash flow
statement, capital expenditures statement, margins, and NPV graph.

Figures Worksheet
The Figures worksheet, like the EPC, Status and Statements worksheets,
shows results of changes made in the Input worksheets.
 Flows, by Calendar Period: Net and Cumulative Cash Flow, Margins, Gross
and Operating and Net Income as a % of Revenue, Product Revenues:
Domestic and Export.
 Production: Domestic and Export.
 Distributions, for a selected Production Period: Product Revenues,
Manufacturing Costs, Operating Costs, Fixed Charges.
The following is an example of one of the distribution graphs on the Figures
worksheet:

Revising Premises
The premises on which an economic scenario is based can be modified on the
Project Input and Stream Input worksheets. The results of modifications are
immediately reflected on the Status, Statements, and Figures worksheets.
Note: Revisions made in the workbook have no impact on the actual project
basis.
To revise premises:
1 Select either the Project Input or Stream Input worksheet.
2 Go to the Select field of the item you wish to change. Pressing TAB moves
the cursor to the next field, while pressing CLEAR+TAB moves the cursor
to the previous field. You can also use the mouse and arrow keys.
The Select field can contain one of the following symbols (not case-sensitive):
Enter To denote
B Use of base value.
R Use of revised value.
P Use of period-to-period values on the Stream Input
worksheet.
For example, changing the symbol from “B” to “R” acts as a toggle between
the base and revised value.
In the event a symbol is not entered, the base value will be used.

3 As this is an exercise in revising premises, enter “R” (or “r”) in the Select
field.
4 Go to the input field and enter the new value. For percentage values,
simply enter the percentage value. If 0.2% is to be entered, enter 0.2. If
50% is required, enter 50. If a negative value is required, for example to
indicate construction is to begin 0.5 periods early, enter a negatively
signed value, –0.5.
As you make revisions, notes and other messages are provided to assure data
integrity. Each line item of data entry has at least one status “flag.”
Informational and other messages are provided to guide you in preparing a
consistent set of premises.
Revised value of 10.00% will

be used.
Flag field displays “?” and

Status of Revision field displays
“FIX!” because “r” has been
entered without a revised value
Base value will be used
As soon as you move from the revised field, the revision is reflected in the
Status, EPC, Statements, and Figures worksheets.
Note: Viewing the workbooks in a split screen arrangement lets you instantly
see the results of modifications. To do so, click Arrange on the Window menu,
select Horizontal, and click OK. You will likely need to adjust the zoom to
about 50%. Keep ECOSYS.xls minimized.
For example, if you revise the required working capital percentage on the
Project Input worksheet (shown in window at the top of the split screen
pictured below), the Cash Flow bar chart on the Figures worksheet (shown in
the lower window) will change.

Color Coding
 Base Values: green background, black text.
 Revised Values: blue background, black text.
 Status Values: yellow background, red text.
 Text Notes: blue text.
 Error Messages: yellow background, red text and flag symbols.
 Dates of key events: blue background, red text.
Saving AEM Workbook

To save changes to AEM worksheets, it is recommended that you save all
workbooks by closing Excel and answering Yes when prompted to save.
Saving the worksheets individually has been found to result in an error when
re-launching AEM.
Discussion of Economic Premises

The AEM workbooks organize economic premises into two main categories:
project and stream input. This section describes the concepts behind the
various parameters.
Project Input
As described previously, base values are listed to the right of the item
category. The Select field and Enter Revised Base Value field enable alternate
studies. First, enter either an “R” (not case-sensitive) in the Select field to
revise the base value. Then enter a revised value in the Enter Revised Base
Value field. You can then enter a “B” (not case-sensitive) in the Select field to

switch between revised and base value. The Value Used field shows the
current status of your selection.
The following provides additional information about the individual parameters.
Scenario Reporting
 Title and date data: will be displayed in the headers of the various
worksheets and in the footer of the Status worksheet.
 Currency for Scenario Reporting: every cost value in the Economic
Analysis workbook will be in the Reporting Currency and converted from
the plant location currency by the designated exchange rate.
 Plant Location Currency: costs in country base location currency are
developed by the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) and are revised by
Analyzer’s Relocation Module (ARM). Costs in the plant location currency
are reported only in the EPC worksheet if the user elects a reporting
currency.
 Reporting Currency: this currency is defined upon entering the Analyzer’s
interactive Economics Module along with an exchange rate relative to the
plant location currency. The exchange rate may be changed, within limits,
in the Project Input worksheet. This will enable a user to trend a project
over a period of time, should exchange rates vary from the initial premise.
Costs in the reporting currency are reported in all worksheets.
 Exchange rate: number of currency units of Reporting Currency per unit of
Plant Location Currency. The exchange rate may be modified in the
Project Input worksheet to reflect a more current or anticipated future
value.
 Reporting of Cash flows: in millions of reporting currency units.
Schedule
A timeline is established with a calendar start date to enable the study of
economic cycles and report the timing of events. A base calendar start date is
automatically generated to accommodate the base start date of engineering.
However, as new premises are added, the lead-time between start of
calendar and start of engineering may be too short to accommodate other
efforts such as studies and changes to the fixed capital investment. Or, you
may wish to base your reporting calendar on a calendar year basis or your
company’s fiscal year. Once you select the start date of the reporting
calendar, you might wish to review your initial premise for the start date of
engineering.
The engineering start date may be modified as well as the calendar start date.
Messages are provided in this section for lead-time, pre-planning time and
float to help you to establish timing of other events (see next section on
Capital Investment).
 Start Date of the Reporting Calendar: defines (a) the project timeline, (b)
enables the escalation to the start date of the calendar of costs entering
the workbook from Analyzer that are founded on the “System Cost Base
Date”, and (c) enables the dating of tasks and events, including:
o Strategic planning and decision engineering
o Contractor’s engineering and procurement

o Construction delay/early start of construction
o Plant Start-up
o Start of Production
o Payout
o End of production, salvage of fixed capital investment (FCI),
return of working capital, salvage of catalyst and chemicals,
etc.
 Start Date of Engineering.
 Status of the calendar: lead time, planning time, float time and other
helpful status messages.
Time Period
 Period: the designated period is a year. Only yearly periods can be
accommodated with this release.
 Hours per period: determines stream factor, stream flows per period. Your
initial premise may be revised in the Stream Input worksheet.
Capital Investment
 Decision Engineering Studies: duration is developed from the cost entry
and placed on the timeline.
 Owner’s Engineering: duration is developed from the cost entry and
placed on the timeline.
 Increment/Decrement to FCI (fixed capital investment, also known as
total installed cost, total project cost) at the System Base Date: enables
studies of FCI such as the trade-off between inside and outside battery
limits (ISBL/OSBL), plant capacity (with associated change in stream
factor – see Stream Input), and impact of FCI changes during engineering
on process economics, etc. Consider two uses of this feature (1) to
determine the impact on IRR and NPV of a 10% increase in capital cost
and (2) making a utility stream by adding more capital and setting the
utility stream cost to zero. A change here will impact the phase duration of
engineering, procurement and construction as well as their expenditures
along the timeline. In the AEM workbooks, FCI undergoes a number of
adjustments from the time it is evaluated by the Icarus Evaluation Engine
(IEE), as follows and as reported in the EPC worksheet:
o Initial evaluation in Analyzer performed by applying design and
cost specifications to the list of project components for the
specified production capacity of the process facility and plant
location.
o In the AEM workbooks:
 Currency revision of FCI from the Plant Location
Currency to the Reporting Currency, using exchange
rate first established during Plant Relocation and then
under Scenario Reporting in AEM.
 Escalation from “System Base Date” to the Start Date of
the Calendar.
 Percentage Increment/Decrement adjustment (this
section).

 Escalation of engineering, materials, construction to the
period of expenditure as determined by the duration of
each phase, progress of each phase duration, and
position along the timeline.
 Start-up costs: included as a capital expense, range of typical values: 8%
to 10% of FCI.
Phase Durations
 Duration of EPC Phase: base value, from Analyzer (CPM-based planning
schedule).
 Delay or Early Start of Construction: enables study of impact of delay
prior to start of construction or early start. The planning schedule includes
early start. Analyzer splits construction from EPC duration to enable
delays to be studied. A negative delay value results in an early start. As
phase durations are revised, so too are dates of key events along the
timeline. As stream flows and expenditures are moved along the entire
time line by changes in phase durations (or other revisions), they will be
evaluated for escalation or unit costs/prices that are assigned to each
period.
Capital Cost Parameters

 Working Capital, as a percentage of fixed capital investment (FCI). The
range of typical values is 10% to 25% of FCI (10% to 20% of the total
investment, i.e. the sum of FCI and working capital), but you can enter
any percentage. A range of typical values is provided for guidance.
 Catalyst and Chemicals: for the initial charge, as a percentage of FCI and
salvage value at the end of production.
 Patents and Royalties, as an initial fee and/or fee, escalated for each
period of production and figured on the production for each period.
 Land: range of typical values: 1% to 2% of FCI.
Manufacturing Cost Parameters

 Operating Charges: if no base value is provided, Analyzer will estimate
and report a cost value based on Plant Operating Labor. It will split
operating charges into costs for Operating Supplies and Laboratory
Charges, which values may be revised individually as a percentage of
Operating Labor.
 Range of typical values
o Operating Supplies: 10% to 20% of Maintenance
o Laboratory Charges: 10% to 20% of Operating Labor
Note: Typical ranges do not define limits on user entry.
Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs

 Number of Shifts: base value determined by project components, type of
facility, etc. might be revised, especially if Increment/Decrement is made
to FCI.
 Operator: number of operators and hourly rate may be revised from the
base value; Total Operating Labor Cost is displayed.

 Supervision: Number of Supervisors and hourly rate may be revised; Total
Supervision Cost is displayed.
 Maintenance: Cost/period is displayed and is reported as a percentage of
FCI, which % may be revised; range of typical values: 2% to 10% of FCI.

Base values for the following items come from your system input and may be
revised in AEM:
 Tax Rate.
 Interest Rate: used in calculating net present values and payout time.
 Economic Life of Project: defines the time for depreciation and should be
the same as production life.
 Salvage Value, as a fraction of the initial capital cost. This value is
recovered at the end of the project life.
 Depreciation Method: select from Straight Lines, sum of the Digits, Double
Declining (Balance).
Escalation
Base values of the following items come from your system input and may be
revised.
 Project Capital Evaluation, a single value is expanded in AEM for individual
treatment of expenditures along the calendar timeline for:
o Engineering
o Materials
o Construction
 Product Escalation: individually for domestic and export product; period-
to-period price/cost values take priority over escalation.
 By-products: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual by-product
take priority over escalation for that by-product.
 Raw Materials: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual raw
material take priority over escalation for that raw material.
 Utilities: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual utility take
priority over escalation for that utility.
 General: for remaining categories.
Stream Input
This worksheet allows you to revise base values (assigned or default) for
product, by-product, raw material and utility streams. Either a single value,
applicable to every period (subject to escalation if a cost), or a period-to-
period value (not subject to escalation) may be assigned. Indicate use of base
(“B”), revised (“R”) for a single value for all periods, or individual period-to-
period values (“P”). Symbols are not case-sensitive.

Phases Along the Project Timeline
The following resulting values guide other input specifications.
 Phase.
 Phase duration.
 Start date.
 Fraction of a period devoted to each phase along the calendar timeline,
which includes the following:
o Start date of each period.
o Year: displayed with each section to maintain integrity of
period-to-period input data.
o Calendar Periods: Period (year) from the start of basic
engineering.
o Periods of Operation – year from start-up.
 Start-up, Payout, Shutdown dates.
Production Operations
Stream Factor, to study the impact of turndown and expansion.
Production
Price of domestic and export product and percentage of production devoted to
export product. The production capacity is reported for reference.
By-Products
Price of each by-product. By-product rates are reported for the designated
production capacity. The current version is limited to reporting 25 by-
products.
Raw Materials
Price of each raw material. Consumption of each raw material is reported for
designated production capacity. The current version is limited to reporting 25
raw materials.
Utilities
Price of each utility; for ISBL/OSBL studies, consider revising an ISBL utility
stream cost in lieu of its production by an OSBL unit and revision of the FCI
(Project Input>Capital Investment>Increment/Decrement to FCI) to account
for the OSBL unit’s FCI – Consumption of each utility is reported for
designated production capacity.

Reviewing Results in Aspen
Icarus Reporter
Accessing Aspen Reporter
To access Aspen Icarus Reporter:

– or –
On the View menu, click Capital Costs View.
The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.
2 Keep Interactive Reports selected and click OK.

The Reporter imports and loads the reports from Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer.

After the reports are loaded, the Aspen Icarus Reporter window appears.
Reporter lets you select and run multiple Standard reports or Excel reports or
Update On Demand reports. These selections can be remembered by clicking
the Remember Selections button shown in the figure below. These
selections are retained and shown the next time the Reporter application is
run. In V7.3, reporter remembers these selections product as well as project
wise.
In V7.2 and prior versions the selections are cleared once the reports are
displayed. In V7.3 these selections are retained until you choose to do
otherwise.

Remembering selections product wise
In V7.2 and prior versions, reporter does not remember these selections
product wise separately and only remembers the last selections made among
all the three Economic Evaluation Products (Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator and Aspen Economic Analyzer). In V7.3, this
limitation has been removed and reporter can remember the selections for all
the three types of products separately.
When a reporter application is run on a newly created project, last
remembered selections (if any) for that product type are shown by default.
Similarly, for an existing unsaved project last remembered selections (if any)
for that product type are shown by default.

Remembering selections project wise
In V7.3, you can save selections product wise as well. These selections
remembered by clicking Remember Selections can be saved permanently
with the project by selecting the File | Save menu item or clicking the Save
Project toolbar button on the main Economic Evaluation frame window.
When the reporter is invoked on such a saved project, it retains the selections
saved with the project.
Note: Clicking Remember Selections saves or updates the selections for

the current report mode (Standard Reports or Excel Reports or Update
On Demand) only. If you want to save or update the selections for other
type of reports then you need to select that report type and then click
Remember Selections after selecting the reports.
Clear these selections before adding or removing any new custom reports.
Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar

File Menu
Import Data – Import project reports. See page 437 for instructions.
X X
Run Report – Run selected report. See pages 417 (Standard reports), 430 (Excel reports),
X X X X
and 425 (HTML reports) for instructions.

X X
Open Workbook – Open the last Excel workbook created. See page 433 for instructions. X X
Create User Database – Export SQL database. See page 438 for instructions.
X X
Exit – Close Aspen Icarus Reporter.

Trend Menu
Add Trend Data to Database – Add the trend data from the project reports currently loaded
in Aspen Icarus Reporter to the trending database. See page 434 for instructions.
X X
Create New Trend in Excel – Export trending database to Excel. See page 435 for X X
instructions.
View Existing Trend Data – Open the trending data workbook in Excel. See “Data Trending,”
pages 433 through 437, for instructions
X X X X
Clear All Saved Trends – Clear the trending database. See page 434 for instructions.
X X
Which Report Mode?

There are four report modes: Standard reports, HTML reports, Management
reports, and Excel reports. All but Management reports present Capital Costs
and Design and Basis reports. Management reports contains snapshots of
project data frequently requested by project management.
Standard, HTML, and Excel reports do not just present the same data in
different applications. Because of the differing capabilities of the applications,
data is presented differently in each. The choice of mode may depend upon
what you wish to do with the data at a particular time.

Standard Reports
With Standard reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports
section displays a tree-structure grouping of standard reports.
Report Descriptions
Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on a report
to display a brief description of that report in the Description section.
Aspen ICARUS Reporter displays a description of the selected report.

See page 421 for descriptions of all Standard reports.
X X
Opening a Report
Not all of the reports contain each of the features described in this guide. For
example, the Contents view only appears on reports with multiple sections.
In order to see all the features described, select the Contractor – COA
Summary report located in the following folder:
Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\COA Summaries
To open the selected report:

 Click the Run Report button .
- or -

On the File menu, click Run Report.
- or -
Double-click on the report.
The report window appears.
Navigating
If there are multiple sections, a tree-structure Contents view appears on the
left side of the window, allowing you to jump to a section simply by clicking
the section in the Contents.
The arrow buttons on the toolbar let you page through the report:
Next Page Previous Page
Last Page First Page

Because the last page of a report usually contains the totals, clicking the Last
Page button is a convenient way to access them.
Magnification
To change the magnification level:

1 In the Magnification box, click , then click the desired level from the
menu.

Note: You can also click directly in the Magnification box (without clicking
) and then zoom in and out using the up and down arrow keys on your
keyboard.
2 When viewing the report at large magnification, you may wish to hide the
Contents view by clicking the Toggle Group Tree button . This makes
more room for the report.
Segregating a Cost Section

If the cursor changes into a magnifying glass icon when placed over a cost
section’s title or totals, you can double-click to open a separate tab window
containing only that cost section.
For example, under Civil in the Contractor – COA Summaries report, the
cursor changes into a magnifying glass when placed over the Concrete cost
section’s title or totals.
Double-clicking on this cost section’s titles or totals opens a separate tab

window.

Here, the Equipment cost section is displayed in a separate tab window,
where it can be viewed and printed apart from the rest of the report.
Searching
To search the report:

2 Type the text string for which you want to search.
3 Click Find Next.
The next instance of the text string is framed in red.
Printing
To print the report:

The Print dialog box appears.
2 Make any desired changes to the default settings; then click OK.

List of Standard Reports

HTML Reports
With HTML reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section
displays a tree-structure grouping of HTML reports.
Report Descriptions

Opening an HTML Report
To open the selected report:

 Click the Run Report button.
– or –
 On the File menu, click Run Report.
– or –
 Double-click on the report.
A status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if you would
like to view the report now.
2 Click Yes.
Your browser displays the report.

Note: Generating the report as an .htm file allows the report to be sent in an
e-mail.
Management Reports
With Management Reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports
section displays a tree-structure grouping of Management reports. These
reports are intended to serve as snapshots of the project scenario.
Opening a Management Report
To open a Management report:

1 Select the report.
 Click the Run Report button.
- or -
 On the File menu, click Run Report.
- or -
 Double-click on the report.
The Management Reports Viewer displays the report. Pictured below is the
Detailed Weight Information report, one of the Piping reports in the
Discipline folder.

Other reports, like the Equipment Cost (Total Cost) report shown below,
show simply a bottom-line total.
Exporting Management Reports to Excel

You can export Management reports to Excel. This is particularly useful for
when you want to be able to e-mail the report.
To export a Management report to Excel:

1 Click Export to Excel on the Viewer’s File menu.
Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a report.
 If no existing workbook is found, Reporter asks you to specify a worksheet
name (see step 3) and creates a workbook – either DefaultWB.xls in the
Reporter output folder (if this is your first export to Excel since last re-
booting) or a workbook with the file and path name of the last workbook
to which you exported since starting your computer.
 If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog box
appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook, append
the report to the existing workbook, or create a new workbook.

Select To do this
Overwrite existing Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as
workbook the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to existing Add the report as another worksheet in the existing
workbook workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.
Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will
appear as a worksheet.
Clicking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you select a
folder and enter a file name.
Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook
name.
2 Make your selection; then click OK.

3 Enter a name for the worksheet.
4 Click OK.
The Export Status dialog box informs you when the export is done and asks
if you would like to open the workbook now.
5 Click Yes to open the workbook.

Excel displays the report.
Excel Reports
With Excel reports selected in the Report Mode section, the Reports section
displays a tree-structure grouping of Excel reports.

Report Descriptions
Aspen ICARUS Reporter displays a description of the selected Excel report.
Opening an Excel Report
To open a report:
1 Select the check box next to the desired report.
You can select multiple report check boxes to open multiple reports.
Marking a folder’s checkbox will open all of the reports in the folder.
2 Click the Run Report button or click Run Report on the File menu.
Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you exported a report.
 If no existing workbook is found and this is your first export to Excel
during this session, Reporter creates DefaultWB.xls in the Reporter
output folder:

...Economic Evaluation V7.3\ic_cache\Reporter\Output
 If no existing workbook is found, but you have exported from Reporter to
Excel since you last started you computer (to a file that’s since been
moved or deleted), Reporter creates a workbook with the file and path
name of the last workbook to which you exported.
 If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel Workbook dialog
box appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing workbook,
append the report to the existing DefaultWB.xls workbook, or create a
new workbook.
Select To do this
Overwrite existing Reset the existing workbook with the selected report as
workbook the only worksheet; any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to existing Add the report as another worksheet in the existing
workbook workbook; previously created worksheets will be retained.
Create new workbook Specify a new workbook in which the selected report will
appear as a worksheet.
Selecting Create new workbook expands the dialog box to let you enter a
workbook path and name.

Note: Do not enter a file extension or period when entering a new workbook
name.
After you make your selection and click OK, Excel opens a workbook
displaying the report.

Note: Exporting the report to an .xls file allows it to be sent in an e-mail.
AutoFilter
Several of the larger Excel reports generated by Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer take advantage of the AutoFilter feature in Excel.
To view a report that includes AutoFilter:

 Open the following report:
Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\Item Summaries\Combined
When AutoFilter is available, clicking next to a column displays a list of all
the different entries made in the column. Selecting an entry displays only
rows that contain that entry in the column.
For example, selecting 105 – Misc. Item Allowance in the COA

Description column of the Item Summary Combined report would display
only accounts with Code of Account (COA) 105.
Selecting Top Ten displays only items that contain one of the top ten most
frequent entries.
Selecting Blanks (from the bottom of the list) displays only rows that contain
a blank cell in the column, while selecting NonBlanks displays only rows that
contain a value in the column.
Opening Workbook Without Running Report
To view the last workbook created without running a new report:

 On the File menu, click Open Workbook.
Data Trending
Data Trending facilitates comparison of scenarios by allowing you to review
capital cost summaries of different scenarios in a single Excel workbook. If,

for example, you created three different scenarios for a project, you could use
the Data Trending feature to display the direct costs of each on one
spreadsheet, with a separate row for each scenario.
Clearing Trending Database

Because you only want to compare certain scenarios, the first step is usually
to clear the database used to populate the Excel trending workbook.
To clear the trending database:

1 On the Trend menu, click Clear All Saved Trends.
2 Click Yes to confirm clearing of the data.

The Trending Data Update dialog box tells when this is done.
3 Click OK.
Adding Trend Data to Database

The next step is to add trend data to the database.
To add the current project reports’ trend data to the database:

1 On the Trend menu, click Add Trend Data to Database.
The Trending Data Update dialog box tells you when Reporter has finished
adding the trend data.

2 Click OK.
You will need to add the trend data from the project reports of the other
scenarios you are comparing. For each of the other scenarios, open the
reports in Reporter and complete the Adding Trend Data to Database
instructions above.
Using Reporter’s import function, you can open the other scenarios’ reports
in Reporter without opening the scenarios in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer. See page 437 for instructions.
X X
Creating a New Trend in Excel

After you have added the trend data from the Capital Cost reports of the
scenarios you are comparing, you are ready to create a new trend in Excel.
To create a new trend in Excel:

1 On the Trend menu, click Create New Trend in Excel.
The Export to Excel Trending Workbook dialog box gives you the choice of
either appending the trend data to the existing file or creating a new file.
2 Make you selection; then click OK.

The Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box appears. By default, all six
capital cost categories are marked.

3 Clear any categories you want to exclude from the workbook; then click
OK.
The Export Status window tells you when the export is complete and asks if
you would like to open the trending workbook now.
4 Click Yes.
Excel displays the trending workbook containing a spreadsheet for each of the
capital cost categories. Each set of trend data entered into the trending
database is displayed on a separate row. (The workbooks for any categories
excluded at the Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box are blank).

5 After having created the trending workbook, you can access it from
Reporter by clicking View Existing Trend Data on the View menu.
Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter

When you have a project scenario open in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
and select Capital Costs (Interactive) from Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer, Reporter automatically imports that project scenario’s Capital Cost
reports as it opens.
However, once you’re at the Aspen Icarus Reporter window, you can
import a project scenario’s Capital Cost reports without having the project
scenario open in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
To import a Capital Cost report:

1 Click Import Data on the File menu.
The Import Selection dialog box appears.

2 Use the browse tree to locate the project scenario folder, which should be
at:
…Archives_Aspen Process Economic Analyzer\[Project]\[Project Scenario]
After clicking the project scenario folder, PROJID should appear in the File
set to import section.
3 Click PROJID; then click Import.
Reporter imports the data. When complete, the selected scenario’s reports
can be run from Reporter.
Creating a User Database

You can export the Icarus SQL Database, listing the Relation attributes used
by the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE), to a Microsoft Access Database (.mdb)
file.
ICARUS Reference, Chapter 35, “Database Relations”, defines the ICARUS
Database Relations and the different attributes under each.
To create a user database:

1 Click Create User Database on the File menu.
Reporter searches for the last .mdb file it created.
 If the file is not found or if this is your first database creation, the Create
User Database dialog box appears with only one Export Option: Create
New Workbook. The lower part of the dialog box provides fields for
selecting a path and filename.
 However, if the last created file is found, the Export Options also include
Overwrite Existing Workbook. This option is marked by default, so the
lower part of the dialog box is not visible until you select the Create New
Workbook check box.

2 Select a folder, enter a database name, and then click OK.
Reporter creates the .mdb file.
3 To review and work with the database, start Microsoft Access and open
the .mdb file.
Reviewing Results in Icarus

Editor
Icarus Editor is a fully OLE-compliant, Multiple Document Interface (MDI) text
editor program.
Accessing Icarus Editor

To view Capital Costs in Icarus Editor:

– or –
 Click Capital Costs View on the View menu.
2
T On the Select Report Type To View dialog box, click Evaluation
T
Reports; then click OK.

Icarus Editor opens displaying the Capital Cost report.
The right-hand pane contains the report and the left-hand pane contains a
tree-structure Contents view that lets you jump to sections of the report.
Note: Click on the toolbar to turn the Contents view on and off (or click
Contents on the View menu).
Printing a Single Section

The Contents view also lets you print a single section, rather than the entire
report.
To print a single section:

 Right-click on a section; then click the Print button that appears.
Icarus Editor Toolbar

New – open a new document in the Document View

Open – open an existing document
Save – save current document to disk
File Properties – view selected properties of current document
Print – print the current document
Print Preview – print preview the current document
Page Setup – specify how the current document will be printed
Cut – cut selected text to windows clipboard
Copy – copy selected text to windows clipboard
Paste – paste contents of windows clipboard into insertion location
Bold – bold selected text
Italic – italicize selected text
Underline – underline selected text
Select Font – specify font for selected text
Find (CTRL+F) – find any text string within the current document
Preferences – set and save your preferences
Toggle Contents – turn OFF/ON the Contents View
Cascade – display multiple documents cascaded
Tile Horizontal – display multiple documents tiled horizontally
Tile Vertical – display multiple documents tiled vertically
Help Contents – display on-line help
Report Sections
Title Page
Two title pages are produced. This way, if the report is being printed on fan-
fold paper, one of the title pages will be produced on a page facing up.

Features
 Estimate Base: financial quarter from which cost basis is derived and date
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) was produced. Run Date: Date and time
that project evaluation was run.
 The currency symbol used in the report.
 Telephone numbers to call for technical support.
Contract Structure
The Contract Structure section provides names of contractors and reporting
arrangement.
Table of Contents
The Table of Contents lists section names and the page number on which
each starts. The number of sections may vary depending on the number of
Report Groups. If the project contains only one, then there will be only a
single summary. If more than one, there will be a separate summary for
each, plus a summary for the total project.
Project Summary
The
e Project Summary provides an overview of project costs.

Project Data Sheet
The Project Data Sheet lists items with separate columns showing user-
user
entered values and system default values.
Total Manpower Schedule

The Total Manpower Schedule shows construction manpower loading based on
the CPM Construction Schedule.

Ways to influence this schedule include:
 Adjusting productivities, shifts per day, length of the workweek using the
General Rates specifications form and the Craft Rates specifications form.
These forms are accessed in Project Basis view under Project Basis\Basis
Basis
for Capital Costs
Costs\Construction Workforce.
 Indexing man
man-hours either at the Project level (Project Basis\Basis
Basis for
Capital Costs\\Indexing) or at the Area level.
The number of MEN PER DAY for each vertical bar is generated by summing the
labor assigned to all the work items that fall within the period represented by
that bar in the barchart.
Cash Flow Summary

The Cash Flow Summary shows total capital cost spent.

This barchart schedule assumes that the DESIGN ENG’G AND PROCUREMENT
monies are already spen
spent at the start of construction - the curve is not truly
tied to the CPM schedule. During construction, capital is then spent for
material, direct field labor, equipment rental and subcontract work, Home and
Field Office, Start
Start-up, etc., as the cost is incurred.
rred. By the end of construction,
the TOTAL,AMOUNT given in the Project Summary is indicated here.
Operating costs, such as start
start-up
up utilities, raw materials, initial catalyst
charges, etc., are not included.
Project Schedule Data Sheet

The Project Schedul
Schedule Data Sheet lists the fabrication and ship times for
equipment items by class and provides barcharts of the following:
General Schedule
Schedule: Balanced display
ay of Basic and Detail Engineering,
Procurement and Construction (EPC).
Engineering Schedule
Schedule: Details for Basic and Detail Engineering and
Procurement; summary for Construction.
Construction Schedu
Schedule: Details for Construction- others summarized.
Contracts Schedule: Schedule for contractor(s). When a single contractor is
performing all work, this schedule shows no new information.

Contract Summary
The Contract Summary breaks costs down by contractor.
Summaries By Report Group

Summaries By Report Group provides the direct material and labor costs and
manhours by report group for all areas reporting to that group.
List of Equipment and Bulk Material By Area

For each Area, the Equipment and Bulk Material List is divided into three
sections. First there is the Component List, followed by the Area Bulk Report,
Report
and finally the Area Data Sheet. Following the last Area off each Report Group,
there are two more reports - the Report Group Summary and the Report
Group Equipment Summary.
Appendix A- Design Data Sheets

Appendix A contains the Design Data Sheets for those items which are heavily
designed by the system
system- fewer items will have Design Data Sheets than are
listed in the Component List, above, which lists all user
user-added
added components.
Since the Design Data Sheet details the design on which the cost and
installation labor is based, it is especially useful during calibration
calibratio of the
system’s material costs and manman-hours.
hours. It helps you compare your
benchmark item to Icarus’ on an “apples
“apples-to-apples” basis.

Appendix B- Detailed Bulk Material and Field Manpower Listing
Appendix B lists the design and cost details for every component, whether
system-generated or user-added. The results are reported in the sequence
that the items appear in the Area tree diagram.
Appendix C- Bulk Material and Field Manpower Summary- by Report

Group
Appendix C consists of one summary of the material and manpower man-
hours and cost for all direct costs in the project. There is one report per
Report Group; if there is only one Report Group, then this report is
eliminated. It is replaced by the project bill of material (see Appendix D
description below).
Appendix D –Bulk Material and Field Manpower Summary - Total

Project
Appendix D is a project bill of material (BOM). The format summarizes total
direct costs for all accounts. Due to the fact that the numbers are large, this
is the best source of material costs and man-hours for calibration.
Appendix E – Direct Material and Manpower Summary by Major

Account - Total Project
Appendix E lists the Icarus default units of measure as well as any user
modifications.
Reviewing Investment Analysis

You can view the Investment Analysis results generated by Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer in two modes:
1 View the results in the Main Icarus Window (ICS spreadsheets).
2 View the results in MS Excel.
automatically displays the four Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the Main
Window after you run an evaluation. You can set Preferences so that Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer does not automatically display the spreadsheets,
in which case you would have to select to view them as described below.
Viewing Investment Analysis

To view the Investment Analysis in the Main Icarus Window (ICS
spreadsheets)

– or –
 On the View menu, click Investment Analysis View.

2 Use the tabs at the bottom of the window to move among the four
spreadsheets.
To view the Investment Analysis in MS Excel

1 On the main menu, click Tools | Options | View Spreadsheets in Excel.
2
T Do one of the following:

– or –
 On the View menu, click Investment Analysis View.
Note: In the Excel mode, additional spreadsheets are generated that report
details with regards to utilities, raw material and products. For instructions to
generate customized investment analysis reports, see Using the Reporting
Assistant in Excel mode, page 466.
X X
Equipment Summary
The Equipment Summary (EQUIP.ICS) contains a list of project components
used in the analysis.
For each component, the summary contains the following information:

Area Name: The name of the operational unit area.
Component Name: The name of the project component.
Component Type: The type symbol for the component.
Total Direct Cost: The total direct material and labor costs associated with the
project component (including installation bulks), in the project currency.
Equipment Cost: The bare equipment cost associated with the project
component.

Project Summary
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) contains a project summary for the capital
costs (equipment plus bulks) and schedule. This worksheet also includes
operating unit costs (labor wage rates and utility unit costs), utility flow/use
rates (steam/water flow rates, etc.) and operating and maintenance costs.
Project Summary Input Data

The following information on the Project Summary spreadsheet is user-
entered, except where noted:
Project Information
Project Name Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project name
Project Brief description of Aspen Process Economic
Description Analyzer project, from Project Properties
Analysis Date The date and time this analysis was performed
and Time
Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from which
process data was imported
Simulator The version of the process simulator
Version
Simulator Report The name of the process simulator report file
File
Simulator Report Date and time of the process simulator report file
Date
Economic The name of the Icarus system used for the
Analysis Type evaluation
Aspen Process Version number for Aspen Process Economic
Economic Analyzer system
Analyzer Version
Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer project

Scenario Name Name of the current scenario (if applicable)
Scenario Description of the current scenario, from Project
Description Title on the General Project Data form.
Capital Cost Evaluation Basis
Date Date of capital costs/schedule analysis
Country Country basis for the capital costs/schedule
analysis
Units of Measure Units of Measure for analysis
Currency (Cost) System currency symbol which depends on the
Symbol selected country basis
Currency Conversion factor between user-selected
Conversion Rate currency to the currency used by the system
internally for the selected Country basis. For
example, if the US country basis is selected, the
internal system currency is US Dollars.
Therefore, all numbers will be reported in US
Dollars. However, if a currency conversion rate
of 1.5 is specified, all internal values will be
multiplied by 1.5 and then reported
System Cost Base The capital costs basis date of the system. The
Date Adjusted Total Project Cost represents the
calculated capital cost of the project (calculated
at this base date) escalated to the Start Date of
Engineering.
Project Type Project type identified on General Specs form
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process
evaluator
Plant Location Location of the plant
Time Difference Number of days between the date of the
Between System system’s Cost Base data (for example, first
Cost Base Date quarter, 2000) and the project’s start date for
and Start Date for basic engineering.
Engineering
User Currency User assigned name for the currency
Name
User Currency User assigned description of the currency
Description
User Currency User assigned symbol of the currency. This is
Symbol the symbol used for reporting the cost results in
the reports.
Descriptions for the following parameters are provided in more detail under Investment Parameter
specifications (page 105).
X X
Time Period
Period Description Duration of time
Operating Hours Number of hours in specified period
per Period
Number of Weeks Number of weeks in specified period
per Period
Number of Periods Set to 20 periods for investment analysis

for Analysis
Schedule
Start Date for The beginning date for EPC (engineering,
Engineering procurement, and construction)
Duration of EPC The calculated EPC duration in weeks
Phase
Length of Start-up Number of weeks scheduled for start-up
Period beyond the end of the EPC phase
Duration of The calculated construction duration in weeks
Construction Phase
Completion Date for The calendar date for the end of EPC
Construction
Capital Costs Parameter
Working Capital Percentage of total capital expense per period
Percentage required to operate the facility until the
revenue from product sales is sufficient to
cover costs.
Operating Costs Parameters
Operating Supplies Indicates the lump-sum cost of operating
supplies.
Laboratory Charges Indicates the lump-sum cost of laboratory
charges.
User Entered Indicates the user-entered value for total
Operating Charges operating charges.
(as percentage)
Operating Charges Includes operating supplies and laboratory
(Percent of charges. If the user enters a lump-sum value
Operating Labor for either “Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory
Costs) Charges”, the addition of the two values will
override the “User Entered Operating Charges”
Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for
(Percent of services, facilities, payroll overhead, etc.
Operating Labor
and Maintenance
Costs)
G and A Expenses General and administrative costs incurred
(Percent of Subtotal during production such as administrative
Operating Costs) salaries/ expenses, R&D, product distribution
and sales costs.
Tax Rate The percent per period of earnings that must
be paid to the government.
Desired Rate of Indicates the desired (i.e., user- entered)
Return return rate, in percent per period, for the
investment.
Economic Life of Indicates the length of time in terms of periods
Project over which capital costs will be depreciated.
Salvage Value The expected value of an asset at the end of its
(Fraction of Initial usable life for the company. The difference

Capital Cost) between an asset’s cost and its salvage value
is the amount to be depreciated over the
asset’s usable life.
Depreciation There are four depreciation methods allowed in
Method Aspen Process Economic Analyzer: Straight
Line, Sum of the Digits, Double Declining
(Balance), Accelerated Cost Recovery System
(ACRS). See “Investment Parameters” in
Chapter 3 for a detailed definition of each
depreciation method.
Escalation
Project Capital Rate at which project capital expenses may
Escalation increase expressed in percent per period. If the
addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)
period and start-up period is greater than one
whole period, Project Capital Escalation is used
to escalate the capital expenses for periods
beyond the first period.
Products Escalation Rate at which the sales revenue from products
of the facility are to be escalated (increased) in
terms of percent per period.
Raw Material Rate at which the raw material costs of the
Escalation facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms
of percent per period.
Operating and Rate at which the operating and maintenance
Maintenance Labor costs of the facility are to be escalated
(increased) in terms of Escalation percent per
period. The operating labor costs include
operators per shift and supervisory costs.
Utilities Escalation User-entered percentages reflecting the
anticipated utility price increase each period.
Project Summary Output Data

The following OUTPUT data is generated by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
:
Project Results Summary

Total Project The total capital cost investment needed for
Capital Cost the project. If the calculated EPC period is
more than a year, the capital costs expenditure
will be spread out over the length of the EPC
period.
Total Raw Materials The total raw material cost of the facility ex
Cost pressed in terms of cost per period.
Total Products The total product sales of the facility expressed
Sales in terms of cost per period.
Total Operating The operating labor (including operators/shift

and Maintenance and supervisors/shift) and maintenance labor
Labor Cost costs in terms of cost per period. The

maintenance cost includes maintenance labor
and supplies.
Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed in cost
per period.
Total Operating The total of raw material, utility, operating
Cost labor, maintenance, operating charges, plant
overhead and G and A expenses.
Operating Labor Includes operators per shift and supervisors
Cost per shift costs.
Maintenance Cost Maintenance cost of the equipment including
labor and materials.
Operating Charges Includes operating supplies and laboratory
charges.
Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for
services, facilities, payroll overhead, etc.
Subtotal Operating Subtotal cost of raw materials, operating labor,
Cost utilities, maintenance, operating charges, and
plant overhead.
G and A Cost General and administrative costs incurred
during production. This is calculated as a
percentage of the Subtotal Operating Costs.
The costs listed under Project Results Summary are broken down into
individual elements under Project Capital Summary:
Project Capital Summary
Purchased The total material cost of process equipment
Equipment and quoted equipment cost items. Material cost
is accounted for in the codes of account 100 -
299.
Equipment Setting The total construction labor cost for setting
equipment in place.
Piping The cost reported for each of these items
Civil indicates the total material and construction
labor cost calculated for the category. The
Steel
above cost items may have originated from
Instrumentation two sources:
Electrical Installation Bulks (please refer to Icarus
Insulation Reference).
Paint User: The user can add project components
that create cost items in these categories. The
project components may be in the following
categories: Plant bulks, Site development and
Buildings.
Other This item is the total of the following costs:
design, engineering, and procurement costs;
material charges (freight and taxes); and
construction field indirect costs (fringe
benefits, burdens, consumables/small tools,
insurance, equipment rental, field services,
field office construction supervision, and plant
start-up).
Subcontracts The total cost of subcontracted work. This cost
item is normally zero in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.

G and A Overheads General and administrative costs associated
with engineering, materials, and construction
work.
Contract Fee The total cost of contract fees for engineering,
material, construction, any subcontracted
work.
Escalation The total capital costs escalation amount. This
cost item is normally zero in Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer.
Contingencies The additional costs required to bring this
project to completion. In Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer, this cost item is
automatically calculated based on the project
type and process complexity.
Total Project Cost The total project capital cost of the plant
calculated by the Icarus Evaluation Engine as
of the “System Cost Base Date”.
Adjusted Total Indicates the Total Project Cost (described
Capital Cost above) adjusted to the Start of Basic
Engineering. The Total Project Cost is
escalated , using the Project Capital Escalation
Parameter, from the system Cost Base date to
the start date of basic engineering.
Below is the formula used:
C_at=C_t*(1+(t_diff*e)/(w*7*100))
where:
C_at = Adjusted Total Capital Cost
C_t = Total Capital Cost
t_diff = Time difference between System Cost Base Date
and Start Date for Engineering
e = Project Capital Escalation
w = Number of weeks per period
Raw Material Costs and Product Sales

Raw Materials Cost Total raw material usage cost per hour
per Hour specified in the Raw Material Specifications
file.
Total Raw Materials Total cost of raw materials per period. This
Cost number is generated by multiplying Raw
Materials Cost per Hour by Operating Hours
per Period.
Products Sales per Total produced product sales expressed in cost
Hour per hour.
Total Products Sales Total product sales per period. This number is
generated by multiplying Products Sales per
Hour by Operating Hours per Period.
Main Product Name The main product of the plant is considered to
be the product which produces the largest
sales figure per period. This field contains the
description of the main product (assigned by
the user).
Main Product Rate The production rate of the main product.
Main Product Unit The unit cost rate of the main product.
Cost

Main Product The production basis (or unit of measure) of
Production Basis the main product (LB,
GALLONS, etc.).
Main Product Rate The production rate of the main product per
per Period period .
Main Product Sales The total sales figure of the main product per
period.
By-product Sales The total sales figure per period of the

by-products (i.e., products other than the
main product of the plant).
Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs
Operating Labor
Operators per Shift The number of operators per shift per hour
necessary to operate the plant.
Unit Cost The wage rate for each operator expressed in
cost per operator per shift.
Total Operating Total operating labor cost obtained by
Labor Cost multiplying number of operators per shift by
the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.
Maintenance
Cost/8000 Hours The cost of maintaining the facility equipment
for 8000 hours of operation of the facility.
Total Maintenance The total maintenance cost of the facility per
Cost period.
Supervision
Supervisors per The number of supervisors per shift per hour
Shift necessary to oversee personnel who operate
the facility.
Unit Cost The wage rate for each supervisor expressed
in cost per supervisors per shift.
Total Supervision Total supervising labor cost obtained by
Cost multiplying number of supervisors per shift by
the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.
Utilities Costs
The utility cost breakdown is given below for electricity, potable
water, fuel and instrument air as well as user defined process utilities
such as steam.
Note: The Process utilities details are available only when the results
are viewed in Excel. These are made available through separate
spreadsheets.
The description of each utility includes:
Rate The rate of use of the utility in terms of
amount per hour.
Unit Cost The unit cost of the utility in cost per amount.

Total Cost The total cost of the utility in cost per period.
Cashflow
Cashflow (CASHFLOW.ICS) calculates the net present value (NPV), internal
rate of return (IRR), profitability index (PI), payback period, etc.
The spreadsheet displays the cashflow information shown by period. The beginning part of the
spreadsheet contains data/results carried over from the Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS)
spreadsheet.
Item Description
TW Number of Weeks per Period

T Number of Periods for Analysis
DTEPC Duration of EPC Phase
DT Duration of EPC Phase and Startup
WORKP Working Capital Percentage
OPCHG Operating Charges
PLANTOVH Plant Overhead
CAPT Total Project Cost
RAWT Total Raw Material Cost
PRODT Total Product Sales
OPMT Total Operating Labor and Maintenance Cost
UTILT Total Utilities Cost
ROR Desired Rate of Return/Interest Rate
AF ROR Annuity Factor
TAXR Tax Rate
IF ROR Interest Factor
ECONLIFE Economic Life of Project

SALVAL Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)
DEPMETH Depreciation Method
DEPMETHN Depreciation Method Id
ESCAP Project Capital Escalation
ESPROD Products Escalation
ESRAW Raw Material Escalation
ESLAB Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation
ESUT Utilities Escalation
START Start Period for Plant Startup
PODE Desired Payout Period (excluding EPC and Startup
Phases). Reserved for future use.
POD Desired Payout Period: Reserved for future use.
DESRET Desired Return on Project for Sales Forecasting.
Reserved for future use.
END End Period for Economic Life of Project
GA G and A Expenses
DTEP Duration of EP Phase before Start of Construction
OP Total Operating Labor Cost
MT Total Maintenance Cost
Sales
A number will appear in this category only after the time allotted for all prior
phases (engineering, procurement, construction and startup phases) has
expired.
SP (Products The total products sales value per period calculated
Sales) in PROJSUM.ICS.
SPF (Forecasted Reserved for future use.
Sales Annuity
Factor)
SF (Forecasted Reserved for future use.
Sales)
S (Total Sales) Indicates the amount received per period from sold
products. This number is either SP or SF.
Expenses
Includes both capital and operating expenditures per period listed
below.
CAP (Capital Indicates, by period, total funds spent prior to startup.
Costs) Unescalated Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates the
total capital costs spent through the current period.
This is based on the Total Project Capital Cost in
PROJSUM.ICS.
Capital Cost: Indicates, by period, the amount of
initial, non-variable costs associated with the project.
This number is based on the Total Project Capital Cost
found in PROJSUM.ICS.
Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates capital expenditures
through period n. For example, the number in period 4

represents the total capital expenditures beginning in
period 1 and ending in period 4.
Working: Indicates the amount required to operate the
facility before the revenue from product sales is
sufficient to cover costs. Working Capital is a lump-
sum amount which takes effect during the start-up
period. It is escalated at rate equal to the Project
Capital Escalation rate.
OP (Operating Indicates, by period, the total expenditure on the
Costs) following items necessary to keep the facility
operating: Raw Materials, Operating Labor Cost,
Maintenance Cost, Utilities, Operating Charges, Plant
Overhead, Subtotal Operating Costs, and G and A
Costs. This number is the Total Operating Cost
imported from PROJSUM.ICS and entered in this field
after capital expenditures cease.
(R)Revenue
Indicates, by period, the amount of money available after capital and
operating expenses have been paid. This number is obtained by subtracting
Capital Costs and Operating Costs from Sales.
DEP Depreciation Expense: the amount by which the value of the capital
cost decreases each period. The Total Project Capital Cost is depreciated, via
the chosen depreciation method, over the useful Economic Life of the facility.
The Straight Line Method assumes that the item will depreciate by a constant
amount over its Economic life. When the Sum of the Years Method is used,
the depreciation expense decreases during each year of the project’s useful
life. When the Double Declining Balance Method is used, the project is
depreciated in geometric increments. The Accelerated Cost Recovery System
assumes that the project begins operating in the second half of the first year,
rather than in the beginning of the first year.
E Earnings Before Taxes: funds available after all expenses have been
paid. This number is obtained by subtracting the Depreciation and the
Interest Expenses from the Revenue.
TAX Indicates amount owed to the government. This number is obtained by
multiplying the tax rate by Earnings Before Taxes.
NE Net Earnings: funds available after taxes have been paid. This number
is obtained by subtracting the Taxes from the Earnings Before Taxes.
TED Total Earnings: total cash available from project. This number is
computed by adding the Depreciation Expense to the Net Earnings. Since the
depreciation expense is a non-cash expense (no cash actually leaves the
facility in order to pay the depreciation expense) adding the depreciation to
the net earnings gives the total cash flow obtained from the project. Inclusion
of the Depreciation Expenses reduces the amount of taxable income.
TEX Total Expenses (Excludes Taxes and Depreciation): the total expenses
of the project including capital, operating, and any interest expense.
FVI Future Value of Cumulative Cash Inflows: sums the Sales received
through period n and indicates what the Sales would be if they had been
received in the current period. For example, the value in period 4 is what the

sales in periods 1-4 would have been if all of these funds had been received in
period 4.
PVI Present Value of Cumulative Cash Inflows: the current worth of all the
cash received through period n. For example, the number in period 4
represents the value that the sales generated in periods 1 through 4 would be
if those sales were received in the first period. This number is obtained by
summing all of sales from prior time periods adding this amount to sales in
the current time period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is then
discounted back to the first time period.
PVOS Present Value of Cumulative Cash Outflows, Sales.
PVOP Present Value of Cumulative Cash Outflows, Products: the current
worth of all of the cash paid through period n. For example, the number in
period 4 represents the value that the expenses paid in periods 1 through 4
would be if those expenses were paid in the first period. This number is
obtained by summing all of the outflows (Capital Costs, Operating Costs,
Interest Expense) from prior time periods and adding this amount to the
outflows in the current period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is
then discounted back to the first time period .
PVO Present Value of Cumulative Cashflows: represents PVOS or PVOP
depending on whether or not you entered a desired payout period. If you
entered a desired payout period, the basis for the cash outflow calculation is
the Forecasted Sales. Otherwise, the basis is Product Sales.
PV Present Value of Cashflows: the present worth of the Total Earnings
received in the current period. For example, the number in period 4
represents the value that the Total Earnings generated in period 4 discounted
back to the first time period.
Final results are shown below:
NPV Net Present Value: the current worth of all the Net Earnings received
through period n. For example, the number in period 4 represents the value
that the Net Earnings generated in periods 1 through 4 if those earnings were
received in the first period. This number is obtained by summing all of the Net
Earnings from prior time periods and adding this amount to the Net Earnings
in the current time period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is then
discounted back to the first time period. The sign of this value determines the
analysis result. If, in a certain period, the sign of the net present value is
negative, then the proposed investment appears not to be profitable, thus far.
For example, if the sign of the net preset value is negative in period 3, then
the project does not appear to be profitable during periods 1, 2, and 3.
However, if the sign is positive, then the project appears to be profitable,
from period 3 onward. If the net present value equals zero, then the project
does not incur any losses or gains (break-even point).
IRR Internal Rate of Return: the rate at which the present value of all cash
flows is zero. It is also known as the Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of Return.
This value is calculated at the “End Period for Economic Life of Project” (i.e.,
“Economic Life of Project” and considering the length of EPC and Startup
Period). At the “End Period for Economic Life of Project”, it is assumed the
salvage value of the plant and the working capital are recouped. IRR is the
after-tax interest rate at which the organization can borrow funds and break
even at the end of the project life.

MIRR Modified Internal Rate of Return: the profitability of the project. The
internal rate of return is the interest rate which equates the present value of
a project’s expected cash inflows to the present value of the project’s
expected costs (or outflows). The internal rate of return for each period is
calculated by dividing the Present Value of Cumulative Inflows by the Present
Value of Cumulative Outflows and raising this to a power and multiplied by
100. Two criteria are critical in evaluating the internal rate of return. First, if
the sign of the rate of return is negative, the project appears not to be
profitable. If the sign is positive, then the project appears to be profitable. If
the rate of return equals zero then the project incurs no losses or gains
(break-even point). In addition, if the rate of return is greater than the rate
which could be obtained from other opportunities (i.e., investing in a bank),
then the project probably should be undertaken.
NRR Net Rate of Return: the profitability of the project. The net rate of
return for each period is calculated by dividing the Net Present Value by the
Present Value of Cumulative Outflows and then multiplying the result by 100.
PO Payout Period: the expected number of years required to recover the
original investment in the project. This row will indicate the length of time
that the facility needs to operate in order to recover the initial capital
investment (total capital cost plus working capital). If a number is entered for
the Desired Payout Period, the spreadsheet will determine the amount of
Sales necessary to meet this desired payout.
ARR Accounting Rate of Return: measures a project’s contribution to the
firm’s net income. This number is the ratio of the project’s Average Annual
Expected Net Income to its Average Investment. For example, the Average
Annual Expected Net Income for the fourth period is determined by summing
net earnings from periods 1 through 4 and divided by 4. The Average
Investment is determined by finding the Salvage Value, and adding this
number to the Total Project Cost and dividing this total by 2. If the accounting
rate of return is greater than one, then this is an indication that the project
might be a profitable undertaking. If the sign is negative, then the project
does not appear to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the project
incurs no losses or gains (break-even point).
PI Profitability Index: shows the relative profitability of any project; it
shows the present value of the benefits relative to the present value of the
costs. For each period, this number is computed by dividing the Present Value
of the Cumulative Cash Inflows by the Present Value of the Cumulative Cash
Outflows. If the profitability index is greater than one, then the project
appears to be profitable. If this index is less than one, then the project
appears not to be profitable. If this number equals zero then the project
incurs no losses or gains (break-even point).
Analysis
Analysis results are shown by period. “( - )” indicates the project in the current
period appears unprofitable, while “0” indicates break-even status.
Depreciation Calculations
This section presents details on the calculation of depreciation.

Executive Summary
Executive Summary (EXECSUM.ICS) contains a project summary intended to
be reviewed by executives and other business decision makers.
It contains the following information:

PROJECT NAME Aspen Process Economic Analyzer project
name
CAPACITY Capacity of plant for major product
PLANT LOCATION Location of plant
BRIEF DESCRIPTION Brief description of project, from Project
Properties
SCHEDULE
Start Date for The beginning date for EPC (engineering,
Engineering procurement, and construction)
Duration of EPC The calculated EPC duration in weeks
Phase
Completion Date for The calendar date for the end of EPC
Construction
Length of Start-up Number of weeks scheduled for start-up
Period beyond the end of the EPC phase
INVESTMENT
Currency Conversion Conversion factor between user-selected
currency to the currency used by the
system internally for the selected Country
basis. For example, if the US country basis
is selected, the internal system currency is
US Dollars. Therefore, all numbers will be
reported in US Dollars. However, if a
currency conversion rate of 1.5 is specified,

all internal values will be multiplied by 1.5
and then reported
Total Project Capital The total capital cost investment needed for
the project. If the calculated EPC period is
more than a year, the capital costs
expenditure will be spread out over the
length of the EPC period
Total Operating Cost The total of raw material, utility, operating
labor, maintenance, operating charges,
plant overhead and G and A expenses
Total Raw Materials The total raw material cost of the facility
Cost expressed in terms of cost per year
Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed in
terms of cost per year
Total Product Sales The total product sales of the facility
expressed in terms of cost per year
Desired Rate of Desired rate of return expressed in terms of
Return percent per year.
PROJECT INFORMATION
Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from
which process data was imported
Version The version of the process simulator
Report File The file name of the process simulator
report file
Report Date Date and time of the process simulator
report file
Economic Analysis The name of the Icarus system used for the
Type evaluation
Version Version number of the Icarus system.
System Cost Base The capital costs basis date of the system.
Date The Adjusted Total Project Cost represents
the calculated capital cost of the project
(calculated at this base date) escalated to
the Start Date of Engineering.
Project Directory Directory path for the current Aspen Process
Economic Analyzer project
Analysis Date Date investment analysis was run.
Country basis Country basis for the capital costs/schedule
analysis
Project Type Project type identified in the standard basis
specs
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process
evaluator

Using the Reporting Assistant
The Reporting Assistant feature lets you create your own customized report
spreadsheets, combining information from all other Icarus generated
spreadsheets.
The sections below describe the steps to create such custom reports when
viewing the results within the Icarus Main Window (ICS) and when viewing
them in Excel.
Using the Reporting Assistant in ICS
To develop a customized spreadsheet file and template

1 On the Tools menu, click Options | Reporting Assistant.
The Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears.
2 On the Report File tab, click New.

3 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the report file that will contain
your customized spreadsheet. For example, type Custom as shown
below.

4 Click Save.
5 Click the Report Templates tab.
6 In the Template Files section, click New.

7 In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the template file (for
example, summary) and click Save.
This example creates a reporting template for future use called

Summary.tra.
8 In the Template Entries section, click New Entry. In the Column Label
field, enter a label (for example, “Project Name”) for the first column on
your custom report spreadsheet. The Display Column box should
automatically display “1”.
9 The Entry Definition section defines the data to be entered in the above
column. Select a file name in the Source box, then enter the column and
row of the source data.
For example, in the figure below, the contents of Column C, Row 8 of
Project.ics has been specified to appear in the customized report
spreadsheet’s Project Name column.

10 Follow the same procedure (steps 7 - 8) to add more entries. You can use
a variety of sources. For example, adding the following entries will result
in a report template that uses all three of the previously discussed .ics
files as sources.
Display Source Source
Column Label Column Source Column Row
Project Name 1 projsum.ics C 8

Start Date for
2 projsum.ics C 61
Engineering
Tax Rate 3 projsum.ics C 112
Purchased
4 projsum.ics C 172
Equipment Cost
Total Project
5 cashflow.ics C 14
Cost
Total
Maintenance 6 cashflow.ics C 40
Cost
Completion
Date for 7 execsum.ics B 17
Construction
11 When all the template entries are added, return to the Report File tab
view. To the right of the Template File field, click Browse.
12 Select the newly created template file (for example, Summary.tra) and
click Open.
13 Click OK to exit the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box.
Using the Reporting Assistant in Excel mode

When the results are viewed in Excel, certain additional results are made
available to the user. These include details about the process utilities as well
as the individual raw material and products in the project.
The Excel mode uses two files:

Aspen Process This workbook contains the spreadsheets used to
Economic report the investment analysis results. This is an
AnalyzerWB.xls ICARUS system file and users are recommended
not to modify its contents.
Aspen Process The Aspen Process Economic
Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls file stores the
AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls customizations that are in turn used by the
Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB.xls. You
can modify its contents to customize the Run
Summary worksheet.
The global copy of these files resides in the \Data\ICS folder. The files are
copied into the individual project folder when the investment analysis results
are invoked
Note: If copies of these files already exist within the projects, then they may
not be replaced and so may have to be replaced manually by the user. In the
case of ICARUS projects that are migrated from previous versions, any older
versions of these files will be saved as a backup and the newer versions will
be used.
The Run Summary worksheet in the Aspen Process Economic
AnalyzerWB.xls workbook is the sheet that can be customized by the user.
The Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls file stores the
customizations that are in turn used by the Aspen Process Economic
AnalyzerWB.xls. The Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls files
stores:
 The template to be used in the Run Summary worksheet
 Any additional user defined functions (UDF) that the user wishes to
incorporate.
The default Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls that is
provided with the system can be used to review these aspects of the file. The
sections below explain this further.
Steps to customize the Run Summary

worksheet:
If you want to view a particular piece of information from one of the
spreadsheets in Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB.xls, on the Run
Summary sheet, follow these steps.
1 Close any open ICARUS projects and close ICARUS.
2 Open the ICS>>Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls file.
3 Edit the Template worksheet and add any user-defined functions that you
intend to use (see sections below).
4 Save and close the Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls
file.
5 Re-open the ICARUS project.

6 Delete or rename any previous versions of Aspen Process Economic
AnalyzerWB.xls and Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls
that may exist within the ic_cache>>Current Working Project folder.
7 Run the investment analysis and ensure that your changes are reflected in
the Run Summary worksheet.
Aspen Process Economic

AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>Template
worksheet:
The Template worksheet has three columns that you can modify.
This column denotes
Dest the destination column in the Run Summary worksheet,

where a particular piece of data should be reported.
Column Heading the title that should be used.
Source/Formula the source from which the data should be retrieved.
Formulas could also be used.
Here is an example:
Dest Column Heading Source/Formula
C Time Now()
D Project Name 'Project Summary'!C8
Keep the following in mind when editing the Template:
 Entries must begin at cell D10
 Processing of entries will end when a cell in column D is empty
 The Source/Formula should not contain “=”; for example,
Now(),'Project Summary'!C8
 If you intend to define and use other functions, see the sections below.
Aspen Process Economic

AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls>>User defined
functions:
All user-defined functions should begin with UDF_,
for example, UDF_UtilCost_Steam100PSI().

Functions that begin with Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerF_ refer to
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer system functions.
Using the Visual Basic Editor, you can view, edit, and add user defined
functions in the Aspen Process Economic AnalyzerWB_TRA.xls
workbook. The screen capture below shows a snippet from this file. Using the
samples provided, you could add more functions in the sections marked
Insert your functions here. If you need technical assistance in this regard,
contact the AspenTech Support Team.
Generating the Custom Report
To generate a report developed in Reporting Assistant:

1 Run a project evaluation.
2 On the Run menu, click Add Entry for Reporting Assistant.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer generates the report based upon the
template created in the Reporting Assistant. The data that was entered under
List of Entries on the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears as
columns in the spreadsheet.
Every time Add Entry for Reporting Assistant is selected, the latest data is
entered on the bottom row of the report. This way, you can compare results.

Item Evaluation
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer allows you to run an evaluation on a single
component and view an Item Report. The type of Item Report displayed can
be selected in Preferences (see page 52).
X X
To run an item evaluation and display the Item Report:

1 Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the List view,
and then click Evaluate Item on the pop-up menu.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer runs the item evaluation.
Note: If the evaluation has already been run, you only have to click Item
Report.
2 Right-click on the component and click Item Report on the pop-up menu.
You can also click the Evaluate button on the Component Specifications
form to run the item evaluation and display the Item Report.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer displays the Item Report.

3 You can include multiple components in the Item Report: on the List view
(area level), select the desired components, right-click on one of the
components, and click Item Report on the pop-up window. The resulting
Item Report lists individually the summary data (cost or sizing) for each
selected component.
Automatic Item Evaluation

You can have Aspen Process Economic Analyzer automatically run an item
evaluation whenever you click OK or Apply on a Component Specifications
form.
To turn automatic item evaluation on and off:

1 On the Tools menu, point to Options.
2 On the Options sub-menu, a check appears next to Automatic Item
Evaluation when the feature is turned on. Clicking Automatic Item
Evaluation turns the feature on and off.

Appendix A: Equipment and
Slots of those Equipment
Affected by Mapping
The following table lists the Equipment and Slots of those Equipment which
will be affected by mapping:
Important: When you do Map Based On Last Session, the slots listed on
this table WILL CHANGE.
Object Name Attributes wiped out during re-size
DAT MIXER CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpDesignGaugePressure CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN PRESS. -GAUGE
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T HEIGHT
DAT OPEN TOP CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T HEIGHT
DAT REACTOR CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpDesignGaugePressure
CpLiquidVolume
DCP ANSI CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidSpecificGravity
Appendix A: Equipment and Slots of those Equipment Affected by Mapping 473

CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Liquid specif. grav.
Driver power
Design temperature
Design press. -gauge
Pump fractional efficiency
Pump % efficiency
No. of identical items
DCP ANSI PLAST No. of identical items
Pump % efficiency
Design temperature
Driver power
Head
Capacity
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDesignTemperature
CpDriverPower
CpFluidHead
CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
DCP API 610 CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency

DCP API 610 IL CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DCP CENTRIF CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DCP GEN SERV No. of identical items
Pump % efficiency
Design temperature
Driver power
Head
Capacity
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDesignTemperature
CpDriverPower
CpFluidHead

CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
DCP GEN-SERV CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DCP IN LINE CpPumpEfficiencyPercent
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidFlowrate
Capacity
Head
Driver power
Design temperature
Pump % efficiency
DDDTPACKED CpTrayType
CpTangentTangentHeightTopSection
CpDiameterTopSection
CpDesignTemperatureTopSection
CpDesignPressureTopSection
CpTangentTangentHeightBottomSection
CpDiameterBottomSection
CpDesignTemperatureBottomSection
CpDesignPressureBottomSection
TRAY TYPE
BOTTOM DESIGN PRESS.
BOTTOM DESIGN TEMP.

TOP DESIGN PRESSURE
TOP DESIGN TEMP.
TOP T-T HEIGHT
TOP SECT'N DIAMETER
BOTTOM T-T HEIGHT
BOTTOM SECTION DIAM.
DDDTTRAYED CpTrayType
CpTangentTangentHeightTopSection
CpDiameterTopSection
CpDesignTemperatureTopSection
CpDesignPressureTopSection
CpTangentTangentHeightBottomSection
CpDiameterBottomSection
CpDesignTemperatureBottomSection
CpDesignPressureBottomSection
TRAY TYPE
BOTTOM DESIGN PRESS.
BOTTOM DESIGN TEMP.
TOP DESIGN PRESSURE
TOP DESIGN TEMP.
TOP T-T HEIGHT
TOP SECT'N DIAMETER
BOTTOM T-T HEIGHT
BOTTOM SECTION DIAM.
DF ROTY DISK CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
DF ROTY DRUM CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
DGC CENTRIF CpDesignTemperatureInlet
CpDesignGaugePressureInlet
CpDesignGaugePressureOutlet
CpActualGasFlowrateInlet
ACTUAL CAPACITY
INLET PRESSURE-GAUGE
EXIT PRESSURE -GAUGE
INLET TEMPERATURE
DGC CENTRIF IG No. of identical items
INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
EXIT TEMPERATURE

CpDesignTemperatureOutlet
CpDesignTemperatureInlet
DGC RECIP MOTR No. of identical items
INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
DHE AIR COOLER DUTY
[2]CpTubeWallThicknessSecondService
[3] CpTubeWallThicknessThirdService
CpTubeWallThicknessFirstService
CpTubeLength
CpNumberBays
CpNumberTubeRows
[3] CpDesignTemperatureInletThirdService
[2] CpDesignTemperatureInletSecondServ
CpDesignTemperatureInletFirstService
CpHeight
[3] CpDesignGaugePressureThirdService
[2] CpDesignGaugePressureSecondService
CpDesignGaugePressureFirstService
CpBayWidth
[2] CpBareTubeAreaSecondService
[3] CpBareTubeAreaThirdService
CpBareTubeAreaFirstService
No. of tube rows
Height
Number of bays
Bay width
Tube length
Tube thickness/BWG
Inlet temperature
Bare tuo. of identical items
DHE FIXED T S No. of identical items
Surface area
Number of shells
Tube pressure -gauge
Tube temperature
Shell pressure-gauge

Shell temperature
No. of tubes/shell
Extended tube length
Tube thickness
Tube pitch
No. of tube passes
Tube outside diam.
Shell diameter
CpTubeLengthExtended
CpNumberTubePasses
CpNumberTubesPerShell
CpNumberShells
CpShellDiameter
CpDesignGaugePressureShell
CpDesignTemperatureShell
CpHeatTransferArea
CpTubeOutsideDiameter
CpTubePitch
CpTubeDesignGaugePressure
CpDesignTemperatureTube
CpTubeWallThickness
Required surface area (with overdesign)
RAW SURFACE AREA
DUTY
DHE FLOAT HEAD No. of identical items
Surface area
Number of shells
Tube temperature
Shell temperature
No. of tubes/shell
Tube thickness
Tube pitch
No. of tube passes
Tube outside diam.
Shell diameter
CpNumberTubePasses
CpNumberShells
CpShellDiameter
CpHeatTransferArea

CpTubePitch
CpTubeWallThickness
RAW SURFACE AREA
DUTY
DHE PRE ENGR No. of identical items
Surface area
Tube temperature
Shell temperature
Tube thickness
No. of tube passes
CpNumberTubePasses
CpHeatTransferArea
CpTubeWallThickness
RAW SURFACE AREA
DUTY
DHE TEMA EXCH DUTY
RAW SURFACE AREA
CpTubeWallThickness
CpTubePitch
CpHeatTransferArea
CpShellDiameter
CpNumberShells
CpNumberTubePasses
Shell diameter
Tube outside diam.
No. of tube passes
Tube pitch

Tube thickness
No. of tubes/shell
Shell temperature
Tube temperature
Number of shells
Surface area
DHE U TUBE No. of identical items
Surface area
Number of shells
Tube temperature
Shell temperature
No. of tubes/shell
Tube thickness
Tube pitch
No. of tube passes
Tube outside diam.
Shell diameter
CpNumberTubePasses
CpNumberShells
CpShellDiameter
CpHeatTransferArea
CpTubePitch
CpTubeWallThickness
RAW SURFACE AREA
DUTY
DHT HORIZ DRUM VESSEL T-T LENGTH
DIAMETER
CAPACITY
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CpLiquidVolume

CpDesignTemperature
CpVesselDiameter
CpTangentTangentLength
DHT JACKETED CpTangentTangentLength
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T LENGTH
DHT MULTI WALL CpTangentTangentLength
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T LENGTH
DRB KETTLE RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
CpDuty
SHELL PRESSURE-GAUGE
TUBE PRESSURE -GAUGE
SHELL TEMPERATURE
TUBE TEMPERATURE
DUTY
NO. OF IDENTICAL ITEMS
surface area
DRB THERMOSIPH RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea

CpDuty
SHELL TEMPERATURE
TUBE TEMPERATURE
DUTY
surface area
DRB U TUBE surface area
DUTY
TUBE TEMPERATURE
SHELL TEMPERATURE
CpDuty
CpHeatTransferArea
RAW SURFACE AREA
DTW DC HE TW CpDesignGaugePressure
CpDesignTemperature
CpVesselDiameter
CpTangentTangentHeight
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
Diameter
Vessel t-t height
DTW PACKED CpTangentTangentHeight
CpTrayType
CpTotalPackingHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
TRAY TYPE
Diameter
Vessel t-t height
Total packing height
DTW TRAYED CpTangentTangentHeight
CpTrayType
CpTraySpacing

CpNumberTrays
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
NUMBER OF TRAYS
TRAY TYPE
Diameter
Vessel t-t height
tray spacing
DVT CONE BTM CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
HEIGHT
DVT CYLINDER CpVesselDiameter
CpTangentTangentHeight
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DVT GAS HOLDER CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpGasVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
DVT JACKETED CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T HEIGHT
DVT LIVE BTM CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter

CpDesignTemperature
CpSolidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
HEIGHT
DVT MULTI WALL CpTangentTangentHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
VESSEL T-T HEIGHT
DVT SPHERE CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
DVT SPHEROID CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolume
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
DVT STORAGE CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter
CpDesignTemperature
CpLiquidVolumeGallonsBarrels
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
HEIGHT
EAC CENTRIF M No. of identical items
INLET TEMPERATURE

ACTUAL CAPACITY
CpActualGasFlowrate
EAC CENTRIF T No. of identical items
INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
CpActualGasFlowrate
EAC RECIP GAS No. of identical items
INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
DRIVER POWER
CpActualGasFlowrate
CpDriverPower
EAC RECIP MOTR No. of identical items
INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
EAC SINGLE 1 S No. of identical items
INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
CpActualGasFlowrate
EAC SINGLE 2 S No. of identical items
INLET TEMPERATURE

ACTUAL CAPACITY
CpActualGasFlowrate
EAD AIR DRYER CpGasFlowrate
CAPACITY
EAT COND CELL VOLUME
CpCellVolume
EAT FLOAT CELL VOLUME PER CELL
NUMBER OF CELLS
CpNumberCells
CpVolumePerCell
ECP AXIAL FLOW CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
Head
Driver power
Temperature
ECP TURBINE CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpDriverPower
Head
Driver power
Temperature
ECR BRADFORD CpCrusherFlowrate
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR CONE CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE

ECR ECCENTRIC CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR GYRATOR CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR HAMMER MED RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR JAW CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR PULVERIZER CpFlowrate
CpProductMeshSize
CpProductFeedSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR REV HAMR RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpMantleDiameter

CpDriverPower
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR ROLL RING CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR ROTARY CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
CpCrusherFlowrate
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR S IMPACT RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR S ROLL HVY RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpCrusherFlowrate
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
ECR S ROLL LT RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR S ROLL MED RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE

DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECR SAWTOOTH CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
ECR SWING HAMR RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
ECRYBATCH VAC CpLiquidVolume
CAPACITY
ECRYMECHANICAL CpLength
LENGTH
ECRYOSLO CpCrystallizerRate
RATE
ECT ATM SUSPEN CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
ECT BATCH AUTO No. of identical items
DIAMETER
CAPACITY
CpCentrifugeCapacity
[2] CpBatchFlowrate
CpCentrifugeDiameter
ECT BATCH BOTM No. of identical items
DIAMETER
ECT BATCH TOP No. of identical items
DIAMETER
ECT BOT UNLOAD No. of identical items

DIAMETER
ECT DISK CpCentrifugeDiameter
DIAMETER
ECT INVERTING CpCentrifugeDiameter
DIAMETER
ECT RECIP CONV No. of identical items
DIAMETER
ECT SCREEN BWL No. of identical items
DIAMETER
INSIDE DIAMETER
INSIDE LENGTH
CpBowlDiameter
CpBowlLength
ECT SCROLL CON No. of identical items
DIAMETER
ECT SOLID BOWL CpBowlLength
CpBowlDiameter
DIAMETER
INSIDE DIAMETER
ECT TOP UNLOAD CpCentrifugeDiameter
CpCentrifugeCapacity
CAPACITY
DIAMETER
ECT TUBULAR CpBowlDiameter
DIAMETER
ECT VIBRATORY CpProductFeedSize
CpScreenDiameter
DIAMETER
SCREEN DIAMETER
ED ATMOS TRAY No. of identical items
TRAY AREA
CpTrayArea
ED PAN CpSurfaceArea
AREA
ED SPRAY CpEvaporationRate

EVAPORATION RATE
ED VAC TRAY No. of identical items
TRAY AREA
CpTrayArea
EDC CENTRF PRE No. of identical items
FLOW RATE
CpGasFlowrate
EDC CLOTH BAY CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
EDC CYCLONE CpCycloneDiameter
DIAMETER
EDC ELC H VOLT No. of identical items
FLOW RATE
CpGasFlowrate
EDC ELC L VOLT No. of identical items
FLOW RATE
CpGasFlowrate
EDC MULT CYCLO No. of identical items
FLOW RATE
CpGasFlowrate
EDC PULSE SHKR CpGasFlowrate
FLOW RATE
EDC WASHERS SURFACE AREA
EDD DOUBLE ATM CpTrayArea
SURFACE AREA
EDD SINGLE ATM CpTrayArea
SURFACE AREA
EDD SINGLE VAC CpTrayArea
SURFACE AREA
EE FALL FILM No. of identical items
Heating area
CpHeatTransferArea
EE FORCED CIR CpHeatTransferArea
Heating area
EE LONG TUBE CpTubeMaterial
Mat'l of construction

CpHeatTransferArea
Tube material
Heating area
EE LONG VERT No. of identical items
Area
CpSurfaceArea
EE STAND HOR No. of identical items
Area
CpSurfaceArea
EE STAND VERT No. of identical items
Area
CpSurfaceArea
EF CARTRIDGE CpLiquidFlowrate
FLOW RATE
EF LEAF DRY No. of identical items
SURFACE AREA
CpSurfaceArea
EF LEAF WET No. of identical items
SURFACE AREA
CpSurfaceArea
EF PLATE FRAM No. of identical items
FRAME CAPACITY
CpFrameCapacity
EF SCROLL CpProductFeedSizeSelection
FEED SIZE
EF SEWAGE CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
EF SPARKLER CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
EF TUBULAR CpLiquidFlowrate
FLOW RATE
EF WHITEWATER CpLiquidFlowrate
FLOW RATE
EFU BOX CpStandardGasFlowrate
CpProcessType
CpDuty
CpDesignTemperature

Duty
Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EFU HEATER CpStandardGasFlowrate
CpProcessType
CpDuty
CpDesignTemperature
Duty
Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EFU PYROLYSIS CpDesignGaugePressure
CpDesignTemperature
CpDuty
CpProcessType
CpStandardGasFlowrate
Duty
Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EFU REFORMER CpStandardGasFlowrate
CpProcessType
CpDuty
CpDesignTemperature
Duty
Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EFU VERTICAL CpDesignGaugePressure
CpDesignTemperature
CpDuty
CpProcessType
CpStandardGasFlowrate
Duty

Standard gas flow
Process type
Design temperature
EGC RECIP GAS No. of identical items
INLET TEMPERATURE
ACTUAL CAPACITY
DRIVER POWER
CpActualGasFlowrate
CpDriverPower
EGP CANNED RTR CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Flow rate
Driver power
EGP GEAR CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Flow rate
Driver power
EGP MECH SEAL No. of identical items
Driver power
Flow rate
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
EHE CROSS BORE RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE FIN TUBE RAW SURFACE AREA
CpTubeLength
CpNumberFins
CpHeatTransferArea
Number of fins
No. of tubes/shell
Tube length

Heat transfer area
EHE HEATER ELC No. of identical items
Power output
CpHeaterPower
EHE HEATER STM No. of identical items
Heat transfer area
CpHeatTransferArea
RAW SURFACE AREA
EHE HEATER-ELC CpHeaterPower
Power output
EHE HEATER-STM RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE JACKETED RAW SURFACE AREA
CpTubeLength
CpHeatTransferArea
CpDesignTemperature
Design temperature
No. of tubes/shell
Tube length
Heat transfer area
EHE ONE SCREW RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE PLAT FRAM DESIGN TEMPERATURE
Surface area
CpDesignTemperature
CpSurfaceArea
CpHeatTransferArea
RAW SURFACE AREA

EHE PLAT+FRAM RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
CpSurfaceArea
CpDesignTemperature
Surface area
DESIGN TEMPERATURE
EHE SHELL TUBE No. of identical items
Heat transfer area
Tube length
CpHeatTransferArea
CpTubeLength
RAW SURFACE AREA
EHE SHELL+TUBE RAW SURFACE AREA
CpTubeLength
CpHeatTransferArea
Tube length
Heat transfer area
EHE SPIRAL PLT RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE SUC HEATER No. of identical items
Heat transfer area
CpHeatTransferArea
RAW SURFACE AREA
EHE SUC-HEATER RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area
EHE TWO SCREW RAW SURFACE AREA
CpHeatTransferArea
Heat transfer area

EHE WASTE HEAT RAW SURFACE AREA
CpFlowrate
CpHeatTransferArea
Rate
Heat transfer rate
EM ATTRITION CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM AUTOGENOUS CpSolidFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpDiameterInside
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM BALL MILL CpSolidFlowrate
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpDiameterInside
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM MIKRO PULV RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpProductSize
CpCrusherFlowrate
EM MIKRO-PULV CpCrusherFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE

MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM ROD CHARGER RATE
MANTLE DIAMETER
PRODUCT SIZE
DRIVER POWER
CpDriverPower
CpMantleDiameter
CpRodDiameter
CpProductSize
CpSolidFlowrate
EM ROD MILL CpSolidFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpDiameterInside
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER
RATE
EM ROD-CHARGER CpSolidFlowrate
CpProductSize
CpRodDiameter
CpMantleDiameter
CpDriverPower
DRIVER POWER
PRODUCT SIZE
MANTLE DIAMETER RATE
EM ROLLER
EP DIAPHRAGM CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP DUPLEX CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower

Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP RECIP MOTR No. of identical items
Driver power
Flow rate
Temperature
Head
CpDriverPower
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpFluidHead
CpTemperature
EP ROTARY CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP SIMPLEX CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP SLURRY CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head

Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
EP TRIPLEX CpTemperature
CpFluidHead
CpLiquidFlowrate
CpDriverPower
Head
Temperature
Flow rate
Driver power
ERD DIRECT CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
ERD INDIRECT CpSurfaceArea
SURFACE AREA
ERD JAC VACUUM No. of identical items
CAPACITY
CpDryerCapacity
ERD JAC-VACUUM CpDryerCapacity
CAPACITY
ERD VACUUM CpDryerCapacity
CAPACITY
ETDSATM SYSTEM No. of identical items
TRAY SURFACE
CpTraySurfaceArea
ETDSATM-SYSTEM CpTraySurfaceArea
TRAY SURFACE
ETDSTURBO CpTraySurfaceArea
TRAY SURFACE
ETDSVAC SYSTEM No. of identical items
TRAY SURFACE
CpTraySurfaceArea
ETDSVAC-SYSTEM CpTraySurfaceArea
TRAY SURFACE

ETDSVACUUM CpTraySurfaceArea
TRAY SURFACE
ETURCONDENSING CpPowerOutput
Power output
ETURGAS CpPowerOutput
Power output
ETURNON COND No. of identical items
Power output
CpPowerOutput
ETURNON-COND CpPowerOutput
Power output
EVP MECH BOOST No. of identical items
Actual capacity
CpActualGasFlowrate
EVP MECH-BOOST CpActualGasFlowrate
Actual capacity
EVP MECH-BOOST CpActualGasFlowrate
Actual capacity
EVP MECHANICAL CpDriverPower
CpActualGasFlowrate
Driver power
Actual capacity
EVP WATER SEAL No. of identical items
Actual capacity
CpActualGasFlowrate
EVP WATER-SEAL CpActualGasFlowrate
Actual capacity
EVS HUMMER CpNumberDecks
CpSurfaceArea
NUMBER OF DECKS
AREA
EVS ONE DECK CpWidth
CpLength
WIDTH
LENGTH

EVS SIFTER 1 No. of identical items
DIAMETER
CpScreenDiameter
DIAMETER
CpScreenDiameter
DIAMETER
CpScreenDiameter
EVS SIFTER-1 CpScreenDiameter
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
EVS THREE DECK CpWidth
CpLength
WIDTH
LENGTH
EVS TWO DECK CpLength
CpWidth
WIDTH
LENGTH
EVT PLAST TANK CpLiquidVolume
CpTemperature
CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter
GAUGE PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
HEIGHT
VOLUME
DIAMETER
EVT WOOD TANK CpLiquidVolume
CpTemperature
CpVesselHeight
CpVesselDiameter
GAUGE PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
HEIGHT

VOLUME
DIAMETER
EWFETHIN FILM Heat transfer area
CpHeatTransferArea
EWFEWFE SYSTEM Heat transfer area
CpHeatTransferArea
Size Interactive Slots - AirCooler Overall U
Fin Thickness
Duty
CpTubePitch
CpTubeOutsideDiameterFirstService
CpTubeLength
CpTubeFinHeight
CpPowerPerFan
CpNumberTubeRows
CpNumberBays
CpFinPitch
CpBayWidth
CpBareTubeAreaFirstService
Overall Heat transfer Coefficient
Size Interactive Slots - CpSpecificHeatRatio
Compressor CpDriverPower
CpCompressibilityFactorOutlet
CpCompressibilityFactorInlet
Size Interactive Slots - CpSpecificHeatRatio
TurboExpander CpPowerOutput
CpCompressibilityFactorInlet
Size Interactive Slots - Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor
HeatExchanger Overdesign Factor
Final Surface Area
LMTD
Overall Heat transfer Coefficient
Raw Surface Area
Shell Side Fouling Resistance
Shell Side Heat Transfer Coefficient
Side For Hot Stream
Surface Area with Overdesign
Temperature Correction Factor
Tube Side Fouling Resistance
Tube Side Heat Transfer Coefficient
UA
Overall U

Size Interactive Slots - CpExchangerDepth
HeatExchanger_PlateFin CpExchangerLength
CpExchangerVolume
CpExchangerWidth
CpRemarks2 :
CpMaterialCostPerUnit
CpLaborHoursPerUnit
Size Interactive Slots - Pump CpLiquidFlowrate
CpFluidViscosity
CpFluidHead
Size Interactive Slots - CpViscosityCS
Pump_Gear CpLiquidFlowrate
CpFluidHead
Size Interactive Slots - CpActualGasFlowrate
Pump_Vacuum CpLiquidFlowrate
CpFluidViscosity
CpFluidHead
Size Interactive Slots -
Vessel_Horizontal
Vessel_Spherical
Vessel_Spheroid
Vessel_Vertical
WFE WFE SYSTEM Heat transfer area
: No. of identical items
CpHeatTransferArea

Index
Add Stream command

. View menu, PFD 177
.D01 file extension, Icarus Object View menu, PFD 181
files 132 Add Trend Data to Database
.EML file extension, importing cost command
libraries 295 Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
.UCL file extension, importing cost Reporter 434
libraries 295 adding
templates 26
Adding
2
areas 186
2/3 rule 93, 240 project components 186
streams 218–221
A Additional Project Component files
importing from 5.0/5.1 22
About command Adjusted Total Capital Cost
Help menu 46 Project Summary spreadsheet
Absolute Basis 455
streams 118, 121, 126–128, 181 AEM See Analyzer Economics
Accelerated Cost Recovery System Module (AEM)
(ACRS) Air coolers
Investment Parameters, design criteria specifications 93
Depreciation Method 107 Air supply
Accounting Rate of Return (ARR) instrumentation loop 200
Cashflow spreadsheet 461 All Crafts Percent of Base
ACRS See Accelerated Cost General Wage Rates 75
Recovery System (ACRS) Allow Docking command 38
Activate Custom Model option Analyzer 2.0B
Preferences 54 importing from 22–24
Add Area command 186 Analyzer Economics Module (AEM)
Add button 395–412
Pipe Details form 197 error when re-launching 407
Wage Rate Info form 77 loading 395
Add Entry for Reporting Assistant RESULTS workbook 400–405
Run menu 43, 469 revising premises 405–406
Add Project Component command saving workbooks 407
187 SPECS workbook 396–400
Add Stream button Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM)
toolbar 41, 181 299–303
Index 507
Analyzer Utility Model (AUM) Automatic Item Evaluation checked
notes 124 command
Anchor bolts Tools menu 45, 471
civil installation bulk 198 Automatic task backup 53
Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure
Design Criteria 93 B
Apply button
Develop Stream specifications Backup options
form 120, 219 Preferences 53
Installation Bulks form 192 Backup/Recovery tab 53
Interactive Sizing form 226 Base Design Value
Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments Analyzer Economics Module
form 194 (AEM) 405, 406
Preferences dialog box 51 Base Stream
Area Develop Stream specifications
adding 186 form 121
deleting 207 Develop Streams dialog box
icons 28 126–128, 181
importing 203 BaseCase, default scenario name
List view display of items 32 19
mapping 152 Basis
pop-up menu 187 Map dialog box 154
re-numbering 208 streams 118, 121, 128, 126–
simulator 146, 154, 160, 174 128, 181
type 186 Basis for Capital Costs
Area Dimensions 202 construction workforce 74–77
Area Information dialog box 186 indexing 78
Area Name 202 input units of measure 63
Area Type 202 introduction 62
ARR(Accounting Rate of Return) libraries 129, 130
Cashflow spreadsheet 461 output (reports) units of
ASME measure customization 65
pressure vessel design code selecting defaults 130
selection 69 BFD See Block Flow Diagram (BFD)
Aspen Icarus Reporter Block Flow Diagram (BFD)
accessing 413 displaying 147
creating a user database 438 Drag & Find feature 148
Data trending 433 introduction 147
Excel reports 426–433 right-click commands 149
HTML reports 424–426 View menu 151
importing data 437 Zoom commands 150
Management reports 426–429 Bottom sump height
menu bar 416 towers, design criteria 94
report mode 416 BS5500
standard reports 417–424 pressure vessel design code
Aspen Plus selection 69
link to Aspen Process Economic Buildings 185
Analyzer 136 By-products
map specs 86 escalation 411
models used in sizing towers 245 Stream Input worksheet 412
AspenTech
Aspen Plus simulator program 86
Auto Filter 433
Index 508
C Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
Reporter 434
Cached project information 48
Close command
Cancel button
File menu 42
Develop Stream specifications
COA See Code of Account (COA)
form 120
Code of Account (COA)
Preferences dialog box 52
allocating UCL item costs to 287
Capacity
Cold Inlet Stream field 226
changing 299
Cold Outlet Stream field 226
Capacity over-design factor See
Color coding
Pump overdesign factor
Component Specifications form
Capital cost parameters
191
Project Input worksheet 410
Component Map Information 158,
Capital Costs
161
Cashflow spreadsheet 458
Component Name 159
depreciation 107–108, 459
errors 394
accessing 190
escalation 108, 455, 458
color coding 190, 191
Executive Summary spreadsheet
Options button 191, 192
463
P&ID button 195, 198
Investment Parameters 108
Component Status 160
Project Summary spreadsheet
Components See Project
452, 453, 454–455
components
reports 52, 442, 445
Components view
toolbar button 41, 413, 439
Palette 35, 36
View command 44, 151, 176,
Compressors
413, 439
design criteria specifications 93
Capital investment
sizing 216
Computer name
Capture worksheet
scenario information 25
Configuration options
(AEM) 400
mapping 156, 161
Cascade command
Construction
Window menu 30, 46
workforce 74–77
Cash Flow Summary
Construction schedule
reports, Icarus Editor 445
Project Schedule Data Sheet 446
Cash flows
Contingency
General Specs 67, 68, 70
Cashflow spreadsheet 457–461
CASHFLOW.ICS
455
Contingency Percent field
ChemCAD
General Specs 67, 68
map specs 87
Contractor
simulator report preparation
fees 455
137–138
reports 446
Chemstations
Control Center button bar 350
link to IPE 11, Also See
Control centers
ChemCAD
instrumentation loop 200
Civil
Control Panel worksheet
installation bulk 198
material costs and man-hours
(AEM) 396
193
Control signal
Clear All Saved Trends command
Index 509
Control valve Currency Conversion Rate
instrumentation loop 200–201 creating a project 22
Copy button Executive Summary spreadsheet
toolbar, Icarus Editor 441 462
Copy command General Project Data 22, 62
library items 294 Project Summary spreadsheet
project components 205, 206 451
Cost libraries Currency Name 21
deleting 297 Currency Symbol 21
duplicating 296 Current Map List
Equipment Model Library (EML) Project Component Map
278–283 Specifications dialog box 85
importing 295 Custom Model
introduction 277 instructions 208–212
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 285–290 Preferences 54
Costs See Capital costs; Direct Custom Tasks command
costs; Equipment; Labor; Tools menu 45
Operating costs; Project cost; Cut command
Project direct costs; Total project components 205
direct cost; Total project cost; Cyclone inlet linear velocity
Utility costs design criteria specifications 102
Design Basis worksheet 402
distribution graph, Figures D
worksheet 404
EPC worksheet 400 Data trending
Country Base 21 Aspen Icarus Reporter 433
Craft code 78 DC_V worksheet
Craft rates Analyzer Economics Module
construction workforce 77–78 (AEM) 397
Create New Project dialog box 18, Decision Analyzer command
23 Run menu 395
Create New Trend in Excel Decision Analyzer dialog box 395
command Decision Center worksheet
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Analyzer Economics Module
Reporter 435 (AEM) 397
Create Stream dialog box 125, Delete button
127, 219, 220 Pipe Details form 197
Create tab view Delete Mappings command 160
Develop Streams dialog box 125 Deleting
Create User Database command areas 207
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter components 206
416, 438 mappings 160
Create User Database dialog box projects and project scenarios 47
Aspen Icarus Reporter 438 Density
Creating Develop Stream specifications
project scenarios 18–22 form 122
streams 218–221 Depreciation expense
Creating a new project 18 Cashflow spreadsheet 459
creating projects by importing Depreciation method
templates 27 Project Input worksheet 411
Currency Depreciation Method
Analyzer Economics Module Cashflow spreadsheet
(AEM) 395, 400 (CASHFLOW.ICS) 458, 459
Index 510
Investment Parameters 107 Direct costs Also see Total direct
Project Summary spreadsheet cost
(PROJSUM.ICS) 453 Directories
Design code project, locations - Preferences
Executive Summary spreadsheet 55–58
463 Disconnect command
Project Summary spreadsheet streams 183
451 Disconnected Streams dialog box
Design Code 183
General Specs 69 Discounted cash-flow rate of return
Design Criteria See Internal Rate of Return
libraries 129 (IRR)
selecting defaults 130 Display results after evaluation
Design Criteria specifications 90 Preferences 52
Design pressure Docking 38
applying 2/3 rule for 94, 240 Documentation 15
design criteria specifications 91 Double Declining (Balance)
sizing agitators 235 Investment Parameters,
sizing heat exchangers 241 Depreciation Method 107
sizing towers 251 Draw Disconnected Stream button
utility specifications 105 toolbar 183
Design temperature Draw Disconnected Stream button
design criteria specifications 92 toolbar 41
sizing agitators 235 Draw Disconnected Stream
sizing heat exchangers 241 command
sizing towers 251 View menu, PFD 183
utility specifications 104 Draw Disconnected Stream
Desired Rate of Return command
Cashflow spreadsheet View menu, PFD 177
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 457 Duct installation bulk 197
Executive Summary spreadsheet
(EXECSUM.ICS) 463 E
Investment Parameters
specifications 107 Earnings
Project Summary Cashflow spreadsheet 459
(PROJSUM.ICS) spreadsheet Economic Life of Project
452 Investment Parameters 107
Detailed Process Economics reports Project Summary spreadsheet
Error! Not a valid bookmark (PROJSUM.ICS) 452, 457
in entry on page 395 ECOSYS.xls 395, 406
Develop Equipment Library Model Edit Connectivity button
form 281 toolbar 41, 178, 179
Develop Product Specifications Edit Connectivity command
dialog box 116 View menu, PFD 177, 178
Develop Stream specifications form Electrical
120, 219, 221 installation bulk 201
Develop Streams dialog box 125, material costs and man-hours
126, 219, 220 193
Develop Utiltiy Specifications dialog Electricity
box 103 operating unit costs
DIN specifications 112
pressure vessel design code E-mail
selection 69 reports 426, 427, 432
Index 511
EML See Equipment Model Library Evaluate Project button
(EML) toolbar 41, 393
Engineering schedule Evaluate Project command
Project Schedule Data Sheet 446 Run menu 43, 393
Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC) Evaluation
period item 470
Cashflow spreadsheet Preferences 52
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 457 project 393
Executive Summary spreadsheet Evaluation Engine 16, 243, 438
(EXECSUM.ICS) 462 Excavation and backfill
Investment Parameters 108 civil installation bulk 198
Engineer-Procure-Construct period Excel
Project Summary spreadsheet Analyzer Economics Module
(PROJSUM.ICS) 452, 453 (AEM) 395–412
EPC See Engineer-Construct- Excel Custom Model files 208–212
Procure (EPC) period Excel reports
EPC Phase Auto Filter 433
Project Input worksheet 410 descriptions 430
EQUIP.ICS opening 430
investment analysis Exchange rate See Also Currency
spreadsheets 449 Conversion Rate
Equipment Analyzer Economics Module
adding 186 (AEM) 400, 408
cost 449 EXECSUM.ICS 462–463
Equipment Model Library (EML) Executive Summary spreadsheet
adding an item to 279 462–463
adding EML item as a component 281 Exit command
creating 278 IPE File menu 44–46
definition 277 Expenses
Equipment Summary Cashflow spreadsheet 459
investment analysis Export to Excel Trending Report
spreadsheets 449 dialog box
ERROR message 394 Aspen Icarus Reporter 435
Error Messages command Export to Excel Workbook dialog
View menu 44 box
Escalating library costs 294 Aspen Icarus Reporter 427, 431
Escalation Export to SPECS Command
Cashflow spreadsheet File menu 42
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 458, 459 Export Trend Data into Excel dialog
cost libraries 294 box
Investment Parameters 108 Aspen Icarus Reporter 435
Project Basis worksheet, External Simulation Import Tool
Analyzer Economics Module command
(AEM) 402 Tools menu 45
Project Input worksheet 411 External Simulation Import Tool
Project Summary spreadsheet command
(PROJSUM.ICS) 453, 455 Tools menu 140–142
Estimate Class 62
Estimate Date 62 F
Evaluate button
Component Specifications form Facility Type
191, 470 Investment Parameters 109
Evaluate Item command 470 FATAL message 394
Index 512
Figures worksheet General rates
Analyzer Economics Module construction workforce 74–77
(AEM) 404 General Specs 66–69
File menu Gray borders
Aspen Icarus Reporter menu bar Component Specifications form
416 191
IPE menu bar 42 Green borders
Fit into one page Component Specifications form
Zoom dialog box 150 191
Float in Main Window command 38 Grid Settings command
Flow rate units View menu, PFD 177, 178
product specifications 117 Grids
Fluid classes viewing in Block Flow Diagram
utility streams 103 (BFD) 152
Foaming tendency viewing in Process Flow Diagram
trayed towers, design criteria 96 (PFD) 178
Foreman wage rate Grids Visible command
general wage rates 76 View menu, BFD 152
Form work Grout
civil installation bulk 198 civil installation bulk 198
Fraction basis 123
Freeze Content button H
Properties Window 37
Freight Heat exchangers
General Specs 68 design criteria specifications 94
Fuel sizing 239–242
operating unit costs utility specifications 102
specifications 112 Help menu 46
Furnace fractional efficiency Helper wage rate
heat exchanger design criteria 93 general wage rates 76
FVI (Future Value of Inflows) HETP (height equivalent of a
Cashflow spreadsheet 459 theoretical plate)
packed towers, design criteria 95
Hot Inlet Stream field 223
G
Hot Outlet Stream field 226
G and A Expenses HTML reports
Cashflow spreadsheet descriptions 424
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 458 Item Report 52
Investment Parameters 109 opening 425, 426
Project Summary spreadsheet Hyprotech
(PROJSUM.ICS) 454 link to IPE 11, Also See HYSIM,
Galvanizing (for steel) HYSYS
paint installation bulk 202 HYSIM
General and administrative costs map specs 88
Investment Parameters 109 models used in sizing towers 245
Project Summary spreadsheet simulator report preparation
(PROJSUM.ICS) 454 138–140
General investment parameters HYSYS
Project Input worksheet 411 map specs 89
General Project Data models used in sizing towers 245
creating a new project scenario simulator report preparation
21 140–142
project specifications 61
Index 513
I general wage rages 75
INFOmational message 394
Icarus Editor
Input Units of Measure
printing report 441
Specifications dialog box 20,
printing report section 440
63
reviewing results 439–448
Installation bulks
toolbar 440
accessing 192
Tools menu 45
civil 198
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)
duct 197
243, 438
electrical 201
Icarus interface 27–39
instrumentation 198
Icarus Object files 132
insulation 201
Icarus Project Component
introduction 192
Selection dialog box 158, 282,
material man-hour additions 195
288, 291
paint 202
Icarus Reference 16
pipe details 195
IEE See Icarus Evaluation Engine
pipe spec 195
(IEE)
Preferences 53
Import command
steel 198
File menu 42
Installation manual 15
Libraries view, Palette 132, 295
Instrument air
Import Connected Streams option
operating unit costs
Preferences 54
specifications 112
Import Data command
utility costs, Project Summary
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter
spreadsheet 456
416
Instrument volumetric model 198–
200
437
Instrumentation
Import Installation Bulks option
Preferences 54
loop adjustments 200–201
Import Selection dialog box
material costs and man-hours
Aspen Icarus Reporter 437
193
Importing
Insulation
areas 203
components 203
material costs 193
project from previous version
Interactive sizing 215–221
22–24
Interactive Sizing form 155, 159,
scenarios 204
222, 226
specification files 132
Interest rate
Inch-Pound (IP), units of measure
20, 131, 132
Interface layout 27–39
Incomplete items 33
Save Window States option
Indexing
52
Project Basis specifications 78
Internal Rate of Return (IRR)
Indicating signal
Statements worksheet 403
Indirect costs
Status worksheet 400
general wage rates 75
Investment Analysis
project specifications 105–118
454
viewing in MS Excel 449
reports 454
Investment Analysis View
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 277
command
Indirects
View menu 44, 448, 449
Index 514
Investment Parameters moving to another directory 134
libraries 129 Project Component Map
project specifications 105–112 Specifications 129
selecting defaults 130 specification libraries 129–133
IP, units of measure 20, 131, 132 Unit Cost Library (UCL) 285
IPE 5.0/5.1 Utility Specifications 129
importing from 22–24 view 34
IPELog.txt Liquid entrainment method 99, 258
Preferences, Logging 58 List view
IRR (Internal Rate of Return) description 32
Cashflow spreadsheet 460 mapped components 160
Item evaluation 470 simulator file name 145
automatic 471 Status column 160, 188
Item Report Load Data button
instructions for running 470 toolbar 41, 145
Preferences 52 Load Data command
Item Report command 470 Run menu 43, 145
Locations
J plant relocation 299
plant/project location 68, 451
JIS Preferences 55–58
pressure vessel design code Logging
selection 69 Preferences 58
Job Number field 62 Loops
Junction boxes instrumentation installation bulks
instrumentation loop 200 198
modifications 200–201
L
Labor cost per unit M
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 287 Magnification
Labor hours per unit Aspen Icarus Reporter 418
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 287 Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 150
Labor Unit Costs Main product
operating unit costs Project Summary spreadsheet
specifications 111 456
Laboratory charges Main Window
Project Input worksheet 410 display options 38
Laboratory Charges interface, default position 28
Investment Parameters 109 printing 42
Project Summary spreadsheet understanding 29–31
452, 454 Management reports 426–429
Ladders, steel - installation bulks Man-hour indexing 78
198 Manpower Productivity Expert
Length of Start-up Period (MPE)
Investment Parameters 110 Tools menu 45
Libraries Manufacturing cost parameters
Basis for Capital Costs 63, 129 Project Input worksheet 410
cost libraries 264–297 Map All Items option
Design Criteria 129 Map dialog box 154
Equipment Model Library (EML) Map command
278 pop-up menu 153
input units of measure 63–64 Map dialog box 153
Index 515
Map Items button MTD See Mean temperature
toolbar 152 difference (MTD)
Map Items command Multi-core runs
Run menu 43, 152 instrumentation loop 200
Map Selected Item(s) option MUSE
Map dialog box 154 design criteria specifications 93
Map Unsupported Models To
Quoted Cost Item N
Preferences, Process tab 54
Mapping simulator models Net Earnings
instructions 152–160 Cashflow spreadsheet 459
specifications 85 Net Present Value (NPV)
units of measure mapping specs Cashflow spreadsheet 460
81–84 Statements worksheet 403
unsupported models 54, 86 Status worksheet 400
Mass flow Net Return Rate (NRR)
Develop Stream specifications Cashflow spreadsheet 461
form 122 New command
Material and man-hour additions File menu 18, 23, 42
installation bulks 195 New Component Information dialog
Material and man-hour box 188
adjustments New Project button
installation bulks 193, 210 toolbar 18, 41
Material and man-hour indexing 78 NPV (Net Present Value)
Material cost per unit Cashflow spreadsheet 460
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 287 NRR (Net Return Rate)
Material costs Cashflow spreadsheet 461
indexing 78 Number of Periods for Analysis
Material Index Info form 79 Investment Parameters 107
Material streams Number of shifts 75
product specifications 115 Project Input worksheet 410
Mean temperature difference Number of Weeks per Period
(MTD) 240 Investment Parameters 106
Menu bar
Aspen Icarus Reporter 416 O
IPE 28, 44–46
OK button
Metric, units of measure 20, 131,
132
form 120
Microsoft Access Database (.mdb)
Installation Bulks form 53, 193
file 438
Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments
MIRR (Modified Internal Rate of
form 194
Return)
Open button
toolbar 24, 41
Mixture button
Open command
File menu 24, 42
form 120
Palette Projects view 26
Mixture Specs
Open Existing Project dialog box 25
developing streams 122
Open Workbook command
Modify command
simulator block 146
416, 433
streams 183
Opening an existing project 24
Modify tab view
Develop Streams dialog box 119
Index 516
Operating and Maintenance Labor Tools menu 45
Escalation Order Number 207
Investment Parameters 108 Overall column efficiency
Project Summary spreadsheet design criteria specifications 97
(PROJSUM.ICS) 453 tower sizing 252
Operating charges Overdesign factor 227
Cashflow spreadsheet 457 heat exchangers 94, 241
Investment Parameters 109 pumps 92
Project Input worksheet 410 Overtime
Project Summary spreadsheet hours,general wage rates 76
452, 454 rate, general wage rates 76
Operating costs Overwrite Project Backups option
Cashflow spreadsheet 459 52, 54
Figures worksheet 404
introduction to IPE 12 P
product specifications needed to P&ID button 195, 198
evaluate 116 Packed towers
Project Summary spreadsheet design criteria specifications 95
452 sizing 255, 256
raw material specifications Paint
needed to evaluate 113 material costs 193
Operating Hours per Period Palette
Investment Parameters 110 Components view 35, 36, 187
Project Summary spreadsheet cost libraries 278–297
451 description 34–36
Operating labor and maintenance Docking and undocking 38
Project Input worksheet 410 dragging components from 187
Operating labor and maintenance floating in Main Window 38
costs hide/display 36
Cashflow spreadsheet 457, 458 interface, default position 28
Investment Parameters 109, 111 Libraries view 34, 129–133,
Project Summary spreadsheet 278–297
453, 456 opening projects 25
Operating Mode Projects view 25, 34, 36, 50, 56
Investment Parameters 110 Recent Items folder 187
Operating supplies specification libraries 129
Project Input worksheet 410 unlocking projects from 50
Operating Supplies View menu 44, 176
Investment Parameters 109 Paste button
Project Summary spreadsheet toolbar, Icarus Editor 441
452 Paste command
Operating Unit Costs project components 205, 206
libraries 129 Patents and royalties
project specifications 110–112 Project Input worksheet 410
selecting defaults 130 Payout period
Options button Cashflow spreadsheet 461
Component Specifications form Period Description
191, 192 Investment Parameters 106
Options menu Phase durations
Component Specifications form Project Input worksheet 410
53, 191, 192 Phases
Options sub-menu Stream Input worksheet 412
Index 517
PI (Profitability Index) Locations tab view 55–58
Cashflow spreadsheet 461 Logging tab view 58
Pile types 71 Process tab view 54
Pipe Details installation bulk 195 prompts 52
Pipe Spec installation bulk 195 saving window states 52
Pipe volumetric model 196–197 Tools menu 45
Piping Prepared By field
installation bulks 195–197 general project date 62
material costs and man-hours Present Value of Cashflows
193 Cashflow spreadsheet 460
volumetric model 196 Pressure vessel design code
Piping and Instrumentation General Specs 69
Drawings (P&ID) manual 195, Primary fluid component 120, 123,
198 219
Plant bulks Print command
component categories 185 IPE File menu 42
difference from installation bulks Print Preview command
192 File menu 42
Plant capacity Print Setup command
changing 299 File menu 42
Plant location Printing
changing 299 Aspen Icarus Reporter 420
Plant Overhead forms and reports in Main
Cashflow spreadsheet 457 Window 42
Investment Parameters 109 Icarus Editor 440
Project Summary spreadsheet Pro/II
452, 454 models used in sizing towers 245
Platforms, steel - installation bulks R/R minimum 94
198 simulator report preparation
PO (Payout Period) 142–144
Cashflow spreadsheet 461 Problem description
PODE (Payout Period Desired SimSci report preparation 143
Cashflow spreadsheet 458 Process Complexity
Ports Visible button contingency affected by 70
toolbar 41, 178 General Specs 67
Ports Visible command Process connection
View menu, PFD 177 intrumentation loop 200
Potable water Process Control
operating unit costs specifiations General Specs 68
112 Process Description
utility costs, Project Summary contingency affected by 70
spreadsheet 456 equipment design allowance
Precooler affected by 70
suffix for mapping 157 General Specs 67
tower configurations 162, 247, Process Design specifications 81–
249 105
Preferences Process equipment 185
accessing 51 Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 174–
Backup tab view 53 183
buttons 51 Process Fluids
description 51 Investment Parameters 110
General tab view 52 Process options
introduction 51 Preferences 54
Index 518
Process Stream field Project Summary spreadsheet
product specifications 117 453, 455
raw material specifications 114 Project capital evaluation
Process vessel height to diameter Project Input worksheet 411
ratio Project component
design criteria specifications 98 connecting to stream 179
vessel sizing procedure 261, 263 Project Component Map Preview
Product escalation dialog box 156, 158, 161
Project Input worksheet 411 Project Component Map
Product sales Specifications
per hour, Project Summary dialog box 84
spreadsheet 455 libraries 129
per period, Project Summary project specifications, Process
spreadsheet 455 Design 84–90
total, Project Summary selecting defaults 129
spreadsheet 453 Project components
Product specifications adding 186
investment analysis component specifications 190
specifications 115–118 copying 205
libraries 130 deleting 206
selecting defaults 130 Equipment Model Library (EML) items
Product Support on the Web 281
command importing 203
Help menu 46 installation bulks 192
Production re-numbering 207
Stream Input worksheet 412 Unit Cost Library (UCL) item 288
Production operations Project cost
Stream Input worksheet 412 Cashflow spreadsheet 457
Productivity adjustments 75 contingency percentage 67
Products Escalation Project Summary spreadsheet
Investment Parameters 108 455
Project Summary spreadsheet Project Data Sheet
453 reports, Icarus Editor 444
Profitability Index Project Description
Cashflow spreadsheet 461 Project Properties 20, 60
Project areas See Area Project Summary spreadsheet
Project Basis 450
Basis for Capital Costs 62–78 Project directories
default specifications 129 alternate directories 55
General Project Data 61 copying 50
introduction 59 default, setting 57
Investment Analysis 105–118 Project evaluation
Process Design 81–105 Preferences 52
Project Properties 60 running 393
specification libraries 129 scan for errors 52, 393
Streams 118–129 Project Explorer 28
Project Basis view 28 Docking and undocking 38
Project Basis worksheet floating in Main Window 38
Analyzer Economics Module interface, default position 28
(AEM) 402 relation to Palette 34
Project Capital Escalation View menu 44, 176
Cashflow spreadsheet 458, 459 Project in use - message 49
Investment Parameters 108 Project Input worksheet
Index 519
Analyzer Economics Module view 34, 36
(AEM) 397, 405–406 PROJSUM.ICS
Analyzer Economics Module investment analysis 450–457
(AEM) 407–411 Prompts
Project Location Preferences 52
General Specs 68 Properties Window
Project Name description 37
Aspen Plus - Aspen Process Docking and undocking 38
Economic Analyzer simulator floating in Main Window 38
link 136 Freeze Content button 37
Cashflow spreadsheet 462 interface, default position 28
Create New Project dialog box relationship to specifications
19, 23 form 37
Project Summary spreadsheet View menu 44, 176
450 PROVISION See SimSci's Pro/II
Save As dialog box 47 with PROVISION
Project Properties Pump overdesign factor
creating a new project 19 design criteria specifications 92,
Project Basis specifications 60 243
Project scenarios sizing procedures 242, 243
creating new 18 Pumps
deleting 47 design criteria specifications 92
importing 204 sizing 216
opening existing 24 PV (Present Value)
salvaging 48 Cashflow spreadsheet 460
saving 46 PVI (Present Value of Inflows)
unlocking 49 Cashflow spreadsheet 460
Project Schedule Data Sheet PVO (Present Value of Outflows)
reports, Icarus Editor 446 Cashflow spreadsheet 460
Project Summary PVOP (Present Value of Outflows –
reports, Icarus Editor 442 Products)
Project Summary spreadsheet Cashflow spreadsheet 460
(PROJSUM.ICS) 450–457 PVOS (Present Value of Outflows –
Project Title Sales)
General Project Data 62 Cashflow spreadsheet 460
451 Q
Project Type
contingency affected by 70 Question mark in Status column
Executive Summary spreadsheet component specifications 160,
463 190
General Specs 67, 68 Quoted cost item
Project Summary spreadsheet mapping overhead/bottoms split
451 to 247
Project view 29 mapping unsupported models to
projects 54
creating from imported Quoted cost items
templates 27 mapping unsupported models to
Projects 85
copying 50 Quoted equipment 185, 192
creating 18–22
deleting 47
opening existing 24
Index 520
R Re-numbering
areas 208
Rate field
project components 207
product specifications 117
Report files
raw material specifications 114
Reporting Assistant 464
Rate Units field
Report templates
product specifications 117
Reporting Assistant 465
raw material specifications 114
Reporter See Aspen Icarus
Raw material
Reporter
costs, Cashflow spreadsheet 457
Reporting Assistant 464–469
costs, Executive Summary
Reports
spreadsheet 463
costs, project specifications 115
(AEM) Error! Not a valid
costs, Project Summary
bookmark in entry on page
spreadsheet 453, 455
395
escalation 108, 453, 458
customizing 464–469
project specifications 112–115
data trending 433–436
Raw Material Escalation
Excel Error! Not a valid
bookmark in entry on page
395, 426–433
HTML 424–426
453
Item report 470
Raw Material Specifications
Management reports 426
investment analysis, project
producing 393, 395, 470
basis 112–115
Standard reports 417–424
libraries 130
Reroute All Streams command
selecting defaults 130
Run menu 175
Raw materials
Reset button
escalation 411
Stream Input worksheet 412
form 120
Rebar
Residence time
civil installation bulk 198
design criteria specifications 96,
Recent Items folder 187
98
Reconnect Sink command
sizing crystallizers 237
stream, Process Flow Diagrams
sizing vessels 258, 260, 263
(PFD) 183
Re-Size command
Reconnect Source command
project component pop-up menu
streams, Process Flow Diagram
155, 217
(PFD) 183
RESULTS workbook
Red borders
(AEM) 400–405
191
Revenue
Refrigerant 224
Relation attributes 438
Royalties See Patents and
Relative Basis
royalties, Project Input
streams 118, 121, 126–128, 181
worksheet
Relocating
Run Report command
introduction 12
Remarks field
416
project properties 20
Project Properties 60
Re-number command S
Run menu 207, 208 Sales
Index 521
Cashflow spreadsheet 458 Select Import Type dialog box 24
Salvage Project As dialog box 49 Select Simulator Type dialog box
Salvage Value 144
Project Input worksheet 411 Sensor
Salvage Value (Percent of Initial instrumentation loop 200–201
Capital Cost) Separation factor
Cashflow spreadsheet 458 design criteria specifications 99
impact on depreciation 107 sizing vessels 258
Investment Parameters 107 Show Page Bounds
Project Summary spreadsheet View menu, BFD 152
452 View menu, PFD 177
recouped 460 Sieve tray design 254
Salvaging project scenarios 48 Signal cabling, instrumentation -
Save As command installation bulks 198
File menu 42, 47 SimSci's Pro/II with PROVISION
Save button models used in sizing towers 245
toolbar 41, 46 R/R minimum 94, 257
Save command SHORTCUT column operation
File menu 42, 46 257
Save Project As dialog box 47 simulator report preparation
Save Window States checkbox 142–144
Preferences 52 Simulation reports
Saving Aspen Plus 245, 247
cached information 48 ChemCAD 137–138
project scenarios 46 HYSIM 138–140, 245, 247
window states 52 HYSYS 140–142, 245, 247
Scan for Errors before evaluation loading 29
Preferences 52 Pro/II 142–144, 245
Scan Messages 394 selecting 145
Scenario Description Simulation Sciences Also See
General Project Data 62 SimSci's Pro/II with
Project Summary spreadsheet PROVISION
451 link to IPE 11
Scenario Name Simulator data
creating a new project 19 loading 144–146
importing Standard Basis from mapping 152–160
5.0 23 mapping specifications 85
Project Summary spreadsheet unsupported models 54
451 Simulator File Name
Scenario reporting project specifications, Process
Project Input worksheet 408 Design 145
Scenarios Simulator Type
creating 18–22 Executive Summary spreadsheet
importing 204 463
opening existing 24–27 project specifications, Process
Schedule Design 144
Project Input worksheet 408 Project Summary spreadsheet
Project Schedule Data Sheet 446 450
Screens Simulator Units of Measure
design criteria specifications 101 Mapping Specs
Select a Suffix dialog box 157 libraries 130
Select command project specifications, Process
Project Basis pop-up menu 133 Design 81–84
Index 522
selecting defaults 130 moving to another directory 134
Single Component Summary SPECS workbook
Report Analyzer Economics Module
Preferences 52 (AEM) 396–400
Site development 185 Spreadsheets
Size button 215, 222 customizing 464–469
Size Icarus Project Component(s) SQL database
options exporting to Microsoft Access
Map dialog box 155 438
Size Item option 180, 215 Stairs, steel - installation bulks 198
Sizing Standard Basis
calculations 232–263 file, selecting 133
ChemCAD items 138 input file, General Project Data
defaults 232–263 61
HYSIM items 139 Standard reports
mapped components 155, 159, descriptions 417, 421–420
215 navigating 418
overview 215 opening 417
parameters 90, 93, 95, 96, 98, printing 420
100, 102 searching 420
requirements 232–263 Start date, basic engineering
Sizing Expert 102, 155, 180, 215– Executive Summary spreadsheet
221 462, 463
Sizing Method field General Specs 68
Equipment Model Library (EML) Project Summary spreadsheet
281 451, 452, 455
sizing parameter symbols 283 Starting program 17
Snap to Grid checkbox Start-up period, length
Grid properties 178 Investment Parameters 110
Snap to Grid command Statements worksheet
View menu, BFD 152 Analyzer Economics Module
View menu, PFD 177 (AEM) 403
Soil conditions Status bar 28
General Specs 68, 71 View menu 44, 176
Solids handling information Status column
design criteria specifications 101 List view 160, 188
Source Status worksheet
Map dialog box 154 Analyzer Economics Module
Specification basis (AEM) 400
product specifications 117 Steam utility 224
raw material specifications 114 Steel
Specification files installation bulk 198
creating 131 material costs and man-hours
deleting 133 193
duplicating 132 Straight Line
importing 132 Investment Parameters,
introduction 129 Depreciation Method 107
modifying 131 Stream Input worksheet
moving to another directory 134 Analyzer Economics Module
selecting 133 (AEM) 411–412
Specification libraries Analyzer Economics Module
customizing 130–133 (AEM) 405–406
introduction 129
Index 523
Analyzer Economics Module templates
(AEM) 397 adding 26
Streams creating projects from 27
absolute basis 127 Templates Tab 38
adding 125, 180 TEX (Total expenses)
basis mode 127 Cashflow spreadsheet 459
connecting to equipment during Tile command
sizing 221–228 Window menu 30, 46
connectivity, Process Flow Time period
Diagram (PFD) 178 Project Input worksheet 409
creating 125, 180 Timed backup 53
creating from Project Explorer Timed Recovery 53
218–221 Toolbar
deleting 128, 183 buttons 40
material 115 description 40
modifying 119 docking 40
process 117 interface, default position 28
product specifications 115 View menu 44, 176
relative basis 127 Tools menu 45
Streams List command Total direct cost
View menu, BFD 152 Capital Cost report, Icarus Editor
View menu, PFD 177 448
Subcooling Equipment Summary
tower configurations 162 spreadsheet (EQUIP.ICS) 449
Suffixes Total earnings
mapping 157 Cashflow spreadsheet 459
Sum of the Digits Total Expenses
Investment Parameters, Cashflow spreadsheet 459
Depreciation Method 107 Total Manpower Schedule
Supervision reports, Icarus Editor 444
costs, Project Input worksheet Total Operating Cost, Executive
411 Summary spreadsheet 463
System cost base date Total project cost
Executive Summary spreadsheet Cashflow spreadsheet 457
463 Project Summary spreadsheet
Project Summary spreadsheet 455
451 Tower configurations
mapping 156, 164–172, 246–
T 249
Training command
Tax Rate Help menu 46
Cashflow spreadsheet 457 Transducers
Investment Parameters 107 instrumentation loop 200
Project Summary spreadsheet Transmitters, instrumentation -
452 installation bulks 198
Taxes Trayed towers
amount owed, Cashflow design criteria specifications 96
spreadsheet 459 sizing 252, 253, 256
General Specs 68, 70 Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
indirects, Project Summary Reporter 416, 434, 435
spreadsheet 454 Trending database reports 433–
Template files 436
Reporting Assistant 465 Trim cooler
Index 524
suffix for mapping 157 Project Summary spreadsheet
tower configurations 162, 247, 456
249 Utility Specifications
libraries 129, 130
U project specifications 102–105
selecting defaults 130
UCL See Unit Cost Library (UCL) Utility stream
Unique Project Backup options 54 creating 102
Unit Cost field modifying 102
product specifications 118 Utility Unit Costs
raw material specifications 115 operating unit costs
Unit Cost Library (UCL) specifications (non-heat
adding an item to 286 transfer utilities) 112
adding UCL item to a project 288 utility specifications (heat-
creating 285 transfer utilities) 105
definition 277
Units of measure
V
input customization 20, 63
output (reports) customization Valve tray sizing 255
65 Vapor disengagement height
project properties 20 towers, design criteria 94
scenario information 25 Version
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 287 scenario information 25
Units of Measure Specification Vessel
dialog box 82 design criteria specifications 99–
Unlock command 49 101
Unsupported simulator models diameter, General Specs 69
Preferences 54 height to diameter ratio 98, 261,
Update button 263
Develop Stream specifications sizing 216, 257
form 120 View Existing Trend Data command
User Custom Model 208–212 Trend menu, Aspen Icarus
User name Reporter 416, 437
scenario information 25 View menu 44, 176
Utilities
escalation 411 W
list of availiable utility resources
224 Wage rates
Stream Input worksheet 412 construction workforce
usage estimation 123 specifications 74–77
Utilities Escalation WARNing message 394
Cashflow spreadsheet 458 What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get
Investment Parameters 108 Zoom dialog box 150
Project Input worksheet 411 Window menu 46
Project Summary spreadsheet Window states, saving 52
(PROJSUM.ICS) 453 Workbook mode
Utility costs understanding 29–31
Cashflow spreadsheet 457 View menu 44, 176
Executive Summary spreadsheet Workforce reference base
463 General Wage Rates 75
heat-transfer utilities 105 Working capital
non-heat transfer utilities 112 Project Input worksheet 410
Working capital percentage
Index 525
Working Capital Percentage
WYSIWYG
Zoom dialog box 150
Z
Zoom
Aspen Icarus Reporter 418
Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 150
toolbar 41
Index 526

AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV7 3 1-Usr

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV7 3 1-Usr

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AspenProcessEconAnalyzerV7 3 1-Usr

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Aspen Technology, Inc.

3 Defining the Project Basis ..................................................................................59

4 Loading and Mapping Simulation Data .............................................................135

5 Defining Project Components ...........................................................................185

6 Sizing Project Components...............................................................................215

7 Piping and Instrumentation Models .................................................................265

8 Developing and Using Cost Libraries ................................................................277

9 Changing Plant Capacity and Location..............................................................299

10 Analyzer Utility Modules.................................................................................317

11 Evaluating the Project ....................................................................................393

Appendix A: Equipment and Slots of those Equipment Affected by Mapping .......473

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, formerly known as Icarus Process

Mapping of Simulator Models to Process

Capital Investment and Schedules:

Development of Operating Costs

Investment Analysis and Aspen Process

Alternative Capacities and Locations

Detailed, Interactive Process Economics

Links to Project Evaluation Programs

Understanding Aspen Process

New Features in Aspen Economic

Piping and Instrumentation Drawings

You use the Online Technical Support Center to:

Starting Aspen Process

To start Aspen Process Economic Analyzer:

Starting a Project Scenario

Creating a New Project Scenario

 Click on the toolbar.

2 Either click an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter a

12 Click OK when finished entering General Project Data.

with these and other features now available on the interface.

Importing an Aspen Process Economic

 Click on the toolbar.

2 Either select an existing project in which to start a new scenario, or enter

6 Click the project scenario folder; then click OK.

Opening an Existing Project

 Click on the toolbar.

This opens the selected scenario.

Working with Templates

Note: When opening a project from a template, or opening a template itself,

Understanding the Icarus

The Icarus interface includes the following features:

Status Bar - Displays Aspen Process Economic Analyzer system status.

To expand a tree level:

Project Explorer Views

Process View displays simulator data information. In this view, simulator

As in a process simulator, like AspenPlus or HYSYS, blocks represent different

1 Main Project, containing the default Main Area and any

To change column settings on the area-level list:

2 To simply hide/unhide a column, click it on the menu.

Likewise, the Palette’s Libraries view contains libraries of Project Basis

In addition to allowing you to import the contents of other scenarios, the

To hide/display the Properties Window, press ALT+2 or use the checked

Customizing the Icarus Interface

To dock to a different edge:

Undocking by Dragging onto Main Window

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer's Toolbar

Create a new project scenario. See “Creating a New Project Scenario” on

Open an existing project scenario. See “Opening an Existing Project